IEEE Std 802.11-2012 13.3.1 states that the AID should be generated on
the local node for each peer. Previously, we were using the peer link ID
(generated by the peer) which may not be unique among all peers. Correct
this by reusing the AP AID generation code.
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Commit d66dcb0d0b ('WEP: Remove VLAN
support from hostapd') already removed VLAN support for WEP encryption,
so vlan_setup_encryption_dyn() is no longer needed.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
This ensures that group key is set as long as the interface exists.
Additionally, ifconfig_up is needed as wpa_group will enter
FATAL_FAILURE if the interface is still down. Also vlan_remove_dynamic()
is moved after wpa_auth_sta_deinit() so vlan_remove_dynamic() can check
it was the last user of the wpa_group.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Some APs don't include a CSA IE when an ECSA IE is generated,
and mac80211 used to fail following their channel switch. Add
a testing option to hostapd to allow reproducing the behavior.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Fix and extend the ieee80211_freq_to_channel_ext() function to deal
correctly with VHT operating classes (128, 129, 130).
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The CSA channel and operating class values need to be set for all types
of channel switch (i.e., either if it's triggered by the control
interfaces or due to the GO-follows-STA flow). To do so, move the code
that sets them from the GO-follows-STA flow to the more generic
hostapd_fill_csa_settings() function.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <luciano.coelho@intel.com>
The hostapd_hw_get_channel() function can't be used to convert center
frequencies to channel numbers, because the hw mode lists don't have all
the center frequencies. The hw mode lists have the main channel
frequencies and flags to indicate the channel topography.
For instance, channel 5805 with VHT80- has the channel center frequency
segment 0 at 5775. This segment is only indicated indirectly in the hw
mode list by the HOSTAPD_CHAN_VHT_50_30 flag. The hw mode list doesn't
have any elements with frequency 5775 to allow the conversion to a
channel number. Thus, we need to use ieee80211_freq_to_chan() instead.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <luciano.coelho@intel.com>
Pass to the driver a list of CSA counter offsets when sending Probe
Response frames during a CSA period. This allows the kernel to correctly
update the CSA/eCSA elements.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Some management frames contain CSA counters which should be updated by
kernel. Change driver op send_mlme() allowing to send a frame,
specifying an array of offsets to the CSA counters which should be
updated. For example, CSA offsets parameters should be specified when
sending Probe Response frames during CSA period.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Advertise current operating class in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
This Supported Operating Classes element is required by the standard
when extended channel switch is supported. However, since this element
doesn't reflect correctly the sub-band spectrum breakdown and can't be
effectively used by clients, publish only the minimal required part
which is the current operating class.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Fix the order of CSA, eCSA, Secondary Channel Offset, and Wide Bandwidth
Channel Switch Wrapper elements in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add new GO frequency move policy. The P2P_GO_FREQ_MOVE_SCM_ECSA prefers
SCM if all the clients advertise eCSA support and the candidate
frequency is one of the group common frequencies.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Extended channel switch provides an ability to switch between operating
classes and is required for P2P Devices by the P2P specification when
switching in 5 GHz.
When the operating class is provided for channel switch, the AP/P2P GO
will use eCSA IE in addition to the regular CSA IE both on 2.4 GHz and 5
GHz bands.
Transitions between different hw_modes are not supported.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Channel switch may be performed using both CSA and eCSA IEs together.
This may happen, for example with a P2P GO on band A with legacy
clients. Extend driver API to support up to 2 CSA counters.
This patch also includes the required implementation for nl80211.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
When building Beacon and Probe Response frames for the target channel,
consider bandwidth parameter for VHT channels. In addition, add support
for updating vht_oper_centr_freq_seg0_idx and
vht_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
When switching to a VHT channel with width greater than 20 MHz, add Wide
Bandwidth Channel Switch element. This element is added in Beacon and
Probe Response frames inside Channel Switch Wrapper element.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
When CSA is started, hostapd_change_config_freq() computes the channel
from the provided frequency. Use this stored channel to add CSA IE in
Beacon frames, instead of recomputing the channel each time.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
All the other web_connection_parse_*() functions were already doing
this, so make the GET handler consistent as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 7d711541dc ('Clear TK part of PTK
after driver key configuration') started clearing TK from memory
immediately after having configured it to the driver when processing
EAPOL-Key message 3/4. While this covered the most common case, it did
not take into account the possibility of the authenticator having to
retry EAPOL-Key message 3/4 in case the first EAPOL-Key message 4/4
response is lost. That case ended up trying to reinstall the same TK to
the driver, but the key was not available anymore.
Fix the EAPOL-Key message 3/4 retry case by configuring TK to the driver
only once. There was no need to try to set the same key after each
EAPOL-Key message 3/4 since TK could not change. If actual PTK rekeying
is used, the new TK will be configured once when processing the new
EAPOL-Key message 3/4 for the first time.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows the binary sizes to be reduced if no support for nl80211
vendor extensions are needed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Allow wpa_supplicant to use vendor scan (if supported by the driver)
together with the normal nl80211 scan and handling external scan events.
Since this results in possibility of concurrent scan operations, some of
the operations related to scan results need to check more carefully when
an event is relevant for a specific interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit contains the necessary changes for supporting the QCA vendor
scan implementation, i.e., sending the vendor scan command to underlying
driver and handling the vendor scan events from the driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Introduce definitions for QCA vendor specific subcommands
and attributes to support vendor scan request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes an issue where hostapd SET command is used to configure RSN
parameters and the wpa parameter is sent after the other parameters.
Previously, the default case here ended up clearing rsn_pairwise and
wpa_pairwise values and once wpa=2 was finally set, the cipher
configuration had already been lost.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Split chown() call in wpa_ctrl_open() and wpa_ctrl_open2() to allow the
group id to be set even if the process does not have privileges to
change the owner. This is needed for modules that need to communicate
with wpa_supplicant since without the group change, wpa_supplicant may
not have privileges to send the response to a control interface command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, station's VHT information elements were copied and passed
regardless of the AP's VHT configuration. As a result, AP with VHT
disabled in configuration could have ended up transmitting packets in
VHT rates though AP is not advertising VHT support. Fix this by copying
the station's VHT capabilities only when AP supports VHT (both hardware
and configuration).
Signed-off-by: Ashok Raj Nagarajan <arnagara@qti.qualcomm.com>
The GTK value received in RSN (WPA2) group rekeying did not use the
wpa_hexdump_key() version of debug printing that is conditional on -K
being included on the command line.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use shorter variables for storing the attribute lengths and group these
variables together to allow compiler to pack them more efficiently. This
reduces the struct size from 960 bytes to 760 bytes in 64-bit builds.
This reduces stack use in number of functions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to maintain two concurrent instances of struct
wps_parse_attr in this function. Share a single structure for parsing
both IEs.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reset hapd->num_probereq_cb to 0 on an interface deinit to avoid
unexpected behavior if the same interface is enabled again without fully
freeing the data structures. hostapd_register_probereq_cb() increments
hapd->num_probereq_cb by one and leaves all old values unchanged. In
this deinit+init case, that would result in the first entry in the list
having an uninitialized pointer and the next Probe Request frame
processing would likely cause the process to terminate on segmentation
fault.
This issue could be hit when hostapd was used with WPS enabled (non-zero
wps_state configuration parameter) and control interface command DISABLE
and ENABLE were used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed to allow new operation to be started after an error
without having to wait for the AP entry to time out.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_supplicant_parse_ies() was never supposed to be used as a generic IE
parser, i.e., it is for the specific purpose of parsing EAPOL-Key Key
Data IEs and KDEs. TDLS used this function for parsing generic AP IEs
and while that works, it resulted in confusing "WPA: Unrecognized
EAPOL-Key Key Data IE" debug messages. Clean this up by using
ieee802_11_parse_elems() for the cases where generic IEs are being
parsed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the previous tracking design to add a station entry based
on other management frames than Probe Request frames. For example, this
covers a case where the station is using passive scanning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new no_auth_if_seen_on=<ifname> parameter can now be used to
configure hostapd to reject authentication from a station that was seen
on another radio.
This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
interface controlled by the same hostapd process to reject
authentication attempts from a station that has been detected to be
capable of operating on another band, e.g., to try to reduce likelihood
of the station selecting a 2.4 GHz BSS when the AP operates both a 2.4
GHz and 5 GHz BSS concurrently.
Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency for
connecting with the AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows control interface monitors to get more detailed information
in cases where wpa_supplicant-based SME receives an Authentication frame
with non-zero status code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new no_probe_resp_if_seen_on=<ifname> parameter can now be used to
configure hostapd to not reply to group-addressed Probe Request from a
station that was seen on another radio.
This can be used with enabled track_sta_max_num configuration on another
interface controlled by the same hostapd process to restrict Probe
Request frame handling from replying to group-addressed Probe Request
frames from a station that has been detected to be capable of operating
on another band, e.g., to try to reduce likelihood of the station
selecting a 2.4 GHz BSS when the AP operates both a 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz
BSS concurrently.
Note: Enabling this can cause connectivity issues and increase latency
for discovering the AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can now be configured to track unconnected stations based on
Probe Request frames seen from them. This can be used, e.g., to detect
dualband capable station before they have associated. Such information
could then be used to provide guidance on which colocated BSS to use in
case of a dualband AP that operates concurrently on multiple bands under
the control of a single hostapd process.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
For now, there is no support for passing extended_capa pointers through
the driver_privsep.c interface from wpa_priv. Avoid leaving bogus
pointers by explicitly clearing these on both wpa_priv and
wpa_supplicant sides.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
DSSS/CCK rate support in 40 MHz has to be set to 0 for 5 GHz band since
this mechanism is designed only for the 2.4 GHz band. Clear
HT_CAP_INFO_DSSS_CCK40MHZ in ht_capab when the configured mode is
neither 11b nor 11g.
Signed-off-by: Vasanthakumar Thiagarajan <vthiagar@qti.qualcomm.com>
This adds a new helper function wpa_ctrl_open2() that can be used
instead of wpa_ctrl_open() to override the default client socket
directory. Add optional -s<directory path> argument to hostapd_cli and
wpa_cli to allow the client socket directory to be specified.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
No need to have a common failure handler if it is used from only a
single location and that lcoation does not even need the memory freeing
step.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, the EAP-WSC peer state machine ended up just ignoring an
error and waiting for a new message from the AP. This is not going to
recover the exchange, so simply force the connection to terminate
immediately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The hbp pointer is moved to the next space already earlier in this code
path, so the while loop here did not really do anything.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for wpa_auth_sm_event(WPA_DEAUTH) to be called from
wpa_sm_step() iteration in the case the EAPOL authenticator state
machine ended up requesting the station to be disconnected. This
resulted in unnecessary recursive call to wpa_sm_step(). Avoid this by
using the already running call to process the state change.
It was possible to hit this sequence in the hwsim test case
ap_wpa2_eap_eke_server_oom.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Clearing keyRun here is not specified in IEEE Std 802.1X-2004, but it
looks like this would be logical thing to do here since the EAPOL-Key
exchange is not possible in this state. It is possible to get here on
disconnection event without advancing to the AUTHENTICATING state to
clear keyRun before the IEEE 802.11 RSN authenticator state machine runs
and that may advance from AUTHENTICATION2 to INITPMK if keyRun = TRUE
has been left from the last association. This can be avoided by clearing
keyRun here.
It was possible to hit this corner case in the hwsim test case
ap_wpa2_eap_eke_server_oom in the case getKey operation was forced to
fail memory allocation. The following association resulted in the
station getting disconnected when entering INITPMK without going through
EAP authentication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows an empty nested list (i.e., no MAC addresses) to be included
in the NL80211_CMD_SET_MAC_ACL message unlike with
nla_nest_start()/nla_nest_end() where the current libnl implementation
removes the "empty" attribute and causes cfg80211 to reject the command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the EAPOL-Key MIC derivation was already changed from SHA256 to
SHA384 for the Suite B 192-bit AKM, KDF had not been updated similarly.
Fix this by using HMAC-SHA384 instead of HMAC-SHA256 when deriving PTK
from PMK when using the Suite B 192-bit AKM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Config file is written to a temp file and then it is renamed to the
original config file. However, it is possible that the rename operation
will be commited to storage while file data will be still in cache
causing original config file to be empty or partially written in case of
a system reboot without a clean shutdown. Make this less likely to occur
by forcing the data to be written to the storage device before renaming
the file.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Commit 7da4f4b499 ('WPS: Check maximum
HTTP body length earlier in the process') added too strict check for
body length allocation. The comparison of new_alloc_nbytes against
h->max_bytes did not take into account that HTTPREAD_BODYBUF_DELTA was
added to previous allocation even if that ended up going beyond
h->max_bytes. This ended up rejecting some valid HTTP operations, e.g.,
when checking AP response to WPS ER setting selected registrar.
Fix this by taking HTTPREAD_BODYBUF_DELTA into account.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit de2a7b796d ('OpenSSL: Use
connection certificate chain with PKCS#12 extra certs') added a new
mechanism for doing this with OpenSSL 1.0.2 and newer. However, it did
not poinr out anything in debug log if SSL_add1_chain_cert() failed. Add
such a debug print and also silence static analyzer warning on res being
stored without being read (since the error case is ignored at least for
now).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to limit TLS session resumption within a TLS library
implementation to apply only for the cases where the same EAP method is
used. While the EAP server method matching will be enforced separately
by EAP server method implementations, this additional steps can optimize
cases by falling back to full authentication instead of having to reject
attempts after having completed session resumption successfully.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new tls_connection_set_success_data(),
tls_connection_set_success_data_resumed(),
tls_connection_get_success_data(), and tls_connection_remove_session()
functions can be used to mark cached sessions valid and to remove
invalid cached sessions. This commit is only adding empty functions. The
actual functionality will be implemented in followup commits.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This new hostapd configuration parameter can be used to enable TLS
session resumption. This commit adds the configuration parameter through
the configuration system and RADIUS/EAPOL/EAP server components. The
actual changes to enable session caching will be addressed in followup
commits.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EAP server is not yet capable of using TLS session ticket to resume
a session. Explicitly disable use of TLS session ticket with
EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP to avoid wasting resources on generating a session
ticket that cannot be used for anything.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
BoringSSL does not support 192-bit AES, so these parts of the
wpa_supplicant module tests would fail.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed at least with BoringSSL to avoid accepting OCSP-required
configuration with a TLS library that does not support OCSP stapling.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Unlike OpenSSL PKCS12_parse(), the BoringSSL version seems to require
the password pointer to be non-NULL even if no password is present. Map
passwrd == NULL to passwd = "" to avoid a NULL pointer dereference
within BoringSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
BoringSSL commit 533ef7304d9b48aad38805f1997031a0a034d7fe ('Remove
SSL_clear calls in handshake functions.') triggered a regression for
EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP session resumption in wpa_supplicant due to the
removed SSL_clear() call in ssl3_connect() going away and wpa_supplicant
not calling SSL_clear() after SSL_shutdown(). Fix this by adding the
SSL_clear() call into wpa_supplicant after SSL_shutdown() when preparing
the ssl instance for another connection.
While OpenSSL is still call SSL_clear() in ssl3_connect(), it looks to
be safe to add this call to wpa_supplicant unconditionally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This function does not seem to be available in BoringSSL. Since it is
needed for EAP-FAST (which is not currently working with BoringSSL),
address this by commenting out the EAP-FAST specific step from builds
that do not include EAP-FAST support.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL does include that function even though it claims
support for OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER where this is available (1.0.2). For
now, comment out that call to fix build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like BoringSSL has removed the AES_wrap_key(), AES_unwrap_key()
API. This broke wpa_supplicant/hostapd build since those functions from
OpenSSL were used to replace the internal AES key wrap implementation.
Add a new build configuration option
(CONFIG_OPENSSL_INTERNAL_AES_WRAP=y) to allow the internal
implementation to be used with CONFIG_OPENSSL=y build to allow build
against the latest BoringSSL version.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 6959145b86 ('FST: Integration into
hostapd') introduced this duplicated call due to an incorrect merge
conflict resolution in ap_sta_set_authorized(). An earlier commit
61fc90483f ('P2P: Handle improper WPS
termination on GO during group formation') had moved this call to an
earlier location in the function and there is no point in re-introducing
another copy of the call at the end of the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Couple of the for-each-interface loops used incorrect return value when
skipping over non-WPS interfaces. This could result in skipping some WPS
interfaces in the loop and returning error. Setting AP PIN did not check
for WPS being enabled at all and trigger a NULL pointer dereference if
non-WPS interface was enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Incorrect number of bytes was skipped from the beginning of the line
which resulted in the loop skipping spaces doing nothing. However, the
following operation was simply looking for the max-age parameter with
os_strstr(), so this did not have any effect on functionality. Fix the
number of bytes to skip and remove the unneeded loop to skip spaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the Hotspot 2.0 case of OSU user interaction to fail
with wpadebug browser due to permission denial in the "start" command
("java.lang.SecurityException: Permission Denial: startActivity asks to
run as user -2 but is calling from user 0; this requires
android.permission.INTERACT_ACROSS_USERS_FULL"). Avoid this by using
more flexible USER_CURRENT_OR_SELF (-3) value with the --user argument.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
cfg80211 sends TSF information with the attribute NL80211_BSS_BEACON_TSF
if the scan results include information from Beacon frame. Probe
Response frame information is included in NL80211_BSS_TSF. If the device
receives only Beacon frames, NL80211_BSS_TSF might not carry updated
TSF, which results an older TSF being used in wpa_supplicant. Fetch both
possible TSF values (if available) and choose the latest TSF for the BSS
entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When using P2P invitation to re-invoke a persistent P2P group without
specifying the operating channel, query the driver for the preferred
frequency list, and use it to select the operating channel of the group.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When using OpenSSL 1.0.2 or newer, this replaces the older
SSL_CTX_add_extra_chain_cert() design with SSL_add1_chain_cert() to keep
the extra chain certificates out from SSL_CTX and specific to each
connection. In addition, build and rearrange extra certificates with
SSL_build_cert_chain() to avoid incorrect certificates and incorrect
order of certificates in the TLS handshake.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, the possible extra certificate(s) from a PKCS#12 file was
added once for each authentication attempt. This resulted in OpenSSL
concatenating the certificates multiple time (add one copy for each try
during the wpa_supplicant process lifetime). Fix this by clearing the
extra chain certificates before adding new ones when using OpenSSL 1.0.1
or newer that include the needed function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This code path could not be hit with the RSNE generated by hostapd or
wpa_supplicant, but it is now possible to reach when using
own_ie_override test functionality. The RSNE and IE buffer length were
not updated correct in case wpa_insert_pmkid() had to add the RSN
Capabilities field.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the new own_ie_override=<hexdump> configuration parameter to
be used to replace the normally generated WPA/RSN IE(s) for testing
purposes in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PMKIDCount, PMKID List, and Group Management Cipher Suite fields are
optional to include in the RSNE in cases where these would not have
values that are different from the default values. In practice,
PMKIDCount is always 0 in Beacon and Probe Response frames, so the only
field of these that could have a non-default value is Group Management
Cipher Suite. When BIP is used, that field is not needed either due to
BIP being the default cipher when PMF is enabled.
Remove these fields from RSNE when BIP is used to save six octets in
Beacon and Probe Response frames. In addition to reduced frame length,
this is a workaround for interoperability issues with iOS 8.4 in cases
where FT and PMF are enabled. iOS seems to be rejecting EAPOL-Key msg
3/4 during FT initial mobility domain association if the RSNE includes
the PMKIDCount field.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is similar to the earlier commit
b363121a20 ('WPS: Reject invalid
credential more cleanly'), but for the AP cases where AP settings are
being replaced. Previously, the new settings were taken into use even if
the invalid PSK/passphrase had to be removed. Now, the settings are
rejected with such an invalid configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use NULL to indicate if the address is not available instead of fixed
00:00:00:00:00:00. wpas_p2ps_prov_complete() already had code for
converting NULL to that all zeros address for event messages.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Change P2PS P2P-PROV-SHOW-PIN/P2P-PROV-ENTER-PIN event notifications
on PD Request/Response handling to meet required P2PS behavior.
The new implemented scheme:
1. For a legacy P2P provision discovery the event behavior remains
without changes
2. P2PS PD, advertiser method: DISPLAY, autoaccept: TRUE:
Advertiser: SHOW-PIN on PD request replied with a status SUCCESS
Seeker: ENTER-PIN on PD response received with a status SUCCESS
3. P2PS PD, advertiser method: DISPLAY, autoaccept: FALSE:
Advertiser: SHOW-PIN on PD request replied with a status
INFO_CURRENTLY_UNAVAILABLE
Seeker: ENTER-PIN on Follow-on PD request with a status
SUCCESS_DEFERRED
4. P2PS PD, advertiser method: KEYPAD, autoaccept: TRUE/FALSE:
Advertiser: ENTER-PIN on PD request replied with a status
INFO_CURRENTLY_UNAVAILABLE
Seeker: SHOW-PIN on PD response received with a status
INFO_CURRENTLY_UNAVAILABLE
This change in behavior breaks the existing test cases
p2ps_connect_keypad_method_nonautoaccept and
p2ps_connect_display_method_nonautoaccept. Those will be fixed in a
followup commit.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add a function to compute the group common frequencies, and
use it to update the group_common_frequencies as part of the
channel switch flows.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add ieee80211_freq_to_channel_ext() conversion function into
ieee802_11_common.c. This function converts freq to channel and
additionally computes operating class, based on provided HT and VHT
parameters.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This makes it possible to use these helper functions from hostapd as
well as the current use in wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This buffer is owned by the FST module, so mark it const in the
set_ies() callback to make it clearer which component is responsible for
modifying and freeing this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes an issue where freed MB IEs buffer memory could potentially
have been accessed after an interface is detached from FST group.
Without this fix, if an interface is detached from FST group, it can use
MB IEs buffer previously set by fst_iface_set_ies(), although the buffer
was released by fst_iface_delete().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The mesh SAE auth often fails with master branch. By bisect I found
commit eb5fee0bf5 ('SAE: Add side-channel
protection to PWE derivation with ECC') causes this issue. This does not
mean the commit has a bug. This is just a CPU resource issue.
After the commit, sae_derive_pwe_ecc() spends 101(msec) on my PC (Intel
Atom N270 1.6GHz). But dot11RSNASAERetransPeriod is 40(msec). So
auth_sae_retransmit_timer() is always called and it can causes
continuous frame exchanges. Before the commit, it was 23(msec).
On the IEEE 802.11 spec, the default value of dot11RSNASAERetransPeriod
is defined as 40(msec). But it looks short because generally mesh
functionality will be used on low spec devices. Indeed Raspberry Pi B+
(ARM ARM1176JZF-S 700MHz) requires 287(msec) for new
sae_derive_pwe_ecc().
So this patch makes the default to 1000(msec) and makes it configurable.
This issue does not occur on infrastructure SAE because the
dot11RSNASAERetransPeriod is not used on it.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
The new CONFIG_NO_RC4=y build option can be used to remove all internal
hostapd and wpa_supplicant uses of RC4. It should be noted that external
uses (e.g., within a TLS library) do not get disabled when doing this.
This removes capability of supporting WPA/TKIP, dynamic WEP keys with
IEEE 802.1X, WEP shared key authentication, and MSCHAPv2 password
changes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
FIPS_mode_set(1) cannot be called multiple times which could happen in
some dynamic interface cases. Avoid this by enabling FIPS mode only
once. There is no code in wpa_supplicant to disable FIPS mode, so once
it is enabled, it will remain enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
MD4 is not allowed in such builds, so comment out md4_vector() from the
build to force compile time failures for cases that cannot be supported
instead of failing the MD¤ operations at runtime. This makes it easier
to detect and fix accidental cases where MD4 could still be used in some
older protocols.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 94f1fe6f63 ('Remove master key
extraction from tls_connection_get_keys()') left only fetching of
server/client random, but did not rename the function and structure to
minimize code changes. The only name is quite confusing, so rename this
through the repository to match the new purpose.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
tls_connection_get_keys() used to return TLS master secret, but that
part was removed in commit 94f1fe6f63
('Remove master key extraction from tls_connection_get_keys()'). Since
then, there is no real need for preventing this function from being used
in FIPS mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The bytes pointer was not reset back to the beginning of the buffer when
mixing in additional entropy from the crypto module. This resulted in
writing beyond the return buffer and not getting the required mixing of
the extra entropy for the actual return buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like the compiler version used in Android 5.0 warns about
potentially uninitialized oper_freq variable in these debug messages.
That is not really valid since this code path can be reached only if
found != 0 and in such a case, oper_freq is set. Anyway, it seems better
to avoid compiler warnings, so add an unnecessary initialization for
oper_freq for now.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
MD5 is not allowed in such builds, so comment out md5_vector() from the
build to force compile time failures for cases that cannot be supported
instead of failing the MD5 operations at runtime. This makes it easier
to detect and fix accidental cases where MD5 could still be used in some
older protocols.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
FIPS builds do not include support for MD4/MD5, so disable
EAP-TTLS/CHAP, MSCHAP, and MSCHAPV2 when CONFIG_FIPS=y is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
MD5 is not available in CONFIG_FIPS=y builds, so use SHA1 for the EAP
peer workaround that tries to detect more robustly whether a duplicate
message was sent.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The OpenSSL internal AES_wrap_key() and AES_unwrap_key() functions are
unfortunately not available in FIPS mode. Trying to use them results in
"aes_misc.c(83): OpenSSL internal error, assertion failed: Low level API
call to cipher AES forbidden in FIPS mode!" and process termination.
Work around this by reverting commit
f19c907822 ('OpenSSL: Implement aes_wrap()
and aes_unwrap()') changes for CONFIG_FIPS=y case. In practice, this
ends up using the internal AES key wrap/unwrap implementation through
the OpenSSL EVP API which is available in FIPS mode. When CONFIG_FIPS=y
is not used, the OpenSSL AES_wrap_key()/AES_unwrap_key() API continues
to be used to minimize code size.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This avoids a call to hmac_md5() to fix the build. The EAPOL-Key frame
TX code is not applicable for any FIPS mode operation, so the simplest
approach is to remove this from the build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When processing a GO Negotiation Request and Response, if local driver
supports the preferred channel list extension, then:
- Check if peer's preference for operating channel is already included
in our preferred channel list and if so, take the oper_channel as is.
- If peer's preference for operating channel is not in local device's
preferred channel list and peer device has provided its preferred
frequency list in the GO Negotiation Request/Response, then find a
channel that is common for both preferred channel lists and use it
for oper_channel.
- If peer's preference for operating channel is not in local device's
preferred channel list and peer device doesn't use preferred channel
list extension, i.e., no preferred channel list in GO Negotiation
Request/Response, then look for a channel that is common for local
device's preferred channel list and peer's list of supported channels
and use it for oper_channel.
- In case no common channel is found, use the peer's preference for
oper_channel as is.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a callback function that can be used from the P2P module to
request the current preferred list of operating channels from the
driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add an extra condition to omit operating channel preference when
building GO Negotiation Response. If the local device supports the
preferred frequency list extension, then when sending a GO Negotiation
Response frame, advertise the preferred operating channel unless local
device is assuming the P2P Client role and has an empty preferred
frequency list, in which case local device can omit its preference for
the operating channel.
This change helps make use of the preferred frequency list and the
calculated best channel for both negotiating parties of the P2P
connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When sending a GO Negotiation Request, advertise the preferred frequency
list in a new vendor specific IE. This can be used to extend the
standard P2P behavior where a single preferred channel can be advertised
by allowing a priority list of channels to be indicated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the driver supports the preferred frequency list extension, use this
information from the driver when no explicitly configured preference
list (p2p_pref_chan) is present for P2P operating channel selection.
This commit adds this for GO Negotiation and Invitation use cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds parsing of QCA vendor specific elements and as the first such
element to be parsed, stores pointers to the preferred frequency list
element that can be used to enhance P2P channel negotiation behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new enum qca_vendor_element_id registry is used to manage
assignments of vendor specific elements using the QCA OUI 00:13:74. The
initial assignment is for the purpose for extending P2P functionality
for cases where the wpa_supplicant implementation is used by both ends
of an exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the QCA vendor specific nl80211 interface to query the preferred
frequency list from driver and add a new wpa_cli command to query this
information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Upon GO Negotiation completion, if the remote peer becomes GO, send a
hint event over QCA vendor specific interface to inform the driver of
the likely operating channel of the P2P GO.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the nl80211 interface command "driver status" to retrieve the
concurrency capabilities from the driver using the QCA vendor
extensions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When ACS is offloaded to device driver and the hw_mode parameter is set
to any, the current_mode structure is NULL which fails the ACS command.
Fix this by populating the ACS channel list with channels from all bands
when current_mode is NULL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add vendor command to pass SET setband command to the driver and read
the updated channel list from driver when this notification succeeds.
This allows the driver to update its internal channel lists based on
setband configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The issue with the special form of TLS session tickets has been fixed in
the OpenSSL 1.1.0 branch, so disable workaround for it. OpenSSL 1.0.1
and 1.0.2 workaround is still in place until a release with the fix has
been made.
This allows TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2 to be negotiated for EAP-FAST with the
OpenSSL versions that support this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If there is only zero-length buffer of output data in error case, mark
that as an immediate failure instead of trying to report that
non-existing error report to the server. This allows faster connection
termination in cases where a non-recoverable error occurs in local TLS
processing, e.g., if none of the configured ciphers are available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-TLS was already doing this, but the other TLS-based EAP methods did
not mark methodState DONE and decision FAIL on local TLS processing
errors (instead, they left the connection waiting for a longer timeout).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 1.1.0 disables the anonymous ciphers by default, so need to
enable these for the special case of anonymous EAP-FAST provisioning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is needed when enabling TLSv1.2 support for EAP-FAST since the
SSL_export_keying_material() call does not support the needed parameters
for TLS PRF and the external-to-OpenSSL PRF needs to be used instead.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This needs to use the new accessor functions since the SSL session
details are not directly accessible anymore and there is now sufficient
helper functions to get to the needed information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This needs to use the new accessor functions for client/server random
since the previously used direct access won't be available anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
openssl_handshake() was checking only that in_data is not NULL and not
its length when determining whether to call BIO_write(). Extend that to
check the buffer length as well. In practice, this removes an
unnecessary BIO_write() call at the beginning of a TLS handshake on the
client side. This did not cause issues with OpenSSL versions up to
1.0.2, but that call seems to fail with the current OpenSSL 1.1.0
degvelopment snapshot. There is no need for that zero-length BIO_write()
call, so remove it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Report the feature capability on P2PS-PROV-START and P2PS-PROV-DONE
ctrl-iface events. A feature capability value is specified as
'feature_cap=<hex>' event parameter, where <val> is a hexadecimal
string of feature capability bytes in a PD Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
On PD Request/follow-on PD Request preparation set a feature capability
CPT value of PD context.
On PD Request processing use a request CPT and service advertisement
CPT priority list to select a feature capability CPT of PD Response.
On follow-on PD Request processing use a request CPT and a CPT priority
list in PD context to select a CPT value of follow on PD Response.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add a parameter allowing to specify a value of Coordination
Protocol Transport to P2PS_PROVISION and P2PS_PROVISION_RESP commands.
Extend the p2ps_provision structure to contain cpt_priority and
cpt_mask properties and initialize them on a P2PS PD request command.
The format of the parameter:
cpt=<cpt>[:cpt]
where <cpt> is CPT name e.g. UDP or MAC. The CPT names are listed
according to their preferences to be used for a specific P2PS session.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add Coordination Transport Protocol parameter to P2P_SERVICE_ADD
asp command.
Extend p2ps_advertisement structure to contain CPT priorities
and a supported CPT bitmask.
The format of the new parameter:
cpt=<cpt>[:<cpt>]
where <cpt> is a name of the Coordination Protocol Transport.
This implementation supports two CPT names: UDP and MAC.
The order of specified CPTs defines their priorities where
the first one has the highest priority.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add an auxiliary cstr_token() function to get a token from a const char
string. The function usage syntax is similar to str_token(), but unlike
str_token() the function doesn't modify the buffer of the string. Change
str_token() function implementation to use cstr_token().
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The foreach_fst_group() loop needs "break-if-found", not
"continue-if-not-found" to do the search iteration properly. If there
were multiple groups, the previous design could have failed to find the
interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
fst_read_next_text_param() is never called with buflen <= 1, so this
separate error path is practically unreachable. Merge it with another
error path to make this a bit more compact.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for there to be multiple FST groups, so the hardcoded
mechanism of selecting the first one when sending out an event message
may not be sufficient. Get the interface from the caller, if available,
and if not, go through all groups in search of an interface to send the
event on.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for there to be multiple FST groups, so the hardcoded
mechanism of selecting the first one when sending out an event message
may not be sufficient. Get the interface from the caller, if available,
and if not, go through all groups in search of an interface to send the
event on.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Now that both hostapd and wpa_supplicant already enforce no duplicate
fst_attach() calls, there is no need for this check within fst_attach().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Dialog token is only 8 bits and maintaining u32 version of it in struct
fst_group resulted in incorrect wrap-around behavior in
fst_group_assign_dialog_token(). It was possible to assign u8
dialog_token value 0 because of this. Fix this by using u8 variable
consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this is always supposed to be the first element, check that this
is indeed the case instead of blindly using values from within the
element.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Element ID and Length subfields are not supposed to be included in
the Length. In addition, both of these subfields needs to be filled in
even for non-zero status code cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the previous PMF (CONFIG_IEEE80211W=y) design that used
functionality from the FT (CONFIG_IEEE80211R=y) changes to work without
requiring CONFIG_IEEE80211R=y build option to be included.
Signed-off-by: Ashok Ponnaiah <aponnaia@qti.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for a registered eloop socket handler to be unregistered
and re-registered for a re-opened socket with the same fd from a timeout
or signal handler. If such a case happened with the old socket having a
pending event waiting for processing, some eloop combinations could end
up calling the new handler function with the new socket and get stuck
waiting for an event that has not yet happened on the new socket. This
happened with timeout and signal handlers with all eloop.c types. In
addition to that, the epoll case could also trigger this when a socket
handler re-registered a re-opened socket.
Fix these by checking whether there has been socket handler changes
during processing and break the processing round by going back to
select/poll/epoll for an updated result if any changes are done during
the eloop handler calls before processing the old socket results.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for the SIGINT/SIGTERM signal to be received while
processing a pending timeout/socket/signal event and then get stuck in
the following select() call before processing the signal event. If no
other events show up within the two second SIGALRM trigger, process will
be terminated forcefully even though there would have been possibility
to do clean termination assuming no operationg blocked for that two
second time.
Handle this more cleanly by checking for eloop.pending_terminate before
starting the select()/poll()/epoll_wait() wait for the following event.
Terminate the loop if pending signal handling requests termination.
In addition, make eloop_terminated() return 1 on eloop.pending_terminate
in addition to eloop.terminate since the process will be terminated
shortly and there is no point in starting additional processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Introduce definitions for QCA vendor specific subcommands and attributes
to support multiport concurrency.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new mechanism can be used to combine multiple periodic AP
(including P2P GO) task into a single eloop timeout to minimize number
of wakeups for the process. hostapd gets its own periodic caller and
wpa_supplicant uses the previously added timer to trigger these calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, one timeout per process (by default every 30 seconds) was
used P2P peer expiration and another per-interface timeout (every 10
seconds) was used to expire BSS entries. Merge these to a single
per-process timeout that triggers every 10 seconds to minimize number of
process wakeups due to periodic operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, this resulted in unnecessary wait and retransmission of the
previous EAP-Request. Change that to trigger immediate transmission of
EAP-Failure and disconnection since the EAP method cannot really recover
from this state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This functionality was removed from the Host AP driver in May 2003, so
there is not any point in maintaining this in hostapd either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The space separator between the command and the parameter was not
skipped properly and the first integer ended up being interpreted as 0
in all cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
fst_session_is_in_progress() is already checked as part of
fst_find_session_in_progress() before calling
fst_session_handle_action(). This is the only call path that can reach
fst_session_handle_tear_down() and as such, fst_session_is_in_progress()
cannot return 0 here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There was a mix of EINVAL and -EINVAL returns through the FST
implementation. Make this more consistent by always returning -EINVAL in
error cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The caller is not expected to free or modify the value since this is
returning a reference to a buffer maintained by the upper layer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to add new functions with more or less identical
functionality of an already available helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the hostapd global control interface ADD command to allow
driver wrapper to be specified ("ADD <ifname> <ctrl_iface> <driver>").
Previously, this case that did not use a configuration file allowed only
the default driver wrapper to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This experimental support for Texas Instruments C compiler was never
fully completed and it has not really been used in close to ten years,
so drop this to simply the header files.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a local variable and check the record payload length validity before
writing it into record->payload_length in hopes of getting rid of a
bogus static analyzer warning. The negative return value was sufficient
to avoid record->payload_length being used, but that seems to be too
complex for some analyzers. (CID 122668)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Typecasting &mgmt->u.action.u.fst_action to a struct pointer for various
FST Action frame payloads seemed to be triggering static analyzer
warnings about bounds checking since sizeof(mgmt->u.action.u.fst_action)
== 1 even though that is really a variable length structure. Try to
avoid this by calculating the pointer for the beginning of the frame
instead of variable length struct. (CID 125642)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for the previously set SSID to remain in place between
test cases (e.g., in sequence "p2ps_connect_adv_go_persistent
p2p_set_ssid_postfix") and the P2P SSID postfix not getting used
properly. Make this less likely to occur by clearing the old SSID in
p2p_flush().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These are confusing when the style used with the couple of FST IE checks
differs from the rest of hostapd/wpa_supplicant implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need for this function to be an inline function in a header
file since it is used only within fst_group.c.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 717333f4e4 ('FST: Add the Fast
Session Transfer (FST) module') performed incorrect frame length
validation for Setup Request (did not remove 24+1 header from
consideration) and did not include payload validation for other FST
Action frames. Fix these by explicitly verifying that the payload of
these frames is sufficiently long before reading the values from there.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to waste resources for this packet socket if FT-over-DS
is disabled or when operating P2P GO or AP mode in wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds the FST IEs received from the FST module into Beacon, Probe
Response, and (Re)Association Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Fast Session Transfer (FST) is the transfer of a session from a channel
to another channel in a different frequency band. The term "session"
refers to non-physical layer state information kept by a pair of
stations (STAs) that communicate directly (i.e., excludes forwarding).
The FST is implemented in accordance with IEEE Std 802.11ad-2012.
Definitions
* FST interface - an interface for which FST functionality is enabled
* FST group - a bunch of FST interfaces representing single
multi-band STA
* FST peer - a multi-band capable STA connected
* FST module - multi-band operation functionality implemented in
accordance with IEEE Std 802.11ad-2012 (see 10.32
Multi-band operation) as a part of hostapd/wpa_supplicant
* FST manager - an external application that implements custom FST
related logic, using the FST module's interfaces
accessible via CLI or D-Bus
This commit introduces only the FST module. Integration of the FST
module into the hostapd/wpa_supplicant and corresponding CLI/D-Bus
interfaces and FST related tests are covered in separate commits.
FST manager application is out of scope of these commits.
As FST aggregates a few interfaces into FST group, the FST module uses
global CLI for both commands and notifications. It also exposes
alternative non-interface based D-Bus subtree for this purposes.
Configuration and Initialization
* FST functionality can enabled by compilation flag (CONFIG_FST)
* hostapd/wpa_supplicant controlling multiple interfaces are used for
FST
* once enabled by compilation, the FST can be enabled for specific
interfaces in the configuration files
* FST interfaces are aggregated in FST groups (fst_group_id config file
entry), where each FST group:
- represents one multi-band device
- should have two or more FST interfaces in it
* priority (fst_priority config file entry) must be configured for each
FST interface. FST interface with higher priority is the interface FST
will always try to switch to. Thus, for example, for the maximal
throughput, it should be the fastest FST interface in the FST setup.
* default Link Loss Timeout (LLT) value can be configured for each FST
interface (fst_llt config file entry). It represents LLT to be used
by FST when this interface is active.
* FST interfaces advertise the Multi-band capability by including the
Multi-band element in the corresponding frames
FST CLI commands:
* fst list_groups - list FST groups configured.
* fst list_ifaces - list FST interfaces which belong to specific group
* fst iface_peers - list Multi-Band STAs connected to specific interface
* fst list_sessions - list existing FST sessions
* fst session_get - get FST session info
* fst session_add - create FST session object
* fst session_set - set FST session parameters (old_iface, new_iface,
peer_addr, llt)
* fst session_initiate - initiate FST setup
* fst session_respond - respond to FST setup establishemnt attempt by
counterpart
* fst session_transfer - initiate FST switch
* fst session_teardown - tear down FST Setup but leave the session object
for reuse
* fst session_remove - remove FST session object
FST CLI notifications:
* FST-EVENT-PEER - peer state changed (CONNECT/DISCONNECT)
* FST-EVENT-SESSION - FST session level notification with following
sub-events:
- EVENT_FST_SESSION_STATE - FST session state changed
- EVENT_FST_ESTABLISHED - previously initiated FST session became
established
- EVENT_FST_SETUP - new FST session object created due to FST session
negotiation attempt by counterpart
All the FST CLI commands and notifications are also implemented on D-Bus
for wpa_supplicant.
IEEE 802.11 standard compliance
FST module implements FST setup statemachine in compliance with IEEE
802.11ad (P802.11-REVmc/D3.3), as it described in 10.32 Multi-band
operation (see also Figure 10-34 - States of the FST setup protocol).
Thus, for example, the FST module initiates FST switch automatically
when FST setup becomes established with LLT=0 in accordance with
10.32.2.2 Transitioning between states.
At the moment, FST module only supports non-transparent STA-based FST
(see 10.32.1 General).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This helper function can be used to check whether a MAC address is a
multicast (including broadcast) address.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit implements hostapd global control interface notifications
infrastructure. hostapd global control interface clients issue
ATTACH/DETACH commands to register and deregister with hostapd
correspondingly - the same way as for any other hostapd/wpa_supplicant
control interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, hostapd only supported the case of EAPOL frames receiving
from interfaces enslaved into bridge. This commit adds support for any
Linux master (teaming, openvswitch, bonding, etc.) to be detected.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new control interface command "EAPOL_REAUTH <MAC address>
<parameter> <value>" can be used to implement the IEEE 802.1X PAE
Set Authenticator Configuration operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This new control interface command "EAPOL_REAUTH <MAC address>" can be
used to implement the IEEE 802.1X PAE Reauthenticate operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If WPA2-Enterprise connection with full EAP authentication (i.e., no
PMKSA caching used) results in a PMKID that does not match the one the
AP/Authenticator indicates in EAPOL-Key msg 1/4, there is not much point
in trying to trigger full EAP authentication by sending EAPOL-Start
since this sequence was immediately after such full authentication
attempt.
There are known examples of authentication servers with incorrect MSK
derivation when TLS v1.2 is used (e.g., FreeRADIUS 2.2.6 or 3.0.7 when
built with OpenSSL 1.0.2). Write a clear debug log entry and also send
it to control interface monitors when it looks likely that this case has
been hit. After doing that, stop the connection attempt by
disassociating instead of trying to send out EAPOL-Start to trigger new
EAP authentication round (such another try can be tried with a new
association).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds a new STATUS command field "eap_tls_version" that shows the
TLS version number that was used during EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST exchange.
For now, this is only supported with OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new phase1 config parameter value tls_disable_tlsv1_0=1 can now be
used to disable use of TLSv1.0 for a network configuration. This can be
used to force a newer TLS version to be used. For example,
phase1="tls_disable_tlsv1_0=1 tls_disable_tlsv1_1=1" would indicate that
only TLS v1.2 is accepted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this is already enforced in practice due to the limits on the
maximum control interface command length and total_length bounds
checking here, this explicit check on payload_length value may help
static analyzers understand the code better. (CID 122668)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the 32-bit record->total_length value to end up
wrapping around due to integer overflow if the longer form of payload
length field is used and record->payload_length gets a value close to
2^32. This could result in ndef_parse_record() accepting a too large
payload length value and the record type filter reading up to about 20
bytes beyond the end of the buffer and potentially killing the process.
This could also result in an attempt to allocate close to 2^32 bytes of
heap memory and if that were to succeed, a buffer read overflow of the
same length which would most likely result in the process termination.
In case of record->total_length ending up getting the value 0, there
would be no buffer read overflow, but record parsing would result in an
infinite loop in ndef_parse_records().
Any of these error cases could potentially be used for denial of service
attacks over NFC by using a malformed NDEF record on an NFC Tag or
sending them during NFC connection handover if the application providing
the NDEF message to hostapd/wpa_supplicant did no validation of the
received records. While such validation is likely done in the NFC stack
that needs to parse the NFC messages before further processing,
hostapd/wpa_supplicant better be prepared for any data being included
here.
Fix this by validating record->payload_length value in a way that
detects integer overflow. (CID 122668)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
One possible outcome of the P2PS PD is P2P GO/P2P Client. In this case,
one peer becomes a P2P GO and the P2P Client joins it. Since multiple
GOs may run simultaneously on the same P2P Device, the P2P Client should
join using the intended interface address.
To be able to find the device by the intended interface address, save it
during the PD.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
If a device may be an explicit GO, it adds the GO details in the PD
Request. First, we try to reuse an active GO. If it is not present, we
try to reuse a non-active persistent group. In the latter case, if a
dedicated P2P interface is needed, the intended address should be that
of the pending interface. However, the wpas_get_go_info() provided the
ssid->bssid address, which is the address of the P2P device. This might
result in an incorrect intended interface attribute in the PD Request in
case a separate group interface is used.
Fix this by setting group_iface variable to true only if a dedicated
interface should be used and set the attribute accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Validate the PD Response frame contents more thoroughly when it is used
for P2PS.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When persistent group is used and the peer is GO in this group,
intended interface attribute should be added to PD request/response.
Not doing so violates the spec.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When device A sends PD response to device B, device A should save
wps_prov_info for device B. Not doing so would result in a redundant and
incorrect PD flow, e.g., when upon PROV-DISC-DONE event device B starts
a GO and device A should join it.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In case of a P2PS PD, allow keypad, display, and P2PS WPS config
methods. For a legacy PD, allow keypad, display, and pushbutton methods.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add 'else if' to P2PS status verification to prevent a redundant
condition checking. The first 'if' condition is true only if
status == P2P_SC_SUCCESS || status == P2P_SC_SUCCESS_DEFERRED.
while the second condition checks:
status != P2P_SC_SUCCESS &&
status != P2P_SC_FAIL_INFO_CURRENTLY_UNAVAILABLE &&
status != P2P_SC_SUCCESS_DEFERRED
Thus, the two conditions are mutually exclusive and 'else if' can be
used if this case.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Delete redundant comparison of msg.wps_config_methods with
dev->req_config_methods in p2p_process_prov_disc_resp() since it's
already done early in this function. Also, the second comparison
doesn't make too much sense: it can happen after a possible
p2p_reset_pending_pd() call setting dev->req_config_methods to 0.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When wpa_supplicant receives a PD Response with reject status it
generated P2P-PROV-DISC-FAILURE event without adv_id and adv_mac
parameters. Fix this by adding these parameters to the
wpas_prov_disc_fail() function call.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
This fixes the incomplete driver_hostap.c change from commit
5d180a7739 ('drivers: Add freq parameter
to send_mlme() function') that did not take into account the internal
callers.
Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
Previously, only CONNECTING->CONNECTING case ended up sending out an
EAPOL-Start frame to avoid sending the unnecessary initial EAPOL-Start.
However, this optimization prevented new EAPOL-Start from being
initiated when leaving the HELD state. Allow that case to trigger
immediate EAPOL-Start transmission to speed up connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The only time the PIN should fail is when we initialize the TLS
connection, so it doesn't really make sense to get rid of the PIN just
because some other part of the handshake failed.
This is a followup to commit fd4fb28179
('OpenSSL: Try to ensure we don't throw away the PIN unnecessarily').
Signed-off-by: Mike Gerow <gerow@google.com>
The IPv6 address in the frame buffer may not be 32-bit aligned, so use a
local copy to align this before reading the address with 32-bit reads
(s6_addr32[]).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The 32-bit version of payload length field may not be 32-bit aligned in
the message buffer, so use WPA_GET_BE32() to read it instead of ntohl().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
64-bit builds with CONFIG_WPA_TRACE=y resulted in the wpabuf pointers
getting misaligned (only 32-bit aligned) and that would result in reads
and writes of unaligned size_t values. Avoid this by indicating explicit
alignment requirement for wpabuf_trace to 8 octets (i.e., there will be
extra four octets of padding in case of 64-bit builds).
Similarly, struct os_alloc_trace resulted in some potential misalignment
cases, e.g., when CONFIG_ACS=y uses a 'long double' variable within
struct hostapd_channel_data. Avoid misalignment issues with explicit
alignment indication.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
src/utils/list.h ended up defining a local version of offsetof() due to
stddef.h not getting included. This resulted in unnecessary warnings
from ubsan related to "dereferencing" of a NULL pointer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The input parameter ended up being converted to long int instead of int,
so use an explicit typecase to get rid of the compiler warning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use explicit typecasting to avoid implicit conversion warnings in cases
where enum eap_erp_type is used in functions taking an EapType argument.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The FT-specific check for valid group cipher in wpa_ft_gen_req_ies() was
not up-to-date with the current list of supported ciphers. Fix this by
using a generic function to determine validity of the cipher. In
practice, this adds support for using CCMP-256 and GCMP-256 as the group
cipher with FT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This mechanism to figure out TLS library capabilities has not been used
since commit fd2f2d0489 ('Remove
EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA') (Sep 2011).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to have separate return statements for these corner
cases that are unlikely to be hit in practice.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to have separate return statements for these corner
cases that are unlikely to be hit in practice.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new TEST_FAIL and GET_FAIL control interface commands can be used
similarly to the earlier TEST_ALLOC_FAIL/GET_ALLOC_FAIL design. The new
version is more generic framework allowing any function to be annotated
for failure testing with the TEST_FAIL() macro. This mechanism is only
available in builds with CONFIG_WPA_TRACE_BFD=y and
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y. For other builds, the TEST_FAIL() macro is
defined to return 0 to allow the compiler to remove the test code from
normal production builds.
As the first test site, allow os_get_random() to be marked for failing
based on call backtrace.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not allow 40 MHz co-ex PRI/SEC switch to force us to change our PRI
channel if we have an existing connection on the selected PRI channel
since doing multi-channel concurrency is likely to cause more harm than
using different PRI/SEC selection in environment with multiple BSSes on
these two channels with mixed 20 MHz or PRI channel selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Fix a condition when Advertised Service Info Attribute is added to
a probe response in p2p_buf_add_service_instance(). The issue is
that a 'found' value is increased even if 'test' and 'adv->hash' hashes
are different. As result 'found' may have a non-zero value when an
attribute data length is 0. In this cause an empty attribute is about to
be added. Fixing it by eliminating 'found' and checking 'total_len'
containing a real number of bytes added to Advertised Service Info
Attribute.
This fixes an issue from commit 50a9efe713
('P2PS: Fix Probe Response frame building in error cases').
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
The cwmin/cwmax parameters were limited more than is needed. Allow the
full range (0..15 for wmm_ac_??_{cwmin,cwmax} and 1..32767 for
tx_queue_data?_{cwmin,cwmax}) to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current P802.11 description of SAE uses "1 < element < p" as the
required range. However, this is not correct and does not match the
Dragonfly description of "1 < element < p-1". SAE definition will need
to change here. Update the implementation to reject p-1 based on the
correct rule here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the P2PS Probe Response frame to go out on the
channel on which a Probe Request frame was reported even when we are
just about to start Listen mode on another channel. This could result in
the peer device using incorrect channel for us. Fix this by skipping the
response in this special case while waiting for Listen mode to start.
This showed up as a hwsim test failure with test sequence "gas_fragment
p2ps_connect_display_method_nonautoaccept" in cases where the dev[0]
Listen channel was not same as the AP operating frequency in the GAS
test.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.11-2012 description of SAE does not require this, i.e., it
describes the requirement as 0 < scalar < r for processing the Commit
message. However, this is not correct and will be changes to 1 < scalar
< r to match the Dragonfly description so that a trivial secret case
will be avoided explicitly.
This is not much of an issue for the locally generated commit-scalar
since it would be very unlikely to get the value of 1. For Commit
message processing, a peer with knowledge of the password could
potentially force the exchange to expose key material without this
check.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This provides more information to upper layer programs on what happens
with connection attempts in cases where the enabled networks are not
found in scan results.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
wpa_supplicant has stub functions if the external p2p symbols are
unavailable, but the build still fails if the
wpa_driver_nl80211_driver_cmd symbol is missing. Fix this by leaving the
function pointer NULL. This is safe because wpa_drv_driver_cmd() performs
a NULL check.
Signed-off-by: Kevin Cernekee <cernekee@google.com>
If BOARD_HOSTAPD_PRIVATE_LIB is not used on an Android build, we will
need to replace both the p2p functions *and* wpa_driver_nl80211_driver_cmd
in order to successfully link. Let's make the name more generic so it is
more obvious what it is used for.
Suggested-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Kevin Cernekee <cernekee@google.com>
In case memory allocation fails, data->pac_opaque_encr_key may be NULL
and lead to possible crash.
Signed-off-by: Maneesh Jain <maneesh.jain@samsung.com>
Even though this OpenSSL function is documented as returning "1 if point
if on the curve and 0 otherwise", it can apparently return -1 on some
error cases. Be prepared for that and check explicitly against 1 instead
of non-zero.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If PWE is discovered before the minimum number of loops (k) is reached,
the extra iterations use a random "password" to further obfuscate the
cost of discovering PWE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This replaces the earlier IEEE Std 802.11-2012 algorithm with the design
from P802.11-REVmc/D4.0. Things brings in a blinding technique for
determining whether the pwd-seed results in a suitable PWE value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the IKE groups 27-30 (RFC 6932) to be used with OpenSSL
1.0.2 and newer. For now, these get enabled for SAE as configurable
groups (sae_groups parameter), but the new groups are not enabled by
default.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
draft-irtf-cfrg-dragonfly recommends implementation to set the security
parameter, k, to a value of at least 40. This will make PWE generation
take significantly more resources, but makes it more likely to hide
timing differences due to different number of loops needed to find a
suitable PWE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This check explicitly for reflection attack and stops authentication
immediately if that is detected instead of continuing to the following
4-way handshake that would fail due to the attacker not knowing the key
from the SAE exchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 0.9.8 (and newer) includes SSL_CTX_get_app_data() and
SSL_CTX_set_app_data(), so there is no need to maintain this old
OPENSSL_SUPPORTS_CTX_APP_DATA backwards compatibility design.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, it would have been possible for va_end(args) to be called
twice in case mp_init() fails. While that may not cause issues on number
of platforms, that is not how va_start()/va_end() are supposed to be
used. Fix this by returning from the function without using va_end()
twice on the same va_list args.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The construction used here to figure out the offset of variable length
IEs in Probe Request frames was a bit odd looking and resulted in a
warning from a static analyzer, so replace it with more standard use of
offsetof().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The flags argument is used to indicate a failure case (0x80) which
allows erp == NULL. This may be a bit too difficult combination for
static analyzers to understand, so add an explicit check for !erp as
another condition for returning from the function before the erp pointer
gets dereferenced without checking it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
drv cannot be NULL here (it is dereferenced even on the preceding line)
and anyway, os_free(NULL) is allowed, so remove the redundant check.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The eap argument to this function is never NULL and the earlier
ieee802_1x_learn_identity() call is dereferencing it anyway, so there is
no point in checking whether it is NULL later in the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This needs to find the PRI channel also in cases where the affected
channel is the SEC channel of a 40 MHz BSS, so need to include the
scanning coverage here to be 40 MHz from the center frequency. Without
this, it was possible to miss a neighboring 40 MHz BSS that was at the
other end of the 2.4 GHz band and had its PRI channel further away from
the local BSS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to have separate return statements for these corner
cases that are unlikely to be hit in practice.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, the common WLAN-* RADIUS attributes were added only when WPA
or WPA2 was used. These can be of use for OSEN as well, so include them
in that case, too.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to have a separate "fail silently" case for wpa_ie_len
== 0. That condition does not seem to be reachable and even if it were,
the following "ie len too short" case will result in the exact same
return value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
As far as IEEE 802.11 standard is concerned, WEP is deprecated, but at
least in theory, allowed as a group cipher. This option is unlikely to
be deployed anywhere and to clean up the implementation, we might as
well remove all support for this combination.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Sending a wowlan configuration command can be done on any wireless
interface (not only netdev), as it is a device configuration and not
interface configuration specific. Fix the code to allow it to be
sent on any interface.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Android libnl_2 implementation added support for "nl80211" name in
commit 'libnl_2: Extend genl_ctrl_resolve() to support "nl80211" name'
in July 2012 which got included in Android 4.2. It is fine to drop this
old Android ICS workaround from wpa_supplicant now.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
p2p_process_nfc_connection_handover() allocates msg memory in the parser
and might return before memory is released if the received message is
not valid.
Signed-off-by: Ben Rosenfeld <ben.rosenfeld@intel.com>
If key derivation fails, there is no point in trying to continue
authentication. In theory, this could happen if memory allocation during
TLS PRF fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Free tmp_out before returning to prevent memory leak in case the second
memory allocation in openssl_tls_prf() fails. This is quite unlikely,
but at least theoretically possible memory leak with EAP-FAST.
Signed-off-by: Ben Rosenfeld <ben.rosenfeld@intel.com>
org.wi-fi.wfds service is not a replacement for non-WFA service matches.
Do not try to replace the results with that if there is not sufficient
room for the response. Instead, reply with all the matching services
that fit into the message. org.wi-fi.wfds is the first entry in the list
(if matching request/service is present), so it won't get overridden by
other services.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The service hash for org.wi-fi.wfds is supposed to match only if the
device has a WFA defined org.wi-fi.wfds.* service. Verify that before
adding org.wi-fi.wfds to the response.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Probe Response building is already doing service matching and there is
no need to do this in both places, so simplify the p2p_reply_probe()
implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When doing initial processing of Probe Request frame service hashes, the
previous implementation dropped all other hash values if a hash for
org.wi-fi.wfds was included. This is not correct, since that is not a
full wildcard of all services (it only matches WFA defined
org.wi-fi.wfds.* services).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This "wildcard" match is for WFA specified org.wi-fi.wfds.* services,
not for all services. Verify that there is a really matching service
being advertised instead of assuming this "wildcard" matches if any
services are advertised.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The org.wi-fi.wfds "wildcard" is not a full wildcard of all service
names and as such, it must not remove other service name hash values
from the Probe Request frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2ps_gen_hash() has a limit on service names based on the temporary
buffer from stack. Verify that the service name from the local P2P_FIND
command is short enough to fix into that buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Quoting P2PS specification: "If multiple Service Hash values are
included in the Probe Request frame, then the ASP shall find a match for
each Service Hash, and it shall send a Probe Response frame with the
information listed in this section for all matched Service Hashes." This
commit changes handling of wildcard hash matching by adding a
wildcard 'org.wi-fi.wfds' info together with the other hash matches.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add auxiliary functions to write a single advertised service info record
into a wpabuf and to find P2PS wildcard hash in a received hash
attribute. Re-factor p2p_buf_add_service_instance() function to allow
adding new wildcard types in future commits.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When hostapd or wpa_supplicant is run in debug more with key material
prints allowed (-K on the command line), it is possible for passwords
and keying material to show up in debug prints. Since some of the debug
cases end up allocating a temporary buffer from the heap for processing
purposes, a copy of such password may remain in heap. Clear these
temporary buffers explicitly to avoid causing issues for hwsim test
cases that verify contents of memory against unexpected keys.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Avoid using p2p_data::query_hash for both Probe Request frame processing
and for hashes specified by p2p_find. It's resolved by use of local
query_hash and query_count variables in p2p_reply_probe().
Since p2p_data::query_hash is used only for seek hash values rename
p2p_data::query_hash to p2ps_seek_hash.
Delete p2p_data::query_count since it's not needed anymore.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Commit 86bd36f0d5 ('Add generic mechanism
for adding vendor elements into frames') introduced a mechanism to add
vendor elements into various frames, but missed the addition to the
Invitation Response frame. This commit addresses the same.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This variable is used locally only in the p2p_reply_probe() function.
The value of this variable is valid only in the context of the single
Probe Request message handling and doesn't make much sense in p2p
context.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Free a PD context with a function encapsulating both os_free() call and
setting a PD context pointer to NULL.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
A P2P Client may be discoverable and reply to Probe Request frames,
while at the same time the P2P GO would also be discoverable and include
the P2P Client information in the P2P Group Info attribute of the Probe
Response frames.
If a seeker constantly hears the Probe Response frames from a P2P Client
and then from the GO, but handles them in the opposite order (due to
scan results ordering), the more valuable Probe Response frame from the
P2P Client will be ignored. Fix this by defining a threshold (1 second)
during which the direct Probe Response frame will be preferred over the
information acquired from the GO and will not be considered as old.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When adding group clients to the P2P peer list, use the driver provided
BSS entry timestamp instead of the current time. Otherwise, the time
comparison which is made in p2p_add_device() doesn't make sense.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
If the RX frequency of the Probe Request frame is known, specify it when
sending the Probe Response frame. This is needed when the Probe Request
frame is received on another virtual interface, for example, when a GO
or P2PS client are discoverable on the group operating channel.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Change send_mlme() API to allow sending management frames on a specific
channel, overriding the internal driver decision.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Return P2P_PREQ_PROCESSED instead of P2P_PREQ_NOT_PROCESSED on
a successful Probe Request frame handling in p2p_reply_probe().
Verify a return value of p2p_reply_probe() in p2p_probe_req_rx()
and continue a pending invitation/connection flow only if the
Probe Request frame is from an expected P2P peer.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In some cases, Probe Request frames can be received by a peer not only
on a listen channel. In this case an additional rx_freq parameter
explitly contains a Probe Request frame RX frequency. In case rx_freq is
set to 0, a Probe Request frame RX channel is assumed to be our own
listen channel (p2p->cfg->channel).
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
Reviewed-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
CA country code was included mistakenly (copy-paste..) in cn_op_class_cc
while it was supposed to be included only in us_op_class_cc. In
practice, this did not result in incorrect operation due to the
us_op_class_cc list being checked first. Anyway, better fix
cn_op_class_cc to avoid confusion here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This increases code coverage for gas.c testing to cover areas that
cannot be reached with pure hwsim test cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently, if multiple bss share are bridge and tagged vlan interface,
only the first instance of struct hostapd_vlan for this vlanid will have
the DVLAN_CLEAN_VLAN flag added. Thus, when this instance is removed,
the tagged vlan interface will be removed from bridge, thought other bss
might still need it. Similarily, the bridge will be left over, as the
does not have zero ports when the first instance of a struct
hostapd_vlan is freed.
This patch fixes this by having a global (per process) reference counter
for dynamic tagged vlan and dynamically created bridge interfaces, so
they are only removed after all local users are freed. (struct
hapd_interfaces *)->vlan_priv is used to hold src/ap/vlan_init.c global
per-process data like drv_priv does; right now this is only used for the
interface reference counting, but could get extended when needed. Then
possibly some vlan_global_init / vlan_global_deinit should be added, but
this is not required right now.
Additionally, vlan->configured is checked to avoid reference counter
decreasing before vlan_newlink increased them.
In order to avoid race conditions, vlan_dellink is called explicitly
after hostapd_vlan_if_remove. Otherwise there would be a short timeframe
between hostapd_vlan_if_remove and vlan_dellink during which the struct
hostapd_vlan still exists, so ap_sta_bind_vlan would try to attach
stations to it.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add operating class 125 (channels 149..169) to the list of P2P supported
channels. This allows the 5 GHz channels 161 and 169 to be used for P2P
GO when those channels are allowed for AP mode in the current regulatory
domain.
Signed-off-by: Amr BEN ABDESSALEM <amrx.ben.abdessalem@intel.com>
Instead of an int variable with magic values 0, 1, 2, use an enum that
gives clearer meaning to the values now that the original boolean type
global argument is not really a boolean anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 95b6bca66d ('Add rsn_pairwise bits
to set_ieee8021x() driver_ops') modified cipher configuration to use
unconditionally wpa_pairwise | rsn_pairwise. While that works for many
cases, it does not handle the case of dynamic configuration changes over
the control interface where wpa_pairwise or rsn_pairwise values may not
get cleared when the wpa parameter is modified. Fix this inconsistency
by configuring the driver with only the bits that are valid for the
currently enabled WPA/WPA2 version(s).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add GO Intent information of connecting device in GO Negotiation Request
event which will help applications to decide its own GO intent value in
advance and can avoid failure cases when both devices use GO Intent 15
depending on application requirement.
Signed-off-by: Mayank Haarit <mayank.h@samsung.com>
So that systems with bad clocks will send random session IDs,
instead of always ones starting at the same second.
If os_get_random() isn't available, use os_get_time(). But also
mix in now.tv_usec, so that the accounting session ID is more
likely to be globally and temporally unique.
Signed-off-by: Alan DeKok <aland@freeradius.org>
The OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER < 0x00909000L case of
openssl_get_keyblock_size() had not been kept in sync with the cleanup
changes.
Signed-off-by: Mayank Haarit <mayank.h@samsung.com>
Explicitly check for iface->current_mode before dereferencing it. While
this case may not happen in practice, it is better for the setup
functions to be more careful when doing the initial band selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When device supports dual band operations with offloaded ACS, hw_mode
can now be set to any band (hw_mode=any) in order to allow ACS to select
the best channel from any band. After a channel is selected, the hw_mode
is updated for hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While RFC 6124 does not define how Session-Id is constructed for
EAP-EKE, there seems to be consensus among the authors on the
construction. Use this Type | Nonce_P | Nonce_S construction based on
the following email:
From: Yaron Sheffer <yaronf.ietf at gmail.com>
To: ietf at ietf.org
Date: Wed, 17 Nov 2010 13:13:42 +0200
Expanding on my previous response, I suggest to resolve Bernard's
concern by adding the following text:
5.6 EAP Key Generation
EAP-EKE can be used for EAP key generation, as defined by [RFC 5247].
When used in this manner, the values required to establish the key
hierarchy are defined as follows:
- Peer-Id is the EAP-EKE ID_P value.
- Server-Id is the EAP-EKE ID_S value.
- Session-Id is the concatenated Type | Nonce_P | Nonce_S, where Type is
the method type defined for EAP-EKE in [Sec. 4.1], a single octet.
Thanks,
Yaron
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The ACS code part of hostapd scans all the channels even if the channel
list is specified in the hostapd.conf. Limit the ACS scan channels to
the list specified in the config file.
Signed-off-by: Srinivasa Duvvuri<sduvvuri@chromium.org>
Do not add a P2P IE when a station interface is trying to associate
to an AP or P2P GO that publishes a P2P IE but does not include
a P2P manageability attribute.
This addresses an interoperability issue that was reported in
https://bugzilla.kernel.org/show_bug.cgi?id=96471, where a P2P GO
rejects association from a station interface without a specified
reason.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Link Property query vendor command shall facilitate the information
of the Wi-Fi link. MAC address of the Wi-Fi peer is given as an input
for querying the link properties.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The cleanup code will handle this, but it is more robust to make sure
this is cleared to zero when allocating a new buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The cleanup code will handle this, but it is more robust to make sure
this is cleared to zero when allocating a new buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The L (Length) and M (More) flags needs to be cleared before deciding
whether the locally generated response requires fragmentation. This
fixes an issue where these flags from the server could have been invalid
for the following message. In some cases, this could have resulted in
triggering the wpabuf security check that would terminate the process
due to invalid buffer allocation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The remaining number of bytes in the message could be smaller than the
Total-Length field size, so the length needs to be explicitly checked
prior to reading the field and decrementing the len variable. This could
have resulted in the remaining length becoming negative and interpreted
as a huge positive integer.
In addition, check that there is no already started fragment in progress
before allocating a new buffer for reassembling fragments. This avoid a
potential memory leak when processing invalid message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The remaining number of bytes in the message could be smaller than the
Total-Length field size, so the length needs to be explicitly checked
prior to reading the field and decrementing the len variable. This could
have resulted in the remaining length becoming negative and interpreted
as a huge positive integer.
In addition, check that there is no already started fragment in progress
before allocating a new buffer for reassembling fragments. This avoid a
potential memory leak when processing invalid message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The length of the received Commit and Confirm message payloads was not
checked before reading them. This could result in a buffer read
overflow when processing an invalid message.
Fix this by verifying that the payload is of expected length before
processing it. In addition, enforce correct state transition sequence to
make sure there is no unexpected behavior if receiving a Commit/Confirm
message before the previous exchanges have been completed.
Thanks to Kostya Kortchinsky of Google security team for discovering and
reporting this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The length of the received Commit and Confirm message payloads was not
checked before reading them. This could result in a buffer read
overflow when processing an invalid message.
Fix this by verifying that the payload is of expected length before
processing it. In addition, enforce correct state transition sequence to
make sure there is no unexpected behavior if receiving a Commit/Confirm
message before the previous exchanges have been completed.
Thanks to Kostya Kortchinsky of Google security team for discovering and
reporting this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The length of the WMM Action frame was not properly validated and the
length of the information elements (int left) could end up being
negative. This would result in reading significantly past the stack
buffer while parsing the IEs in ieee802_11_parse_elems() and while doing
so, resulting in segmentation fault.
This can result in an invalid frame being used for a denial of service
attack (hostapd process killed) against an AP with a driver that uses
hostapd for management frame processing (e.g., all mac80211-based
drivers).
Thanks to Kostya Kortchinsky of Google security team for discovering and
reporting this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The debug information from httpread can be helpful in figuring out error
cases in general and as such, should be enabled by default. Get rid of
the hardcoded httpread_debug value that would require source code
changes to enable.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to continue processing a HTTP body when it becomes
clear that the end result would be over the maximum length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Verify that ncopy parameter to memcpy is not negative. While this is not
supposed to be needed, it is a good additional protection against
unknown implementation issues.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
strtoul() return value may end up overflowing the int h->chunk_size and
resulting in a negative value to be stored as the chunk_size. This could
result in the following memcpy operation using a very large length
argument which would result in a buffer overflow and segmentation fault.
This could have been used to cause a denial service by any device that
has been authorized for network access (either wireless or wired). This
would affect both the WPS UPnP functionality in a WPS AP (hostapd with
upnp_iface parameter set in the configuration) and WPS ER
(wpa_supplicant with WPS_ER_START control interface command used).
Validate the parsed chunk length value to avoid this. In addition to
rejecting negative values, we can also reject chunk size that would be
larger than the maximum configured body length.
Thanks to Kostya Kortchinsky of Google security team for discovering and
reporting this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the mp_init_multi() call had failed due to memory allocation failure,
mp_div() would have returned 1 instead of MP_MEM (-2). It looks like all
callers are checking the return value against MP_OKAY instead of <1
(etc.), so this does not seem to result in difference in behavior.
Anyway, it's best to fix the mp_div() return value for the MP_MEM error
case to avoid unexpected behavior.
Signed-off-by: Maks Naumov <maksqwe1@ukr.net>
In theory, the previous version could have resulted in reading one byte
beyond the end of the management frame RX buffer if the local driver
were to deliver a truncated Public Action frame for processing. In
practice, this did not seem to happen with mac80211-based drivers and
even if it were, the extra octet would be an uninitialized value in a
buffer rather than read beyond the end of the buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was previously checked as part of the eap_sim_parse_attr()
processing, but it is easier to review the code if there is an
additional explicit check for confirming that the Reserved field is
present since the pos variable is advanced beyond it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Clean up eap_sake_parse_add_attr() design by passing in pointer to the
payload of the attribute instead of parsing these separately for each
attribute within the function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The req_plen argument to eap_pax_process_std_1() and
eap_pax_process_std_3() could be smaller than sizeof(struct eap_pax_hdr)
since the main processing function was only verifying that there is
enough room for the ICV and then removed ICV length from the remaining
payload length.
In theory, this could have resulted in the size_t left parameter being
set to a negative value that would be interpreted as a huge positive
integer. That could then result in a small buffer read overflow and
process termination if MSGDUMP debug verbosity was in use.
In practice, it does not seem to be feasible to construct a short
message that would be able to pass the ICV validation (calculated using
HMAC-SHA1-128) even for the case where an empty password is used.
Anyway, the implementation should really check the length explicitly
instead of depending on implicit check through ICV validation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EAP-TLS-based helper functions can easily use struct wpabuf in more
places, so continue cleanup in that direction by replacing separate
pointer and length arguments with a single struct wpabuf argument.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function is only using the Identifier field from the EAP request
header, so there is no need to pass it a pointer to the full message.
This makes it a bit easier to analyze the area that gets access to
unverified message payload.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
MS-MPPE-Recv-Key generation in radius_msg_add_mppe_keys() used incorrect
function argument (send_key_len; should be recv_key_len) when allocating
a temporary buffer. Fix this by using the correct argument.
The only caller of the function uses the same length for both
send_key_len and recv_key_len, so this copy-paste error did not result
in any difference in the behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Handling of WPS RF band for 60 GHz was missing. Add it in all relevant
places and also map "AES" as the cipher to GCMP instead of CCMP when
operating on the 60 GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Hamad Kadmany <qca_hkadmany@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for the WPA_ALG_PMK algorithm in set_key() to result in
trying to configure a key with cipher suite 0. While this results in a
failure from cfg80211 or driver, this is not really desirable operation,
so add a check for cipher suite conversion result before issuing the
nl80211 command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This can be used with Proxy ARP to allow multicast NAs to be forwarded
to associated STAs using link layer unicast delivery. This used to be
hardcoded to be enabled, but it is now disabled by default and can be
enabled with na_mcast_to_ucast=1. This functionality may not be desired
in all networks and most cases work without it, so the new
default-to-disabled is more appropriate.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, struct wpa_group was created when the first station enters
the group and the struct wpa_group was not freed when all station left
the group. This causes a problem because wpa_group will enter
FATAL_FAILURE when a wpa_group is running while the AP_VLAN interface
has already been removed.
Fix this by adding a reference counter to struct wpa_group and free a
group if it is unused.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
If hostapd has bound a STA into a specific VLAN, the new vlan_id
parameter in the control interface STA command can now be used to check
which VLAN ID is in use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All the system header files are supposed to be included before any other
internal header file apart from utils/includes.h.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
By analysing objdump output some read only structures were found in
.data section. To help compiler further optimize code declare these
as const.
Signed-off-by: Mikael Kanstrup <mikael.kanstrup@sonymobile.com>
Now on an engine error we decode the error value and determine if the
issue is due to a true PIN error or not. If it is due to incorrrect PIN,
delete the PIN as usual, but if it isn't let the PIN be.
Signed-off-by: Mike Gerow <gerow@google.com>
Previously, mesh state machine transmits updated Commit Message when
receiving a Confirm Message in Committed state. According to the
standard, it should (re)send the latest Commit Message previously sent.
IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 11.3.8.6.4 Protocol instance behavior - Committed
state:
"Upon receipt of a Con event, ... If Sync is not greater than
dot11RSNASAESync, the protocol instance shall increment Sync, transmit
the last Commit Message sent to the peer, and set the t0
(retransmission) timer."
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
This extends dynamic_vlan=required checks to apply for WPA-PSK with
macaddr_acl=2 (RADIUS) case.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Previously, only P2P and mesh use cases enforced unique MAC address for
a dynamically added virtual interface. Extend this to cover normal
station mode interfaces since those can now be added with INTERFACE_ADD.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to try to derive DH shared key with a peer that tries
to use too short or too long DH Public Key. Previously, such cases ended
up implicitly getting rejected by the DH operations failing to produce
matching results. That is unnecessarily, so simply reject the message
completely if it does not have a Public Key with valid length. Accept
couple of octets shorter value to be used to avoid interoperability
issues if there are implementations that do not use zero-padding
properly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This enforces variable length strings Manufacturer, Model Name, Model
Number, and Serial Number to be within the maximum length defined in the
WSC specification. While none of the existing users for these within
hostapd/wpa_supplicant had problems with longer strings, it is good to
ensure the strings are not longer to avoid potential issues at higher
layer components.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the element is of fixed length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the element is of fixed length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the element is of fixed length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the element is of fixed length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Remove the length field from struct ieee802_11_elems since the only
allowed element length is five and that is checked by the parser.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the only allowed element length is one.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check the element length in the parser and remove the length field from
struct ieee802_11_elems since the only allowed element length is one.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All the existing users of these elements were already validating the
element length. However, it is clearer to validate this already at the
parser for extra layer of protection for any future changes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 88b32a99d3 ('FT: Add FT AP support
for drivers that manage MLME internally') added an alternative way of
processing the WMM TSPEC from RIC. However, that change did not seem to
include the same checks for WMM TSPEC element length that were used in
the original implementation for MLME-in-hostapd case. Fix this by
sharing the older implementation of copying the WMM TSPEC from RIC for
both cases.
It looks like the destination buffer for the response is sufficiently
long for the fixed length copy, but it may have been possible to trigger
a read beyond the end of the FTIE by about 50 bytes. Though, that seems
to be within the buffer received for RX buffer in the case that uses
this driver-based AP MLME design for FT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This program can be used to run fuzzing tests for areas related to EAPOL
frame parsing and processing on the supplicant side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This program can be used to run fuzzing tests for areas related to P2P
message parsing and processing. p2p-fuzzer allows data files to be used
to inject Probe Response and Action frames for processing by the P2P
module.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it more obvious that the wps_parse_msg() bounds checking is
used to verify that there is sufficient space in the P2P buffer for the
secondary device types.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This modifies couple of code segments that replaced control characters
in strings with '_' to use a common helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While it looks like all the users of this parsed attribute were able to
handle longer SSID values, there is no valid use case for these and to
avoid any potential future issues, enforce maximum length (32 bytes) on
the SSID during parsing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While it looks like all the users of this parsed attribute were able to
handle longer Device Name values, there is no valid use case for these
and to avoid any potential issues in upper layer components, enforce
maximum length (32 bytes) on the Device Name during parsing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While none of the current users of msg.persistent_ssid{,_len} would have
issues with too long SSID value, it is safer to enforce bounds checking
on the SSID while parsing the attribute to avoid any potential issues in
the future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The SSID element is defined to have a valid length range of 0-32. While
this length was supposed to validated by the users of the element
parser, there are not really any valid cases where the maximum length of
32 octet SSID would be exceeded and as such, the parser itself can
enforce the limit as an additional protection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes a possible memcpy overflow for P2P dev->oper_ssid in
p2p_add_device(). The length provided by the peer device (0..255 bytes)
was used without proper bounds checking and that could have resulted in
arbitrary data of up to 223 bytes being written beyond the end of the
dev->oper_ssid[] array (of which about 150 bytes would be beyond the
heap allocation) when processing a corrupted management frame for P2P
peer discovery purposes.
This could result in corrupted state in heap, unexpected program
behavior due to corrupted P2P peer device information, denial of service
due to process crash, exposure of memory contents during GO Negotiation,
and potentially arbitrary code execution.
Thanks to Google security team for reporting this issue and smart
hardware research group of Alibaba security team for discovering it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The multi-SSID design that used a single beaconing BSSID with multiple
SSIDs was never completed in this repository, so there is no need to
maintain the per-STA ssid/ssid_probe pointers that could only point to
&hapd->conf->ssid. Save some memory and reduce code complexity by
removing this unused partial capability.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit fa0e715100 ('Use
tls_connection_prf() for all EAP TLS-based key derivation') copied some
pointer checks from the generic implementation to tls_openssl.c.
However, these are arrays and cannot be NULL in OpenSSL data. Remove the
unnecessary checks and add master_key_length check for completeness.
(CID 109619).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to interpret debug logs for cases where hostapd
control multiple interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to interpret debug logs in case hostapd controls
multiple interfaces and a STA roams between them.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Currently, vlan_remove_dynamic() is only called when the station VLAN ID
is changed (ap_sta_bind_vlan), but not when the station is freed. So
dynamic VLAN interfaces are not removed actually except within 1x
reauthentification VLAN ID change, although most of the code is already
there.
This patch fixes this by calling vlan_remove_dynamic() in ap_free_sta().
It cannot just use sta->vlan_id for this, as this might have been
changed without calling ap_sta_bind_vlan() (ap/ieee802_11.c:handle_auth
fetches from RADIUS cache for WPA-PSK), thus reference counting might
not have been updated. Additionally, reference counting might get wrong
due to old_vlanid = 0 being passed unconditionally, thus increasing the
reference counter multiple times.
So tracking the currently assigned (i.e., dynamic_vlan counter
increased) VLAN is done in a new variable sta->vlan_id_bound. Therefore,
the old_vlan_id argument of ap_sta_bind_vlan() is no longer needed and
setting the VLAN for the sta in driver happens unconditionally.
Additionally, vlan->dynamic_vlan is only incremented when it actually
is a dynamic VLAN.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
hostapd receives NEWLINK messages multiple times and thus does
configuration of the the vlan interface multiple times.
This is not required and leads to the following during cleanup in
test pmksa_cache_preauth_vlan_used:
1. run-test.py does: brctl delif brvlan1 wlan3.1
2. hostapd processes NEWLINK and does: brctl addif brvlan1 wlan3.1
3. run-test.py does: brctl delbr brvlan1
-> fails as wlan3.1 is still in the bridge
This patch fixes this by ignoring repeated NEWLINK messages.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
When hitting
> Failed to create interface wlan3.1: -23 (Too many open files in system)
> Try to remove and re-create wlan3.1
hostapd deletes the AP_VLAN interface and then recreates it. Thus the
kernel assigns the same ifidx to the new interfaces and sends DELLINK
and NEWLINK mesages.
As the DELLINK messages are processed after the struct hostapd_vlan is
added, hostapd deletes the struct hostapd_vlan entry, deconfigures the
AP_VLAN interface and leaves vlan_newlink nothing to find afterwards.
So this patch makes DELLINK messages to be ignored when the interface
exists.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Previously, during RSN preauthentication, ap_sta_bind_vlan() was called,
which fails for non-zero sta->vlan_id as the station is not known to the
kernel driver.
Fix this by binding the station only if it is associated. If it is not
associated, ap_sta_bind_vlan() will be done later during association.
In addition, reject Access-Accept if the returned VLAN ID is not valid
in the current hostapd configuration.
Signed-off-by: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Both Android's libc and glibc support _FORTIFY_SOURCE, a compiler
and libc feature which inserts automatic bounds checking into
common C functions such as memcpy() and strcpy(). If a buffer
overflow occurs when calling a hardened libc function, the
automatic bounds checking will safely shutdown the program and
prevent memory corruption.
Android is experimenting with _FORTIFY_SOURCE=3, a new fortify
level which enhances memcpy() to prevent overflowing an element
of a struct. Under the enhancements, code such as
struct foo {
char empty[0];
char one[1];
char a[10];
char b[10];
};
int main() {
foo myfoo;
int n = atoi("11");
memcpy(myfoo.a, "01234567890123456789", n);
return 0;
}
will cleanly crash when the memcpy() call is made.
Fixup hostap code to support the new level. Specifically:
* Fixup sha1_transform so it works with the enhanced bounds checking.
The old memcpy() code was attempting to write to context.h0, but that
structure element is too small and the write was extending (by design)
into h1, h2, h3, and h4. Use explicit assignments instead of
overflowing the struct element.
* Modify most of the structures in ieee802_11_defs.h to use ISO C99
flexible array members (https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Zero-Length.html)
instead of a zero length array. Zero length arrays have zero length,
and any attempt to call memcpy() on such elements will always overflow.
Flexible array members have no such limitation. The only element not
adjusted is probe_req, since doing so will generate a compile time error,
and it's not obvious to me how to fix it.
Signed-off-by: Nick Kralevich <nnk@google.com>
wpa_ctrl.c gets sys/stat.h inherited from
private/android_filesystem_config.h it should
not rely on this in the future. The intent is
to move fs_config function into libcutils and
thus deprecate any need for sys/stat.h in this
include file.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
The internal TLS implementation started rejecting number of unsupported
configuration parameters recently, but those new error paths did not
free the allocated tlsv1_credentials buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This function exposes internal state of the TLS negotiated parameters
for the sole purpose of being able to implement PRF for EAP-FAST. Since
tls_connection_prf() is now taking care of all TLS-based key derivation
cases, it is cleaner to keep this detail internal to each tls_*.c
wrapper implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not needed anymore with the tls_connection_prf() being used to
handle all key derivation needs. tls_connection_get_keys() is a bit
misnamed for now, but it is only used to fetch the client and server
random for Session-Id derivation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
tls_openssl.c is the only remaining TLS/crypto wrapper that needs the
internal PRF implementation for EAP-FAST (since
SSL_export_keying_material() is not available in older versions and does
not support server-random-before-client case). As such, it is cleaner to
assume that TLS libraries support tls_connection_prf() and move the
additional support code for the otherwise unsupported cases into
tls_openssl.c.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
is_ht_allowed is a confusing name since this variable is used to track
whether 40 MHz channel bandwidth is allowed instead of whether HT is
allowed in general.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds hexdumps of MSCHAP/MSCHAPv2 Challenge and Response in format
used by asleap. This is only enabled for CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y
builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If NEED_AP_MLME=y is not defined, compilation might
fail under some configurations:
src/ap/drv_callbacks.c:594:2: warning: implicit declaration of
function ‘hostapd_acs_completed’ [-Wimplicit-function-declaration]
src/ap/sta_info.c:253: undefined reference to `sae_clear_retransmit_timer'
Fix these errors by adding the missing hostapd_acs_completed() stub,
and defining NEED_AP_MLME in case of CONFIG_SAE.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
This replaces the internal CBC mode implementation in
aes_128_cbc_encrypt() and aes_128_cbc_decrypt() with the OpenSSL
implementation for CONFIG_TLS=openssl builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The local buffers may contain information used to generate parts of the
derived key, so clear these explicitly to minimize amount of unnecessary
private key-related material in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The local hash[] buffer may contain parts of the derived key, so clear
it explicitly to minimize number of unnecessary copies of key material
in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The local T[] buffer may contain parts of the derived key, so clear it
explicitly to minimize number of unnecessary copies of key material in
memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previous workaround for WEXT events from the Host AP driver required
wlan# and wifi# interfaces to have fixed names with the same number.
While that used to be the common case ten years ago, it is less common
nowadays. Extend this to use sysfs (if available) to figure out the
wifi# interface name if the specified interface is detected to be using
the Host AP driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add SQLite error message and DB name to the DB related errors. Add
enough tracing so that users can know exactly where users are failing to
be found.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The new network profile parameter mem_only_psk=1 can be used to specify
that the PSK/passphrase for that network is requested over the control
interface (ctrl_iface or D-Bus) similarly to the EAP network parameter
requests. The PSK/passphrase can then be configured temporarily in a way
that prevents it from getting stored to the configuration file.
For example:
Event:
CTRL-REQ-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:PSK or passphrase needed for SSID test-wpa2-psk
Response:
CTRL-RSP-PSK_PASSPHRASE-0:"qwertyuiop"
Note: The response value uses the same encoding as the psk network
profile parameter, i.e., passphrase is within double quotation marks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends EAP-pwd peer support to allow NtHash version of password
storage in addition to full plaintext password. In addition, this allows
the server to request hashed version even if the plaintext password is
available on the client. Furthermore, unsupported password preparation
requests are now rejected rather than allowing the authentication
attempt to continue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends EAP-pwd server support to allow NtHash version of password
storage in addition to full plaintext password.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Old code defaulted to WEP for an AP advertising OSEN. Show as OSEN
instead. Re-use most of the RSN parsing logic since all but the header
is the same.
Example output:
[root@ath9k-f lanforge]# ./local/bin/wpa_cli -i sta0 scan_results
bssid / frequency / signal level / flags / ssid
00:0e:8e:6f:40:49 2462 -23 [OSEN-OSEN-CCMP][ESS] ben-138
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
HT requires QoS/WMM, so unset HT capabilities for a station
whose association request does not include a valid WMM IE.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
This extends NL80211_CMD_ROAM event processing to allow the driver to
roam to another ESS (different SSID) when using offloaded BSS selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Update ACS driver offload feature for VHT configuration. In addition,
this allows the chanlist parameter to be used to specify which channels
are included as options for the offloaded ACS case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Delete all ASP serice advertisement on wpas_p2p_service_flush similarly
to Bonjour and UPnP services.
Signed-off-by: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
There's off-by-one in the range availability check - the case of
first_chan_idx + num_chans == num_channels should be allowed (e.g., 0 +
1 == 1, for the case of a single 20 MHz channel).
Signed-off-by: Maital Hahn <maitalm@ti.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
When looking for a new operating channel, consider the case of
non-contiguous channels when checking all the needed channels (e.g., the
driver might support channels 36, 38, 40, so look for channels 36+40
explicitly, instead of failing when encountering channel 38).
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
In wiphy_info_handler(), vendor specific commands were
interpreted as QCA specific without checking for the OUI,
which caused incorrect setting of driver flags with
commands from other vendors. As a result, that could
prevent proper operation (e.g., inability to process CSA).
This patch ensures that QCA vendor specific commands are
checked against QCA OUI before related flags are set.
Signed-off-by: Zefir Kurtisi <zefir.kurtisi@neratec.com>
If the AP/Authenticator receives an EAPOL-Key msg 2/4 for an association
that negotiated use of PSK and the EAPOL-Key MIC does not match, it is
likely that the station is trying to use incorrect PSK/passphrase.
Report this with "AP-STA-POSSIBLE-PSK-MISMATCH <STA addr>" control
interface event.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
SChannel/CryptoAPI as a TLS/crypto library alternative was never
completed. Critical functionality is missing and there are bugs in this
implementation. Since there are no known plans of completing this
support, it is better to remove this code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Channel 140 is needed as allowed HT40 channel pair to use
channel 144 introduced in 802.11ac for VHT40 and VHT80.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <poh@qca.qualcomm.com>
Handle NL80211_ATTR_EXT_FEATURES attribute and
NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_VHT_IBSS to determine whether
the driver supports VHT with IBSS.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
It was possible for bitfield_get_first_zero() to read one octet beyond
the allocated bit buffer in case the first zero bit was not within
size-1 first octets.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This event was previously used only when disabling AP mode operation
through hostapd control interface. Make this more consistent by
providing same indication when disabling hostapd interface through the
interface deinit path. This adds the event to the case where a full
hostapd radio instance is removed which also applies for the
wpa_supplicant AP mode operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If OpenSSL reports that a presented leaf certificate is invalid,
but it has been explicitly pinned, accept it anyway.
Signed-off-by: Rohit Agrawal <rohit.agrawal.mn@gmail.com>
Previously, it would have been possible to complete RSN connection by
skipping the msg 3/4 and 4/4 completely. This would have resulted in
pairwise key not being configured. This is obviously not supposed to
happen in practice and could result in unexpected behavior, so reject
group key message before the initial 4-way handshake has been completed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
ML80211_ATTR_TDLS_OPERATION can now set to NL80211_TDLS_DISCOVERY_REQ to
allow the driver to request wpa_supplicant to initiate TDLS Discovery
Request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the TDLS operation request mechanism to allow TDLS
Discovery Request to be initiated by the driver similarly to the
existing Setup and Teardown requests.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, it was possible for the wpa_sm_start_preauth() and
wpa_sm_rekey_ptk() eloop callbacks to remain active after disconnection
and potentially continue to be used for the next association. This is
not correct behavior, so explicitly cancel these timeouts to avoid
unexpected attempts to complete RSN preauthentication or to request PTK
to be rekeyed.
It was possible to trigger this issue, e.g., by running the following
hwsim test case sequence: ap_wpa2_ptk_rekey ap_ft_sae_over_ds
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The initial IEEE 802.11 ProxyARP functionality in the kernel needed
changes in behavior and that ended up requiring an independent
configuration parameter to be used. Update hostapd to use that new
proxyarp_wifi parameter instead of the earlier proxyarp.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This converts the QCA vendor event to EVENT_DFS_* events for the case
of DFS offloaded to the driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Modify the string for AP-CSA-FINISHED event indication to include a flag
which tells the framework whether the new channel is a DFS channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add handling logic for DFS offloaded case, and add a helper function
that takes the frequency (MHz) as a param and returns 1 if given channel
requires DFS, or 0 otherwise.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If DFS is offloaded to the driver, hostapd should not be performing
these operations. Send the relevant control interface events to provide
information to upper layer software that may use such events to track
DFS/CAC state. This makes the offloaded DFS implementation more
consistent with the DFS-in-hostapd behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit introduces a callback to notify any configuration updates
from the eap_proxy layer. This is used to trigger re-reading of IMSI and
MNC length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a connection with the primary server cannot be established, restore
connection to the previously used server.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 347c55e216 ('RADIUS client: Re-try
connection if socket is closed on retransmit') added a new option for
initialing RADIUS server failover from radius_client_retransmit(), but
ended up trying to change authentication servers when accounting server
was supposed to be changed due to a copy-paste issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the GO Negotiation Response (failure) TX status to
be processed at a point where there is no P2P timeout to continue
search. Avoid stopping the ongoing search operation by explicitly
restarting it from this callback.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The optional freq=<MHz> can now be used with the P2P_FIND command to
specify a single channel to scan during the first round of P2P search.
For example, this can be used to replace the full initial scan with a
single channel scan of a known operation channel.
Signed-off-by: Daichi Ueura <daichi.ueura@sonymobile.com>
This reverts commit 3df2f4fe99 ('P2P:
Remove unused P2P_SCAN_SPECIFIC') with a modification to fit the current
code base.
Signed-off-by: Daichi Ueura <daichi.ueura@sonymobile.com>
Disable VHT caps for STAs for which there is not even a single
allowed MCS in any supported number of streams. i.e STA is
advertising 3 (not supported) as VHT MCS rates for all supported
streams.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qti.qualcomm.com>
Commit 347c55e216 ('RADIUS client: Re-try
connection if socket is closed on retransmit') added a possibility of
executing RADIUS server failover change within
radius_client_retransmit() without taking into account that this
operation may end up freeing the pending message that is being
processed. This could result in use of freed memory. Avoid this by
checking whether any pending messages have been removed and if so, do
not try to retransmit the potentially freed message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, send() was called with invalid fd = -1 in some error cases
for retransmission and this could even result in a loop of multiple such
attempts. This is obviously not going to work, so drop such attempts and
instead, try to reconnect a socket to the server if the current socket
is not valid.
In addition, initiate server failover immediately if the current socket
is not valid instead of waiting for a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the initial attempt at opening the socket connection to the RADIUS
server failed due to missing IP connectivity during startup, e.g., with
"connect[radius]: Network is unreachable", hostapd did not try to
reconnect when RADIUS messages were sent. Instead, it only reported "No
authentication server configured" even if the configuration did have a
server entry.
This was broken by commit 9ed4076673
('RADIUS client: Do not try to send message without socket') for the
initial case and the more recent fixes in RADIUS server failover cases
did not cover the initial failure case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It does not look likely that the old DSA design would be added into the
internal TLS implement, so remove this otherwise dead code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows wpa_supplicant to recover from some of the cases where
cfg80211 is unloaded and reloaded without restarting wpa_supplicant. The
netlink socket used for nl80211 events (global->nl_event) seemed to end
up in otherwise functionality state, but with all the event memberships
lost when cfg80211 gets reloaded.
There does not seem to be any clear way of determining when this has
happened, so it looks simplest to just try to re-subscribe to all the
events whenever an interface is re-enabled or added.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e6dd8196e5 ('Work around Linux
packet socket regression') closed the workaround socket on the first
received EAPOL frame from the main packet socket. This can result in
closing the socket in cases where the kernel does not really work in the
expected way during the following initial association since
reauthentication/rekeying using EAPOL frames happens while operstate is
not dormant and as such, the frames can get delivered through the main
packet socket.
Fix this by closing the workaround socket only in case the first EAPOL
frame is received through the main packet socket. This case happens
while the interface is in dormant state and as such, is more likely to
show the more restricted case of kernel functionality.
In order to avoid processing the received EAPOL frames twice, verify a
checksum of the frame contents when receiving frames alternatively from
the main packet socket and the workaround socket.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These values were previously used only for sorting the scan results, but
it may be useful to provide access to the used values through the BSS
entries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This modifies the BSS selection routines to calculate SNR and estimated
throughput for each scan result and then use the estimated throughput as
a criteria for sorting the results. This extends the earlier design by
taking into account higher throughput rates if both the AP and local
device supports HT20, HT40, or VHT80. In addition, the maximum rate is
restricted based on SNR.
In practice, this gives significantly higher probability of selecting
HT/VHT APs when there are multiple BSSes in the same ESS and SNR is not
low enough to prevent higher MCS use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it somewhat easier to use CONFIG_WPA_TRACE=y build with
external programs that might not be aware of the initialization
requirement, e.g., when linking wpa_ctrl.c with a program that does not
use the os_*() wrappers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This change adds the function hostapd_config_clear_wpa_psk() that
deletes an entire wpa_psk structure, making sure to follow the linked
list and to free the allocated memory of each PSK node. This helps to
prevent memory leaks when using PSKs from multiple sources and
reconfiguring the AP during runtime.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
Configure the GO CTWindow on APstart if the driver supports it and this
parameter is set in wpa_supplicant configuration.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Read p2p_go_ctwindow (0-127 TUs) from the config file, and pass it to
the driver on GO start.
Use p2p_go_ctwindow=0 (no CTWindow) by default.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Some APs (e.g., Cisco 1260) sometimes add padding to the end of short
TDLS management packets and that can look like invalid IEs. This was
allowed on M3 and discovery packets, but not in others. Allow it for the
other packets as well, since required IEs are verified in the code
anyway.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Add fixed_freq=<0/1> network block parameter and pass it to the driver
when starting or joining an IBSS. If this flag is set, IBSS should not
try to look for other IBSS networks to merge with on different channels.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
The '/usr/include/libnl3' header path is unsafe for cross-compilation.
Use pkg-config to find libnl-3.0 headers by default and alternatively,
allow LIBNL_INC=<path> to be used in .config to override.
Signed-off-by: Romain Naour <romain.naour@openwide.fr>
These were not supposed to include a newline at the end of the message
text since such formatting gets handled by tls_show_errors(). In
addition, change the message about the issuer's issuer to be more
accurate.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If addition of a peer issuer certificate fails, the certs pointer would
be NULL when being passed to sk_X509_push() for peer issuer's issuer.
Fix this by skipping addition of issuer's issue if issuer addition
fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If addition of a peer issuer certificate fails, the certs pointer would
be NULL when being passed to sk_X509_push() for peer issuer's issuer.
Fix this by skipping addition of issuer's issue if issuer addition
fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When DFS offloading capability is supported by the driver, the driver
should use these events to indicate when a radar pattern has been
detected, channel availability check (CAC) has been completed, aborted
or finished after the non-occupancy period is over on a DFS channel.
Also, add a new driver.h event to be used by NL80211 to indicate CAC
Started event on a DFS channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the driver indicates that the interface has been disabled, assume
that all associations have been lost and remove the hostapd STA entries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
RTM_NEWLINK event without IFF_UP were processed for all related
interfaces (including VLANs and bridge). While these events may need to
be processed for other purposes, they should not end up claiming that
the main interface has been disabled, so indicate
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED only if the ifname matches the first BSS ifname
for the interface. In addition, fix some of the ifup/down checks from
if_indextoname() cases to actually use the resolved ifname (namebuf)
rather than hardcoding the first configured ifname to be used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This uses couple of additional helper macros and prints more debug
information to make the VLAN events easier to analyze.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Sending client probe on already removed client from kernel driver does
not have any benefit and may lead unintended behavior among variable
drivers (mac80211 has a WARN_ON() that could have been triggered after
ifconfig down+up earlier when hostapd did not re-enable beaconing on
ifup). Skip this step in discussion when the kernel driver reports that
client entry is removed.
Signed-off-by: Peter Oh <poh@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows WPA2 mode AP to be re-enabled automatically after external
ifconfig down + up on a netdev used by hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is a step towards enabling hostapd to restart AP mode functionality
if the interface is disabled and re-enabled, e.g., with ifconfig down
and up. This commit takes care of beaconining only which may be
sufficient for open mode connection, but not for WPA2 cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for an Action frame TX operation to be stopped in a way
that results in the TX status callback function not being called. This
could happen, e.g., when P2P_STOP_FIND was issued while waiting for PD
Response TX status. This specific case ended in leaving
p2p->send_action_in_progress set to 1 and that ending up stopping a
future TX operation when p2p_send_action_cb() gets called with
p2p->pending_action_state == P2P_NO_PENDING_ACTION.
This could result in reception of a fragmented service discovery
response failing due to the GAS sequence getting stopped when receiving
TX callback for the first GAS comeback request. That sequence could be
hit in mac80211_hwsim tests when p2p_listen_and_offchannel_tx was
followed by p2p_service_discovery_fragmentation (even after a long time
since this was on dev1 and there could be even 10 minutes between these
test cases).
Fix this issue by clearing send_action_in_progress whenever stopping
pending P2P operation with p2p_stop_find (or P2P_FLUSH for that matter).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When DFS offloading capability is supported by the driver, the driver
should use this event to indicate when channel availability check (CAC)
is started on a DFS channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds testing code (for CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds only) to
send an nl80211 vendor command and report a test vendor event in case
the driver supports this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Do not reply to a Probe Request frame with a DSSS Parameter Set element
in which the channel is different than the operating channel of the AP,
as the sending station is not found on the AP's operating channel.
IEEE Std 802.11-2012 describes this as a requirement for an AP with
dot11RadioMeasurementActivated set to true, but strictly speaking does
not allow such ignoring of Probe Request frames if
dot11RadioMeasurementActivated is false. Anyway, this can help reduce
number of unnecessary Probe Response frames for cases where the STA is
less likely to see them (Probe Request frame sent on a neighboring, but
partially overlapping, channel).
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Send MESH-SAE-AUTH-BLOCKED event if SAE authentication is blocked. The
BLOCK state will finish when a new peer notification event is sent for
the same MAC address.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
SAE authentication fails likely with wrong password. This commit adds a
notification of the failure to the upper application (UI) so that the
application can notify suspection of a wrong password to the user. The
control interface monitor even for this is "MESH-SAE-AUTH-FAILURE
addr=<peer>".
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Commit 5a2a6de6a5 ('mesh: Make inactivity
timer configurable') has a problem on 32 bit systems. Setting
NL80211_MESHCONF_PLINK_TIMEOUT to 0xffffffff causes expiration of STA in
a minute by NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION event. this is the kernel rule for
STA expiration:
(current jiffies) > (frame Rx jiffies + NL80211_MESHCONF_PLINK_TIMEOUT * 250)
On a 32 bit system, the right side could overflow and be unexpected
small value if NL80211_MESHCONF_PLINK_TIMEOUT is sufficiently large. STA
expiration occurs by this reason.
This patch solves the problem by disabling the STA expiration
functionality in mac80211. However, old kernel does not support
disabling it. If so, this patch sets mac80211 inactivity timer 60
seconds into future from the wpa_supplicant inactivity timer.
And I mis-understood that mesh_max_inactivity=0 disables inactivity
timer in wpa_supplicant. This commit fixes it also.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
If HT40 co-ex scan fails due to the driver rejecting scan triggers
multiple times, it was possible for the ap_ht40_scan_retry() timeout
being left behind and it getting run after hapd->drv_priv has been
cleared. This would result in NULL pointer dereference in
driver_nl80211_scan.c. Fix this by canceling the timeout when disabling
the interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e6dd8196e5 ('Work around Linux
packet socket regression') added a mechanism to close the workaround
bridge socket in l2_packet_receive(). However, it did not take into
account the possibility of the l2->rx_callback() closing the l2_packet
socket altogether. This could result in use of freed memory when usin
RSN pre-authentication. Fix this by reordering the calls to clear the
workaround socket before calling the rx_callback.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, a channel with even a single scan/survey result missing
information was skipped in ACS. This may not be desirable in cases when
multiple scan iterations are used (which is the case by default in
hostapd). Instead, use all channels that provided at least one complete
set of results. Calculate the average interference factor as an average
of the iterations that did provide complete values.
This seems to help with some cases, e.g., when ath9k may not be able to
report the noise floor for all channels from the first scan iteration
immediately after the driver has been loaded, but then returns it for
all other scan iterations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new acs_chan_bias configuration parameter is a space-separated list
of <channel>:<bias> pairs. It can be used to increase (or decrease) the
likelihood of a specific channel to be selected by the ACS algorithm.
The total interference factor for each channel gets multiplied by the
specified bias value before finding the channel with the lowest value.
In other words, values between 0.0 and 1.0 can be used to make a channel
more likely to be picked while values larger than 1.0 make the specified
channel less likely to be picked. This can be used, e.g., to prefer the
commonly used 2.4 GHz band channels 1, 6, and 11 (which is the default
behavior on 2.4 GHz band if no acs_chan_bias parameter is specified).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The interference factors for adjacent 2.4 GHz channels were summed
together without doing any kind of weighted average on them. This
resulted in the channels at the band edges getting undue preference due
to only including interference factors from three channels vs. five for
the channels in the middle of the band.
While it is somewhat unclear whether the design here was supposed to
count overlapping channels together in this way or whether that is
already covered in channel survey results, it is clear that this summing
of three to five values together and then comparing the sum rather than
average of some kind gives too much preference to the channels at the
edges of the band by assuming that there is no interference whatsoever
outside the band.
Use weighted average of the interference factors rather than a sum from
different number of values. For now, the adjacent 2.4 GHz channels get
weight of 0.85 (1.0 for the main channel itself) and the neighboring
channels to those adjacent ones get 0.55 weight. Band-edge channels are
handled in a way that takes average over the channels that were actually
considered instead of assuming zero interference from neighboring bands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If p2p_find_timeout triggers after starting SD but before getting TX
status for send action, unwanted search could get triggered again when
TX status arrives though p2p_find_timeout moved the state to P2P_IDLE by
then. p2p_continue_find() would then move the state to P2P_SEARCH again.
Do not trigger the find operation from this context if state is
P2P_IDLE to avoid this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is going to be required for OpenSSL 1.1.0 which makes the SSL
structure opaque. Older versions starting from OpenSSL 1.0.1 include
this function, so start using it now based on OPENSSL_VERSION_NUMBER.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL 0.9.8 and newer includes SSL_CTX_get_cert_store() and
SSL_CTX_set_cert_store() helper functions, so there is no need to
dereference the SSL_CTX pointer to cert ssl_ctx->cert_store. This helps
in working with the future OpenSSL 1.1.0 release that makes the SSL_CTX
structure opaque.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not claim to change the Listen channel in a debug message when
previously configured channel prevents this. In addition, fix a typo in
another related debug print.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If OBSS scan interval is not set, the AP must not schedule a timeout to
restore 40 MHz operation immediately after having moved to a 20 MHz
channel based on an unsolicited co-ex report. Fix this by scheduling the
timeout only if obss_interval is non-zero.
Since we do not currently support AP doing OBSS scans after the initial
BSS setup, this means practically that 40-to-20 MHz transition is
allowed, but 20-to-40 MHz is not with obss_interval=0. The latter gets
enabled if obss_interval is set to a non-zero value so that associated
STAs can take care of OBSS scanning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_timeout_prov_disc_req is getting triggered in P2P_IDLE,
P2P_SEARCH and P2P_LISTEN_ONLY states. Retry logic should not be
limited to only P2P_IDLE state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
During service discovery if P2P_FIND times out, P2P_FIND_STOPPED event
is sent to upper layers to allow follow up P2P_FIND commands. This needs
to be done also in case an SD was in progress during the find operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This introduces a P2P module callback function that will be used to
create the pending P2PS group after sending PD Response and receiving
ACK status for it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the peer device is trying to form a new group despite having
old persistent group with same roles, remove the stale persistent
group.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends wpas_p2p_prov_disc() implementation to accept P2PS
parameters. None of the callers are yet using this functionality; the
following commit introduces a user.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a data structure for storing P2PS PD information and code to
add the related attributes into PD Request. The actual operation to
trigger this behavior will be added in a separate commit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add support to parse received GAS requests for ASP services and
prepare GAS responses accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In addition, add a new P2P_SERVICE_REP command that can be used to
replace existing ASP advertisements.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This make it easier to use wpa_s->p2p_group without having to check
whether there is a group initialized on this wpa_s instance.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides additional WPS definitions and rules for negotiating use
of P2PS default PIN configuration method.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
P2PS seek strings can now be specified in the P2P_FIND control interface
command with one or more optional "seek=<str>" parameters.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to debug issues related to ongoing P2P operations
getting stopped due to Action frame exchanges.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
For wired IEEE 802.1X authentication, phase1="allow_canned_success=1"
can now be used to configure a mode that allows EAP-Success (and
EAP-Failure) without going through authentication step. Some switches
use such sequence when forcing the port to be authorized/unauthorized or
as a fallback option if the authentication server is unreachable. By
default, wpa_supplicant discards such frames to protect against
potential attacks by rogue devices, but this option can be used to
disable that protection for cases where the server/authenticator does
not need to be authenticated.
When enabled, this mode allows EAP-Success/EAP-Failure as an immediate
response to EAPOL-Start (or even without EAPOL-Start) and EAP-Success is
also allowed immediately after EAP-Identity exchange (fallback case for
authenticator not being able to connect to authentication server).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_supplicant used to request user to re-enter username/password if the
server indicated that EAP-MSCHAPv2 (e.g., in PEAP Phase 2)
authentication failed (E=691), but retry is allowed (R=1). This is a
reasonable default behavior, but there may be cases where it is more
convenient to close the authentication session immediately rather than
wait for user to do something.
Add a new "mschapv2_retry=0" option to the phase2 field to allow the
retry behavior to be disabled. This will make wpa_supplicant abort
authentication attempt on E=691 regardless of whether the server allows
retry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Linux kernel commit 576eb62598f10c8c7fd75703fe89010cdcfff596 ('bridge:
respect RFC2863 operational state') from 2012 introduced a regression
for using wpa_supplicant with EAPOL frames and a station interface in a
bridge. Since it does not look like this regression is going to get
fixed any time soon (it is already two years from that commit and over
1.5 from a discussion pointing out the regression), add a workaround in
wpa_supplicant to avoid this issue.
The wpa_supplicant workaround uses a secondary packet socket to capture
all frames (ETH_P_ALL) from the netdev that is in a bridge. This is
needed to avoid the kernel regression. However, this comes at the price
of more CPU load. Some of this is avoided with use of Linux socket
filter, but still, this is less efficient than a packet socket bound to
the specific EAPOL ethertype. The workaround gets disabled
automatically, if the main packet socket interface on the bridge
interface turns out to be working for RX (e.g., due to an old kernel
version being used or a new kernel version having a fix for the
regression). In addition, this workaround is only taken into use for the
special case of running wpa_supplicant with an interface in a bridge.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use standard numbers-and-dots format for IPv4 in debug logs instead
of hexdump in two different byte orders.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the old VLAN ID could have been deleted before the STA was
bound to the new VLAN in case the RADIUS server changed the VLAN ID
during an association. This did not exactly work well with mac80211, so
reorder the operations in a way that first binds the STA to the new VLAN
ID and only after that, removes the old VLAN interface if no STAs remain
in it.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, it was possible for some corner cases to leave the WPA
authenticator state machine running if PMK could not be derived. Change
this to forcefully disconnect the STA to get more consistent behavior
and faster notification of the error.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This type of error reporting cases should use wpa_printf() to get
consistent debug logging behavior.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The payload length in a Phase 2 TLV message reporting error was not set
correctly. Fix this to not include the TLVs that are included only in
success case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the VENDOR-TEST EAP method peer implementation to allow
pending processing case to be selected at run time. The
ap_wpa2_eap_vendor_test test case is similarly extended to include this
option as the second case for full coverage.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Drop the unneeded 'attempt' argument. This was originally used for
indicating an aborted PMKID caching attempt, but a fix in 2006 removed
the only such user and since that time, only attempt == 1 has been used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This replaces the implementation in aes-wrap.c and aes-unwrap.c with
OpenSSL AES_wrap_key() and AES_unwrap_key() functions when building
hostapd or wpa_supplicant with OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These have reached out-of-life status in the OpenSSL project and there
is no need to maintain support for them in hostapd/wpa_supplicant
either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use OpenSSL HMAC_* functions to implement HMAC-MD5 instead of depending
on the src/crypto/md5.c implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 630b3230c8 ('nl80211: Increase
netlink receive buffer size') added unconditional use of
nl_socket_set_buffer_size() which was not included in libnl 1.1. Fix use
of that old version by making this conditional on CONFIG_LIBNL20.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This modifies struct wpa_ptk to allow the length of KCK and KEK to be
stored. This is needed to allow longer keys to be used, e.g., with
Suite B 192-bit level.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
omac1_aes_256() and omac1_aes_vector() can now be used to perform
256-bit CMAC operations similarly to the previously supported 128-bit
cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The correct nl80211 flag for group key management cipher was set only
for BIP (AES-CMAC-128). The same flag needs to be used with the newer
ciphers BIP-CMAC-256, BIP-GMAC-128, and BIP-GMAC-256.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A NULL pointer crash was caused by commit
7139cf4a4f ('P2P: Decrement
sd_pending_bcast_queries when sd returns'). p2p->sd_query can be cleared
to NULL whenever a query is cancelled, even in case the request had
already been transmitted. As such, need to be prepared for the query not
remaining when processing TX status callback for the frame.
Crashes on 2ee98 in following code
2ee90: f7fc f8b6 bl 2b000 <p2p_dbg>
2ee94: e02c b.n 2eef0 <p2p_send_action_cb+0x348>
2ee96: 6c25 ldr r5, [r4, #64] ; 0x40
2ee98: 68ee ldr r6, [r5, #12]
2ee9a: b166 cbz r6, 2eeb6 <p2p_send_action_cb+0x30e>
Signed-off-by: Ola Olsson <ola.olsson@sonymobile.com>
libnl uses a pretty small buffer (32 kB that gets converted to 64 kB) by
default. It is possible to hit that limit in some cases where operations
are blocked, e.g., with a burst of Deauthentication frames to hostapd
and STA entry deletion. Try to increase the buffer to make this less
likely to occur.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The ANQP verification/parsing is done only after the GAS_DONE indication
is sent over the control interface. This means that in case the ANQP
parsing fails there is no indication to the upper layers. Add an
ANQP-QUERY-DONE event that reports the status of the ANQP parsing.
Signed-off-by: ASHUTOSH NARAYAN <ashutoshx.narayan@intel.com>
If TLS encryption fails, encr may be NULL and that would have resulted
in NULL pointer dereference..
Signed-off-by: Haim Dreyfuss <haim.dreyfuss@intel.com>
In ieee802_1x_decapsulate_radius(), eap_server_get_name() may return
NULL, and it could be dereferenced depending on printf implementation.
Change it to return "unknown" instead for the case of no matching EAP
method found. This makes it easier for the callers to simply print this
in logs (which is the only use for this function).
Signed-off-by: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
We were copying the NL80211_ATTR_EXT_CAPA attribute into the
extended_capa_mask element, which is incorrect. Use
NL80211_ATTR_EXT_CAPA_MASK instead.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <luciano.coelho@intel.com>
Commit ce7b56afab ('WPS: Fix an
interoperability issue with mixed mode and AP Settings') added code to
filter M7 Authentication/Encryption Type attributes into a single bit
value in mixed mode (WPA+WPA2) cases to work around issues with Windows
7. This workaround was lost in commit
d7a15d5953 ('WPS: Indicate current AP
settings in M7 in unconfigurated state') that fixed unconfigured state
values in AP Settings, but did not take into account the earlier
workaround for mixed mode.
Re-introduce filtering of Authentication/Encryption Type attributes for
M7 based on the current AP configuration. In other words, merge those
two earlier commits together to include both the earlier workaround the
newer fix.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add the possibility to define a subset of channels used by the ACS
engine when not operating on DFS channels.
Signed-off-by: Adrien Decostre <ad.decostre@gmail.com>
Current mesh code uses ap_max_inactivity as inactivity timer. This patch
makes it configurable.
There is another mesh inactivity timer in mac80211. The timer works even
if user_mpm=1. So this patch sets the max value to the timer for
workaround.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
If the inactivity check returns that there is no entry remaining for the
STA in the kernel, drop the STA in hostapd as well.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
It was possible for an out-of-memory code path to trigger NULL pointer
dereference when preparing a RADIUS accounting report.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends Disconnect-Request processing to check against PMKSA cache
entries if no active session (STA association) match the request.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
dot1xAuthSessionId was previously used to make Acct-Session-Id available
through the control interface. While there is no IEEE 802.1X MIB
variable for Acct-Multi-Session-Id, it is useful to make this value
available as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the first matching STA was picked. That is not really the
design in RFC 5176, so extend this matching code to go through all
specified session identification attributes and verify that all of them
match. In addition, check for a possible case of multiple sessions
matching. If such a case is detected, return with Disconnect-NAK and
Error-Code 508 (multiple session selection not supported).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a second scan trigger attempt fails in STA mode, the error path was
supposed to restore the old mode that was in use before changing to STA
mode. However, wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode() changes drv->nlmode on
success, so the recovery path needs to use the saved old_mode value
instead.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is similar with domain_suffix_match, but required a full match of
the domain name rather than allowing suffix match (subdomains) or
wildcard certificates.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A new "CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-ALT depth=<i> <alt name>" event is now used
to provide information about server certificate chain alternative
subject names for upper layers, e.g., to make it easier to configure
constraints on the server certificate. For example:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-ALT depth=0 DNS:server.example.com
Currently, this includes DNS, EMAIL, and URI components from the
certificates. Similar information is priovided to D-Bus Certification
signal in the new altsubject argument which is a string array of these
items.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e7d0e97bdb ('hostapd: Add vendor
specific VHT extension for the 2.4 GHz band') resulted in a compiler
warning regarding comparison between signed and unsigned integers at
least for 32-bit builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new VENDOR_ELEM value 13 can now be used to add a vendor element
into all (Re)Association Request frames, not just for P2P use cases like
the previous item was for.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows vendor specific information element to be used to advertise
support for VHT on 2.4 GHz band. In practice, this is used to enable use
of 256 QAM rates (VHT-MCS 8 and 9) on 2.4 GHz band.
This functionality is disabled by default, but can be enabled with
vendor_vht=1 parameter in hostapd.conf if the driver advertises support
for VHT on either 2.4 or 5 GHz bands.
Signed-off-by: Yanbo Li <yanbol@qti.qualcomm.com>
This allows ocsp=2 to be used with wpa_supplicant when built with GnuTLS
to request TLS status extension (OCSP stapling) to be used to validate
server certificate validity.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The server certificate will be rejected if it includes any EKU and none
of the listed EKUs is either TLS Web Server Authentication or ANY.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Certificate expiration is checked both within GnuTLS and in the
tls_gnutls.c implementation. The former was configured to use the
request to ignore time checks while the latter was not. Complete support
for this parameter by ignoring the internal expiration checks if
requested.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows private key and client certificate to be configured using
wpa_supplicant blobs instead of external files.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like GnuTLS may return success on
gnutls_certificate_set_x509_*() functions with GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM even
when trying to read DER encoded information. Reverse the order of
parsing attempts so that we start with DER and then move to PEM if
GnuTLS reports failure on DER parsing. This seems to be more reliable
way of getting errors reported and both cases can now be handled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This new wpa_supplicant and hostapd control interface command can be
used to determine which TLS library is used in the build and what is the
version of that library.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows wpa_supplicant to provide more information about peer
certificate validation results to upper layers similarly to the
mechanism used with OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This implementation uses GnuTLS function
gnutls_x509_crt_check_hostname(). It has a bit different rules regarding
matching (allows wildcards in some cases, but does not use suffix
matching) compared to the internal implementation used with OpenSSL.
However, these rules are sufficiently close to each other to be of
reasonable use for most cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
After having checked all known GNUTLS_CERT_* error cases that we care
about, check that no other errors have been indicated by
gnutls_certificate_verify_peers2() as a reason to reject negotiation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Make the debug output more useful for determining whuch version of
GnuTLS was used and what was negotiated for the session.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
GnuTLS 2.10.0 added gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function() that can be
used to move peer certificate validation to an earlier point in the
handshake. Use that to get similar validation behavior to what was done
with OpenSSL, i.e., reject the handshake immediately after receiving the
peer certificate rather than at the completion of handshake.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
GnuTLS project has marked 2.12.x obsolete since January 2014. There is
not much need for maintaining support for obsolete versions of the
library, so drop all #if/#endif blocks targeting 2.x.y versions. In
practice, none of these were requiring 2.12.x version with x greater
than 0, so 2.12.x remains supported for now.
In addition, add newer version (GnuTLS 3.0.18 and newer) to fetch client
and server random from the session since the old method is not supported
by new GnuTLS versions and as such, gets removed with rest of the old
ifdef blocks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
No one should be using GnuTLS versions older than 1.3.2 from 2006
anymore, so remove these unnecessary #if/#endif checks.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was needed with very old GnuTLS versions, but has not been needed,
or used, since GnuTLS 1.3.2 which was released in 2006. As such, there
is no need to maintain this code anymore and it is better to just clean
the source code by removing all the related code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows GnuTLS to be used with trusted CA certificate from
wpa_supplicant blob rather than an external certificate file.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This TLS configuration parameter is explicitly for OpenSSL. Instead of
ignoring it silently, reject any configuration trying to use it in
builds that use other options for TLS implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This define had been forgotten at some point in time and wpa_supplicant
compilation for Windows failed with some recently added code that
depended on this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Addition of os_memcmp_const() in commit
afc3c8b07f had forgotten to include
common.h into os_win32.c to get u8 defined.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
NSS as a TLS/crypto library alternative was never completed and this
barely functional code does not even build with the current NSS version.
Taken into account that there has not been much interest in working on
this crypto wrapper over the years, it is better to just remove this
code rather than try to get it into somewhat more functional state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Validation of these parameters has not been implemented with schannel.
Instead of ignoring them silently, reject the configuration to avoid
giving incorrect impression of the parameters being used if
wpa_supplicant is built with schannel instead of the default OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Validation of these parameters has not been implemented in the internal
TLS implementation. Instead of ignoring them silently, reject the
configuration to avoid giving incorrect impression of the parameters
being used if wpa_supplicant is built with the internal TLS
implementation instead of the default OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Validation of these parameters has not been implemented with GnuTLS.
Instead of ignoring them silently, reject the configuration to avoid
giving incorrect impression of the parameters being used if
wpa_supplicant is built with GnuTLS instead of the default OpenSSL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These were already covered in both README-HS20 for credentials and in
header files for developers' documentation, but the copy in
wpa_supplicant.conf did not include all the details. In addition, add a
clearer note pointing at subject_match not being suitable for suffix
matching domain names; domain_suffix_match must be used for that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
data.function needs to be set for the return value to be of any use and
strcmp won't work with NULL pointer either. (CID 99907)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In many applications it is useful not just to enumerate a group of well
known access points, but to use a address/mask notation to match an
entire set of addresses (ca:ff:ee:00:00:00/ff:ff:ff:00:00:00).
This change expands the data structures used by MAC lists to include a
mask indicating the significant (non-masked) portions of an address and
extends the list parser to recognize mask suffixes.
Signed-off-by: Stefan Tomanek <stefan.tomanek@wertarbyte.de>
There should not be a mesh-specific mechanism for setting up channel
parameters since that will just result in duplicated code. IBSS, mesh,
and AP mode can use the same data structures and parameters for setting
up such parameters.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_HT_IBSS driver feature flag. Some drivers could not
set this feature and next could fail when we will enable HT support for
IBSS with error message: nl80211: Join IBSS failed: ret=-22 (Invalid
argument).
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add the t0 retransmission timer as specified by IEEE Std 802.11-2012,
11.3.8.4. This makes SAE much more likely to succeed in the case of lost
frames.
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
When performing SAE authentication in mesh, one station may
initiate authentication by sending a COMMIT as soon as a peer
candidate is discovered. Previously we did this in mesh_rsn.c,
but this left some of the state initialization in a different
part of the code from the rest of the state machine, and we may
need to add other initializations here in the future, so move
that to a more central function.
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
On FreeBSD and DragonFly BSD, we additionally need to skip the
isr_meshid_len bytes of the MESH ID, to get the correct address for
copying the IE data.
The isr_meshid_len field was added in the FreeBSD svn revision r195618
in 2009, so I don't think we need to check the FreeBSD version here.
Signed-off-by: Imre Vadász <imre@vdsz.com>
The local conf pointer needs to be cleared once it gets assigned to
hapd_iface to avoid double-free of the configuration data on error path.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new control interface command TEST_ALLOC_FAIL and GET_ALLOC_FAIL can
now be used to trigger memory allocation failures for testing purposes.
TEST_ALLOC_FAIL sets a failure conditions with
<count>:func[;func][;func]... string and GET_ALLOC_FAIL returns the
current state using the same format. Whenever an allocation is made with
a matching backtrace of calling functions, the count is decremented by
one and once zero is reached, the allocation is forced to fail.
Function names can be prefixed with either '=' or '?' to get different
matching behavior. '=' requires this specific function to be the next
one in the backtrace (i.e., do not skip any other functions in the list
which is the default behavior). '?' allows the function to be optionally
present in the backtrace.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for wpa_tdls_teardown_peers() to be called with sm ==
NULL in case interface addition fails before the WPA state machine is
initialized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
With CONFIG_WPA_TRACE_BFD, the type cast from void* to integer was
generating a compiler warning due to the target integer being larger in
size in case of 32-bit builds. Type case to bfd_hostptr_t instead of
directly to bfd_vma to avoid this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The socket reference tracking entries need to be restored in case
os_realloc_array() fails when adding a new eloop socket.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The per-BSS configuration information needs to be freed if hostapd fails
to add a new interface for a BSS added with "ADD bss_config=..."
command.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hostapd_alloc_bss_data() failed to allocate the struct hostapd_data
instance, dynamic interface addition path ended up trying to dereference
freed memory due to incorrect cleanup steps. Fix this by decrementing
the interface count when the newly added interface is removed. In
addition, make the setup more robust by clearing all changes within
hostapd_data_alloc() if any of the allocations fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Unfortunately, libnl 3.0 has changed the API in a way that is not
backwards compatible by renaming nlmsg_len() to nlmsg_datalen() without
leaving the older nlmsg_len() defined. As such, there does not seem to
be any clean way of using this function without breaking the build with
some libnl versions. For now, replace this call with direct calculation
of the data length since it can be done with a simple one-liner that
compiles with all libnl versions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was supposed to use the iterations parameter from the caller
instead of the hardcoded 4096. In practice, this did not have problems
for normal uses since that 4096 value was used in all cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This moves the AES-SIV test case from tests/test-aes.c to be part of
wpa_supplicant module testing framework with a new
src/crypto/crypto_module_tests.c component. In addition, the second test
vector from RFC 5297 is also included for additional coverage.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function is not used outside aes-siv.c. In addition, include the
aes_siv.h header to make sure that functions get declared consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These are practically unreachable code since cfg80211 fills in the
required attributes or does not send the event. Keep the checks in
place, but minimize the extra code in wpa_supplicant/hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
cfg80211 dropped support for tracking BSS authentication state and
setting NL80211_BSS_STATUS_AUTHENTICATED in 'cfg80211: stop tracking
authenticated state' three years ago (starting in Linux 3.4). As such,
this workaround code in wpa_supplicant cannot be reached anymore. There
is no real need for maintaining it for older kernels either, since there
are other ways of detecting and working around state mismatches with the
actual authentication operations failing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While there is no explicit driver capability advertisement for this in
nl80211, the EOPNOTSUPP response can be interpreted as a clear
indication of NL80211_CMD_SET_REKEY_OFFLOAD not being supported. Check
for that and don't try to offload keys again if the driver has not use
for them.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
1. Add parameters to the scan command to allow MAC address
randomization during scan and scheduled scan.
2. Add capability bits to publish MAC address randomization support
in scan and scheduled scan.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The kernel-driver/firmware are responsible for performing periodic
switches to the target channel with the given peer. Propagate all TDLS
channel switching related information to kernel.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
The supplicant code does not try to control the actual channel of the
radio at any point. It simply passes the target peer and channel
parameters to the driver. It's the driver's responsibility to
periodically initiate TDLS channel-switch operations when TDLS
channel-switching is enabled.
Allow enable/disable operations to be invoked via the control interface.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Mark an appropriate sm flag when TDLS switch is prohibited by the AP.
Populate the flag upon association with the AP.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
If registering WMM-AC ADDTS response action frame or WMM-AC DELTS
action frame fails, the management frame handler is not being
registered. This results with a segmentation fault when trying to
unsubscribe the handler when the interface is removed.
Fix it by always registering the handler and just returning a negative
value to note that the action frame could not be registered.
This fixes an issue introduced in the commit
dfa8787833 ('nl80211: Implement
add_ts/del_ts ops').
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
This reduces the time possible keys could remain in heap memory. Couple
of the nl80211 messages include keys (TK for normal ciphers and
KCK/KEK/PMK for various offloading cases).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There was one final remaining linux_set_iface_flags() call that did not
check the result. This specific one does not really matter much, but
anyway, be more consistent by checking the result and log any error in
debug log. (CID 74146)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible to add WPS vendor extensions through the D-Bus
WPSVendorExtensions setter, but these extensions were not freed when the
P2P GO was stopped or when replacing previously configured extensions.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to keep temporary keys in memory beyond the end of the
association, so explicitly clear any SAE buffers that can contain keys
as soon as such keys are not needed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the decrypted EAPOL-Key Key Data field to remain in
heap after the temporary buffer was freed. Explicitly clear that buffer
before freeing it to minimize the time GTK remains in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need for wpa_supplicant to maintain a copy of the TK part of
PTK after this has been configured to the driver, so clear that from
heap memory and only maintain KEK and KCK during association to allow
additional EAPOL-Key handshakes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PMK and PTK are not needed in the supplicant state machine after
disassociation since core wpa_supplicant will reconfigure them for the
next association. As such, clear these from heap in
wpa_sm_notify_disassoc() to reduce time and number of places storing key
material in memory. In addition, clear FT keys in case of
CONFIG_IEEE80211R=y build (sm->xxkey stored a copy of PSK in case of
FT-PSK).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hostapd will use stdout for debugging, set stdout to be line
buffered in case its output is redirected to a file. This allows
incremental output to be viewed immediately instead of at the file
buffering interval.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
It isn't mandatory. If we need one and it's not present, the ENGINE will
try asking for it. Make sure it doesn't actually let an OpenSSL UI loose,
since we don't currently capture those.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
It needs to be available to ENGINE_by_id(), which in my case means it
needs to be /usr/lib64/openssl/engines/libpkcs11.so. But that's a system
packaging issue. If it isn't there, it will fail gracefully enough with:
ENGINE: engine pkcs11 not available [error:25066067:DSO support routines:DLFCN_LOAD:could not load the shared library]
TLS: Failed to set TLS connection parameters
EAP-TLS: Failed to initialize SSL.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
This means that if the PKCS#11 engine is installed in the right place
in the system, it'll automatically be invoked by ENGINE_by_id("pkcs11")
later, and things work without explictly configuring pkcs11_engine_path.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
If these start with "pkcs11:" then they are PKCS#11 URIs. These Just Work
in the normal private_key/ca_cert/client_cert configuration fields when
built with GnuTLS; make it work that way with OpenSSL too.
(Yes, you still need to explicitly set engine=1 and point to the engine,
but I'll work on that next...)
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
There's no reason I shouldn't be able to use PKCS#11 for just the CA cert,
or even the client cert, while the private key is still from a file.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
New versions of engine_pkcs11 will automatically use the system's
p11-kit-proxy.so to make the globally-configured PKCS#11 tokens available
by default. So invoking the engine without an explicit module path is
not an error.
Older engines will fail but gracefully enough, so although it's still an
error in that case there's no need for us to catch it for ourselves.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
This converts most of the remaining perror() and printf() calls from
hostapd and wpa_supplicant to use wpa_printf().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It's possible to jump through hoops to support it in older versions too,
but that seems a little unnecessary at this point.
Signed-off-by: David Woodhouse <David.Woodhouse@intel.com>
'_t' suffix for gnutls_session and gnutls_transport_ptr was added in
GnuTLS 1.1.11 over ten years ago and the more recent versions of GnuTLS
have started forcing compiler warnings from the old names. Move to the
new names and don't bother about backwards compatibility with older
versions taken into account how long ago this change happened in GnuTLS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
struct wpa_driver_associate_params moved to using struct
hostapd_freq_params instead of just frequency. Need to update wpa_priv
to do same.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some of the struct hostapd_data variables get initialized with allocated
memory in the P2P GO case even before hapd->started has been set to 1.
As such, hostapd_free_hapd_data() needs to free these even if
!hapd->stated.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It would be at least theoretically possible for the bridge netdev to
have disappeared at the time hostapd processes the RTM newlink/dellink
message. As such, it is better to verify that if_indextoname() actually
returned success before printing the bridge ifname in debug. In
addition, there is not much point trying to add the bridge ifindex into
the list of own ifindexes in case the interface has already been
removed, so skip that part as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is a possible race condition between receiving the
NEW_PEER_CANDIDATE event and the Authentication frame from the peer.
Previously, if the Authentication frame RX event was indicated first,
that frame got dropped silently. Now, this frame is still dropped, but a
copy of it is stored and the frame gets processed on the following
NEW_PEER_CANDIDATE event if that is received for the same peer within
two seconds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 587d60d2b7 ('Add AP mode support
for HT 20/40 co-ex Action frame') added processing of co-ex report, but
did not include proper bounds checking or IE type checking for the
payload. Furthermore, this was not ready for the possible extensibility
of the 20/40 BSS Coexistence element.
Fix these by checking IE ids for both elements and doing more
apprioriate bounds checking for the element lengths to avoid potentially
reading beyond the frame buffer. Though, the event receive buffer in
both libnl and driver_nl80211_monitor.c is sufficiently large to make it
very unlikely that the maximum read of about 260 bytes beyond the end of
the Action frame would really have any chances of hitting the end of the
memory buffer, so the practical effect of missing bounds checking would
have been possibly accepting an invalid report frame and moving to 20
MHz channel unnecessarily.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 5ce3ae4c8f tried to clean up
fetching a pointer to the action code field, but it forgot to add
IEEE80211_HDRLEN to the pointer. This resulted in the coex report
elements being read from too early in the frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was used in the past, but all the event processing is now either
through process_global_event() or process_bss_event().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Maximum number of peer links is maximum number of connecting mesh peers
at the same time. This value is 0..255 based on the
dot11MeshNumberOfPeerings range.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
This helps hwsim test cases by avoiding undesired state from previously
executed test cases affecting following tests.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The local ifindex list needs to be updated only if the current bridge
interface is the correct one. If hostapd is going to move the interface
to another bridge, the old bridge ifindex must not be added. In
addition, when removing the bridge interface on deinit, it may need to
be set down to allow bridge removal.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The interface was incorrectly changed to station mode between the two
IBSS join requests and that made the second attempt fail. Remove that
undesired mode clearing from this special case of IBSS leave sequence.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These hostapd configuration parameter was left at the default values
(WPA-PSK/TKIP) even for cases where WPA was disabled. While these
parameters are not really used much in non-WPA cases, they do get used
for one corner case in nl80211 configuration to disable encryption of
EAPOL frames in IEEE 802.1X WEP case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 9f12614b8c ('nl80211: Do not
encrypt IEEE 802.1X WEP EAPOL') tried to use
NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_NO_ENCRYPT to disable encryption of EAPOL
frames for WEP IEEE 802.1X. However, it used incorrect key management
suite (IEEE 802.1X with WPA/WPA2 while the non-WPA version is needed
here). Consequently, the no-encrypt flag was never set to the driver
(WPA/WPA2 cases do not meet the WEP as pairwise criteria).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While other authentication algorithms mark Status Code as being Reserved
in the case of the transaction number 1, SAE does not. Check that the
Status Code indicates success before creating SAE state. In addition,
fix the mesh anti-clogging token request parsing on big endian CPUs.
Transaction number 2 (confirm) can also have non-zero Status Code to
report an error. Those should be processed, but not replied to with yet
another error message. This could happen in mesh case. Avoid a loop of
error messages by dropping the non-success case without additional
response.
In addition, don't reply to unknown transaction numbers if the status
code is non-zero. This avoids a loop of error messages if an invalid
frame where to be injected (or unlikely corruption were to occur).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The mesh gate is used to bridge (or route) between mesh network and
another network. For example, mesh gate acts as router between mesh
network and IEEE 802.11 BSS network.
This command makes a virtual mesh interface to be used for mesh gate.
This command expects to be used like this.
wpa_cli -i wlan0 MESH_INTERFACE_ADD ifname=mesh0
wpa_cli -i mesh0 add_network
wpa_cli -i mesh0 set_network 0 ssid '"commell_2X_mmm"'
wpa_cli -i mesh0 set_network 0 mode 5
wpa_cli -i mesh0 set_network 0 frequency 2412
wpa_cli -i mesh0 set_network 0 key_mgmt SAE
wpa_cli -i mesh0 set_network 0 psk '"01234567"'
wpa_cli -i mesh0 mesh_group_add 0
wpa_cli -i wlan0 mesh_group_remove mesh0
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
This was used only for the VHT capability checks for determining bit
offset for right shift. That was replaced with a constant defines since
there is no need to calculate this at runtime.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Building wpa_supplicant with the musl C library fails since musl does
not define type names such as '__uint32_t'. To support building
wpa_supplicant with the musl C library use the integer types declared in
the ISO C standard header file <stdint.h>.
Signed-off-by: Jörg Krause <jkrause@posteo.de>
drv->ctx always points to the first BSS and we should report event using
BSS related to the interface we got NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION from.
This fixes STA association for drivers using NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION and
multiple virtual interfaces.
Before:
nl80211: Drv Event 19 (NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION) received for wlan0-1 (ifindex:7)
nl80211: New station 02:00:00:00:01:00
wlan0: STA 02:00:00:00:01:00 IEEE 802.11: associated
After:
nl80211: Drv Event 19 (NL80211_CMD_NEW_STATION) received for wlan0-1 (ifindex:7)
nl80211: New station 02:00:00:00:01:00
wlan0-1: STA 02:00:00:00:01:00 IEEE 802.11: associated
This is not applicable to the cases where authentication (AP SME & MLME)
is in hostapd and hostapd_assoc_cb() instead of hostapd_notif_assoc()
handles BSS selection.
Signed-off-by: Rafał Miłecki <zajec5@gmail.com>
This allows recovery through fallback to full EAP authentication if the
server rejects us, e.g., due to having dropped ERP state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to drop any pending ERP key from both the internal AP
authentication server and RADIUS server use of hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd.conf radio_measurements parameter can now be used to
configure a test build to advertise support for radio measurements with
neighbor report enabled. There is no real functionality that would
actually process the request, i.e., this only for the purpose of minimal
STA side testing for now.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, only WPA + WPA2 was covered. If FT is enabled in addition to
WPA, MDIE is included in the buffer between RSN and WPA elements. The
previous version ended up leaving only the MDIE after having skipped RSN
element. Fix this to skip MDIE as well to leave only WPA IE regardless
of whether FT is enabled in AP configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The send_eapol() callback was used by driver_test.c, but with that
removed, there is no remaining users of the alternative EAPOL frame
transmitting mechanism in wpa_supplicant, i.e., all remaining driver
interfaces use l2_packet instead. Remove the send_eapol() to get rid of
unused code.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit d4913c585e ('OpenSSL: Fix EAP-FAST
peer regression') introduced a workaround to use a new SSL_CTX instance
set for TLSv1_method() when using EAP-FAST. While that works, it is
unnecessarily complex since there is not really a need to use a separate
SSL_CTX to be able to do that. Instead, simply use SSL_set_ssl_method()
to update the ssl_method for the SSL instance. In practice, this commit
reverts most of the tls_openssl.c changes from that earlier commit and
adds that single call into tls_connection_set_params() based on EAP-FAST
flag.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to determine whether the last TLS-based EAP
authentication instance re-used a previous session (e.g., TLS session
resumption or EAP-FAST session ticket).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit introduces a QCA vendor command that allows interrogation of
the vendor-specific features supported by the device/driver. Currently
the only defined feature is the ability to offload key management.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 35efa2479f ('OpenSSL: Allow TLS
v1.1 and v1.2 to be negotiated by default') changed from using
TLSv1_method() to SSLv23_method() to allow negotiation of TLS v1.0,
v1.1, and v1.2.
Unfortunately, it looks like EAP-FAST does not work with this due to
OpenSSL not allowing ClientHello extensions to be configured with
SSL_set_session_ticket_ext() when SSLv23_method() is used. Work around
this regression by initiating a separate SSL_CTX instance for EAP-FAST
phase 1 needs with TLSv1_method() while leaving all other EAP cases
using TLS to work with the new default that allows v1.1 and v1.2 to be
negotiated. This is not ideal and will hopefully get fixed in the future
with a new OpenSSL method, but until that time, this can be used allow
other methods use newer TLS versions while still allowing EAP-FAST to be
used even if it remains to be constraint to TLS v1.0 only.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit f5fa824e9a ('Update OpenSSL 0.9.8
patch for EAP-FAST support') changed the OpenSSL 0.9.8 patch to support
the new API that was introduced in OpenSSL 1.0.0 for EAP-FAST. As such,
there should be no valid users of the old API anymore and tls_openssl.c
can be cleaned up to use only the new API.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some cases like ifconfig down/up may require MACsec restart. To make
sure the appropriate protect frames and replay parameters get configured
in cases where the interface was down, set these parameters from KaY
configuration to the driver before creating a new transmit SC. This
allows MACsec functionality to recover automatically on such restart.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit ac330cfd87 ('P2P: Reinvite with
social operation channel if no common channels') introduced a mechamisn
to reinvite a peer during a persistent group reinvocation from a GO with
a different operating channel proposal. This mechanism can fail if the
inviting device (GO) ends up getting a retransmitted, duplicated
Invitation Response frame processed second time while waiting for the
response to the retried Invitation Request (using one of the social
channels as the operating channel). IEEE 802.11 duplicate frame
detection mechanisms are supposed to prevent this type of sequence, but
not all drivers support those rules properly for pre-association frames,
including P2P Public Action frames.
Work around this issue by checking that the dialog token in the
Invitation Response frame matches the one from the last Invitation
Request if the special invitation retry mechanism is used. This is safer
to do now than to enable dialog token matching for all invitation cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for unmasking of 11b rates to fail if a P2P group is
terminated while the netdev is down (e.g., due to rfkill block). This
could result in the 11b TX rates being left masked for non-P2P
operations. This would be particularly unfortunate for channel 14 use
since OFDM rates are not allowed on channel 14 and only OFDM rates were
configured P2P. This issue showed up, e.g., when running hwsim test case
rfkill_autogo followed by ap_wps_conf_chan14.
It may be possible to allow the failed operation in cfg80211/mac80211,
but it looks better to work around this on wpa_supplicant side as well.
Try to unmask the 11b rates again on the next connection request if the
rate unmasking operation had failed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to debug issues related to TX rate masking for P2P
use cases (and unmasking for non-P2P).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This converts os_snprintf() result validation cases to use
os_snprintf_error() for cases that were note covered by spatch and
semantic patches.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This converts os_snprintf() result validation cases to use
os_snprintf_error() in cases where success condition was used to execute
a step. These changes were done automatically with spatch using the
following semantic patch:
@@
expression E1,E2,E3;
statement S1;
@@
E1 = os_snprintf(E2, E3, ...);
- if (\( E1 >= 0 \| E1 > 0 \) && \( (size_t) E1 < E3 \| E1 < (int) E3 \| E1 < E3 \))
+ if (!os_snprintf_error(E3, E1))
S1
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds verification of os_snprintf() result against the maximum
buffer length. These changes were done automatically with spatch
using the following semantic patch:
@@
expression E1,E2,E3;
statement S1;
@@
E1 = os_snprintf(E2, E3, ...);
- if (\( E1 < 0 \| E1 <= 0 \))
+ if (os_snprintf_error(E3, E1))
(
S1
|
{ ... }
)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, the immediate EAPOL authenticator startup was scheduled
without having received EAPOL-Start only for the case where WPA/WPA2 was
enabled. This can be extended to speed up non-WPA/WPA2 cases as well if
the STA includes WPS IE in Association Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Shift right on unsigned char limits the value to 0..63 which is within
bounds for base64_table[]. Anyway, some static analyzers do not seem to
understand that. See if an otherwise unnecessary masking gets rid of
false warnings. (CID 62858)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Shift right on unsigned char limits the value to 0..63 which is within
bounds for base64_table[]. Anyway, some static analyzers do not seem to
understand that. See if an otherwise unnecessary masking gets rid of
false warnings. (CID 62858)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
For some reason, "pos + len > end" is not clear enough, but "len > end -
pos" is recognized. Use that to get rid of a false positive from a
static analyzer (CID 72697).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
For some reason, the previous version was not understood to be null
terminating the buffer from recv(). It was doing this fine, though. Try
to use a bit more simpler design in hopes of getting static analyzers to
understand this. (CID 72702)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reduced number of unnecessarily duplicated driver interface
callback functions for sending Action frames by using the more generic
send_action() instead of FT specific send_ft_action().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If "ADD bss_config=" command failed in driver_init() or
hostapd_setup_interface(), some of the allocated resources were not
freed properly.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This helper function had not used the nl80211_set_iface_id() helper, but
there is no reason why it couldn't re-use the same helper as other
places using nl80211_cmd_msg().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use the helper function to replace places that use nlmsg_alloc(),
nl80211_cmd(), and either bss->ifindex or if_nametoindex(bss->ifname).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
bss->wdev_id_set is set for the non-detdev P2P Device, so
nl80211_cmd_msg() can be used as-is for these cases as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This removes duplicated code for building nl80211 commands for a BSS.
This commit handles the functions that were already using
nl80211_set_iface_id().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This gets rid of more NLA_PUT* macro uses in nl80211 to reduce the
number of functions that depend on the hidden behavior of jumping to the
nla_put_failure label.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This gets rid of NLA_PUT* macro use in checking nl80211 capabilities to
reduce the number of functions that depend on the hidden behavior of
jumping to the nla_put_failure label.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a separate pointer and length field instead of trying to copy from a
struct field that has only part of the full buffer available.
(CID 68115)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Bounds checking for gd->gtk_len in wpa_supplicant_check_group_cipher()
was apparently too complex for some static analyzers. Use a local
variable and a more explicit validation step to avoid false report.
(CID 62864)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Using aes_wrap() to initialize a data structure seemed to be too much
for some static analyzers to understand. Make it obvious that the target
is not just the single struct member. (CID 68111)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Using aes_unwrap() to initialize a data structure seemed to be too much
for some static analyzers to understand. Make it obvious that the target
is initialized and that the target is not just the single struct member.
In addition, clean up the design to avoid removal of const with a
typecast. (CID 68112, CID 68134, CID 68135, CID 68136)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The separate p2p_channels_union_inplace() makes the function easier for
static analyzers to see that the result buffer is always initialized.
(CID 74494)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 16689c7cfc ('hostapd: Allow ACS to
be offloaded to the driver') used incorrect operator to determine
whether HT40 was configured. Fix that to mask the ht_capab bit
correctly. (CID 77286)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was not really a real issue since bin_clear_free() would not use
the emsk_len argument when emsk is NULL as it would be on the path where
emsk_len has not been initilized. Anyway, it is better to get rid of the
warning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Derive rRK and rIK on EAP peer if ERP is enabled. The new wpa_supplicant
network configuration parameter erp=1 can now be used to configure the
EAP peer to derive EMSK, rRK, and rIK at the successful completion of an
EAP authentication method. This functionality is not included in the
default build and can be enabled with CONFIG_ERP=y.
If EAP authenticator indicates support for re-authentication protocol,
initiate this with EAP-Initiate/Re-auth and complete protocol when
receiving EAP-Finish/Re-auth.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Derive rRK and rIK on EAP server if ERP is enabled and use these keys to
allow EAP re-authentication to be used and to derive rMSK.
The new hostapd configuration parameter eap_server_erp=1 can now be used
to configure the integrated EAP server to derive EMSK, rRK, and rIK at
the successful completion of an EAP authentication method. This
functionality is not included in the default build and can be enabled
with CONFIG_ERP=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can now be configured to transmit EAP-Initiate/Re-auth-Start
before EAP-Request/Identity to try to initiate ERP. This is disabled by
default and can be enabled with erp_send_reauth_start=1 and optional
erp_reauth_start_domain=<domain>.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Suppose there are two APs (AP1 & AP2) and user attempted to connect to
AP2 before the previous connection with AP1 could succeed. Now, if the
connection event comes for the older AP with failed status, we should
just ignore it as the wpa_supplicant state has moved to "ASSOCIATING"
with the new AP (AP2).
This is a similar to the case where a disconnection event is ignored for
a case where local disconnect request can cause the extra event to show
up during the next association process following that command.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Using QCA vendor command, allow ACS function to be offloaded to the
driver. Once channels are selected, hostapd is notified to perform OBSS
operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds EAP-PAX server and peer method functions for deriving
Session-Id from Method-Id per RFC 4746 and RFC 5247.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Now that EMSK derivation is taken into use with ERP, it is better to
make sure the temporary MSK + EMSK buffer does not get left in heap
after use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The comment about library not supporting Session-Id derivation was not
accurate and there is no need to check for master key that is not used
as part of derivation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, it was possible for the loop through the data components to
increment addr/len index at the last position beyond the declared size.
This resulted in reading beyond those arrays. The read values were not
used and as such, this was unlikely to cause noticeable issues, but
anyway, memory checkers can detect this and the correct behavior is to
stop increments before going beyond the arrays since no more bytes will
be processed after this anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This flag was left in the STA entry for the short duration after the STA
gets deauthenticated. If the STA sends a Class 2 or 3 frame during that
short time, the AP would not have replied with Deauthentication frame
indicating no association is present.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd was still providing couple of parameters that were used only in
the already removed driver_test.c framework.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The associate() handler was not prepared for params->wpa_ie containing
some other IEs than WPA/RSN IE and ended up configuring security policy
incorrectly for open networks if such IEs were present. Fix this by
using wpa_proto parameter instead of IEs to determine security policy
for driver configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Just to make the test framework happy, it uses the driver
status command to obtain the interface MAC address.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The RA, NS, and NA packets may be longer, so do not arbitrarily limit
the packet socket capture size to 150 bytes in the socket filter.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This field needs to be validated in addition to validating the total
length of the received frame to avoid reading beyond the frame buffer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Only the NS frames should be checked to be long enough to cover all the
fields used in the NS data structure. This allows shorter RA and NA
frames to be processed for multicast-to-unicast rules.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
l2_packet_send() returns >= 0 on success, i.e., non-zero value does not
mean failure. Fix this debug print to show up only on negative return
values.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to debug operations. The debug message is marked
EXCESSIVE, though, to avoid filling the logs with too much information
in default debugging cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no point in trying to send the unicast converted version to a
STA that is not in authorized state since the driver would be expected
to drop normal TX Data frames in such state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If invitation to reinvoke a persistent group from the GO fails with the
peer indicating that there are no common channels, there is no defined
means for the peer to indicate which channel could have worked. Since
this type of issue with available channels changing over time can
happen, try to work around this by retrying invitation using one of the
social channels as the operating channel unless a specific operating
channel was forced for the group.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed to make following operations behave as expected since
mesh iftypes may prevent various operations (e.g., registering Probe
Request frame RX). Use same design as leave_ibss does to handle this
consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible for the ignore_if_down_event flag to remain set in some
cases where interface mode change required the interface to be set down
temporarily. If that happened, the following rfkill interface down could
have been ignored and device could have been left trying to scan or
connect (which would all fail due to the interface beign down). Clean
this up by clearing the ignore_if_down_event flag on the interface down
event regardless of whether the interface is up at the time this event
is processed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 6c6678e7a4 ('nl80211: Make
br_ifindex available in i802_bss') did not cover the case where
i802_check_bridge() ends up creating the bridge interface. That left
bss->br_ifindex zero and prevented neighbor addition. Extend that
functionality to update br_ifindex once the bridge netdev has been
added.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These need to be marked packed to avoid issues with compilers
potentially adding padding between the fields (e.g., gcc on 64-bit
seemed to make struct icmpv6_ndmsg two octets too long which broke IPv6
address discovery).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This replaces the use of Linux kernel header files (linux/ip.h,
linux/udp.h, linux/ipv6.h, and linux/icmpv6.h) with equivalent header
files from C library. In addition, ndisc_snoop.c is now built
conditionally on CONFIG_IPV6=y so that it is easier to handle hostapd
builds with toolchains that do not support IPv6 even if Hotspot 2.0 is
enabled in the build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit inserts Finite Cyclic Group to Anti-Clogging Token request
frame because IEEE Std 802.11-2012, Table 8-29 says "Finite Cyclic Group
is present if Status is zero or 76".
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
The mesh anti-clogging functionality is implemented partially. This
patch fixes to parse anti-clogging request frame and use anti-clogging
token.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Some static analyzers had problems understanding "left < count * len"
(CID 62855, CID 62856), so convert this to equivalent "count > left /
len" (len here is fixed to 4, so this can be done efficiently).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, this was implicitly limited by the 16-bit length field to
65535. This resulted in unhelpful static analyzer warnings (CID 62868).
Add an explicit (but pretty arbitrary) limit of 50000 bytes to avoid
this. The actual WSC messages are significantly shorter in practice, but
there is no specific protocol limit, so 50000 is as good as any limit to
use here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the earlier PeerKey station side design to be used on the
AP side as well by passing pointer and already validated length from the
caller rather than parsing the length again from the frame buffer. This
avoids false warnings from static analyzer (CID 62870, CID 62871,
CID 62872).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some static analyzers seem to have issues understanding "pos +
proposal_len > end" style validation, so convert this to "proposal_len >
end - pos" to make this more obvious to be bounds checking for
proposal_len. (CID 62874)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some static analyzers seem to have issues with "pos + len > end"
validation (CID 62875), so convert this to "len > end - pos" to make it
more obvious that len is validated against its bounds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was too difficult for some static analyzers (CID 62876). In
addition, the pac_info_len assignment should really have explicitly
validated that there is room for the two octet length field instead of
trusting the following validation step to handle both this and the
actual pac_info_len bounds checking.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
_next_ns_data could look like it would be used uninitialized in
ieee80211_radiotap_iterator_next() to static analyzers. Avoid
unnecessary reports by explicitly initializing all variables in struct
ieee80211_radiotap_iterator. (CID 62878)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Static analyzers may not have understood the bounds checking on
data->num_pmkid. Use a local, temporary variable and validate that that
value is within length limits before assining this to data->num_pmkid to
make this clearer. (CID 62857, CID 68126)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier for static analyzer to confirm that the length
field bounds are checked. WPA_GET_BE16() is also used instead of
explicit byte-swapping operations in this file. (CID 68129)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a temporary, local variable to check the DH parameters received from
the server before assigning the length to the struct tlsv1_client
variables. This will hopefully make it easier for static analyzers to
figure out that there is bounds checking for the value. (CID 72699)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It could have been possible to select a socket that is not open
(sel_sock == -1) and try to use that in socket operations. This would
fail with potentially confusing error messages. Make this clearer by
printing a clear debug log entry on socket not being available.
(CID 72696)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like the "pos + plen > end" case was not clear enough for a
static analyzer to figure out that plen was being verified to not go
beyond the buffer. (CID 72687)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Send link measurement response when a request is received. Advertise
only RCPI, computing it from the RSSI of the request. The TX power field
is left to be filled by the driver. All other fields are not published.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add link measurement request to registration of Action frames to be
handled by wpa_supplicant if the driver supports TX power value
insertation.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add NEIGHBOR_REP_REQUEST command to the wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface.
This command triggers the sending of a Neighbor Report Request to the
associated AP.
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
Add the ability to send a Neighbor Report Request (part of
RRM). Requester is then notified once the report arrives.
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
Add Neighbor Report Response Action frame to registration of Action
frames to be handled by wpa_supplicant.
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
In case the AP we are associating with advertises support for RRM,
advertise our own RRM support in the (Re)Association Request frame. This
is done by adding an RRM Capabilities IE. The underlying driver is
expected to further add a Power Capabilities IE to the request, and set
the Radio Measurement flag in the Capability Info field. At this point
the RRM Capabilities IE advertises no measurement support.
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
Set the RRM capability flags, based on the capabilities reported
by the underlying driver.
In addition, upon connection, notify the underlying driver regarding
RRM support.
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
Add definitions for RRM (Radio Resource Measurement) support:
1. Flags that specify the RRM capabilities of the underlying driver
2. Flag for RRM in Capability Info field in Management frames
3. Indication in association parameters regarding an RRM connection
Signed-off-by: Assaf Krauss <assaf.krauss@intel.com>
ieee80211_chan_to_freq() is a generic function that replaces and extends
the previous P2P-specific p2p_channel_to_freq(). The new function
supports both the global operating class table as well as the additional
US, EU, JP, and CN operating class tables.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd control interface can now be used to request transmission of a
BSS Transition Management Request frame to a specified station.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the 4-way handshake ends up having to retransmit the EAPOL-Key
message 1/4 due to a timeout on waiting for the response, it is possible
for the Supplicant to change SNonce between the first and second
EAPOL-Key message 2/4. This is not really desirable due to extra
complexities it causes on the Authenticator side, but some deployed
stations are doing this.
This message sequence looks like this:
AP->STA: EAPOL-Key 1/4 (replay counter 1, ANonce)
AP->STA: EAPOL-Key 1/4 (replay counter 2, ANonce)
STA->AP: EAPOL-Key 2/4 (replay counter 1, SNonce 1)
AP->STA: EAPOL-Key 3/4 (replay counter 3, ANonce)
STA->AP: EAPOL-Key 2/4 (replay counter 2, SNonce 2)
followed by either:
STA->AP: EAPOL-Key 4/4 (replay counter 3 using PTK from SNonce 1)
or:
AP->STA: EAPOL-Key 3/4 (replay counter 4, ANonce)
STA->AP: EAPOL-Key 4/4 (replay counter 4, using PTK from SNonce 2)
Previously, Authenticator implementation was able to handle the cases
where SNonce 1 and SNonce 2 were identifical (i.e., Supplicant did not
update SNonce which is the wpa_supplicant behavior) and where PTK
derived using SNonce 2 was used in EAPOL-Key 4/4. However, the case of
using PTK from SNonce 1 was rejected ("WPA: received EAPOL-Key 4/4
Pairwise with unexpected replay counter" since EAPOL-Key 3/4 TX and
following second EAPOL-Key 2/4 invalidated the Replay Counter that was
used previously with the first SNonce).
This commit extends the AP/Authenticator workaround to keep both SNonce
values in memory if two EAPOL-Key 2/4 messages are received with
different SNonce values. The following EAPOL-Key 4/4 message is then
accepted whether the MIC has been calculated with the latest SNonce (the
previously existing behavior) or with the earlier SNonce (the new
extension). This makes 4-way handshake more robust with stations that
update SNonce for each transmitted EAPOL-Key 2/4 message in cases where
EAPOL-Key message 1/4 needs to be retransmitted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
cfg80211 will reject any of these attributes regardless of whether the
values actually change or not when NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION is used for
something else than TDLS. This path is hit at least when setting up
mesh, so filter out the attributes from NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION to match
the rules in cfg80211.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Changing the P2P state to P2P_IDLE on GO Negotiation Failure would stop
the previously issued P2P_FIND operation without notifying the upper
layers. Leave the search operation running if in P2P_SEARCH state to
avoid unexpected behavior in case the upper layers issued a new P2P_FIND
while waiting for GO Negotiation to complete.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When DGAF Disable is on, perform multicast-to-unicast for DHCP packets
and Router Advertisement packets. This is a requirement for Hotspot 2.0.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit establishes the infrastructure, and handles the Neighbor
Solicitation and Neighbor Advertisement frames. This will be extended
in the future to handle other frames.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
Multicast-to-unicast conversion send will be needed in various part of
Proxy ARP and DGAF Disable.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows adding/deleting an IPv6 neighbor entry to/from the bridge,
to which the BSS belongs. This commit adds the needed functionality in
driver_nl80211.c for the Linux bridge implementation. In theory, this
could be shared with multiple Linux driver interfaces, but for now, only
the main nl80211 interface is supported.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible that a station device might miss an ACK for an
authentication, association, or action frame, and thus retransmit the
same frame although the frame is already being processed in the stack.
While the duplicated frame should really be dropped in the kernel or
firmware code where duplicate detection is implemented for data frames,
it is possible that pre-association cases are not fully addressed (which
is the case at least with mac80211 today) and the frame may be delivered
to upper layer stack.
In such a case, the local AP will process the retransmitted frame although
it has already handled the request, which might cause the station to get
confused and as a result disconnect from the AP, blacklist it, etc.
To avoid such a case, save the sequence control of the last processed
management frame and in case of retransmissions drop them.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
This gets registered in tls_openssl.c from tls_init(), so there is no
need for EAP-pwd implementation to register explicitly. This avoids some
corner cases where OpenSSL resources do not get fully freed on exit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If DFS implementation was built in, some configurations with drivers
that do not provide mode information could end up dereferencing a NULL
pointer. Fix this by skipping DFS operations in such cases since not
having information about modes and channels means that hostapd could not
perform DFS anyway (i.e., either this is not a wireless driver or the
driver takes care of DFS internally).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 7f0303d5b0 ('hostapd: Verify VHT
160/80+80 MHz driver support') added couple of hapd->iface->current_mode
dereferences of which the one in hostapd_set_freq() can be hit with some
configuration files when using driver wrappers that do not have hw_mode
data, i.e., when current_mode is NULL. This could result in segmentation
fault when trying to use driver=wired. Fix this by checking that
current_mode is not NULL before dereferencing it to get vht_capab.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This provides a simpler version of snprintf that doesn't require further
error checks.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Add ops to notify about TSPECs to add/remove. Additionally, subscribe to
ADDTS/DELTS Action frames to be able to process WMM AC Action frames.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Add the TSPEC to the driver on successful TSPEC ADDTS response. Delete
the TSPEC when receiving DELTS action.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Add add_tx_ts() and del_tx_ts() ops to notify the driver about
TSPEC add / delete.
Additionally, add wmm_ac_supported flag to indicate
whether the driver supports WMM AC.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Initialize WMM AC data structures upon successful association
with an AP that publishes WMM support, and deinitialize the data
structure when the association is no longer valid.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
This patch makes four MIB variables for plink configurable and sets the
correct default values based on IEEE Std 802.11s-2011.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Android 4.4 uses "BSS" command instead of "SCAN_RESULT" command.
So this patch add the mesh scan result for BSS command.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Parse MESH_GROUP_ADD/REMOVE commands on ctrl interface and call
wpa_supplicant routines. These commands are used to start or
join and leave a mesh network.
The mesh id is given in the configuration file, therefore there is
no need to scan before joining a mesh network. We reuse the
connect_without_scan construct used by P2P for that same purpose.
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Add a new option "mesh_ht_mode" that specifies the HT mode for the
mesh, with this option on, mesh beacons, actions frames, and probe
responses with include the appropriate HT information elements.
[original implementation by Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com>]
[some fixes by Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>]
Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Add timer to do SAE re-authentication with number of tries defined
by MESH_AUTH_RETRY and timeout defined by MESH_AUTH_TIMEOUT.
Ignoring the sending of reply message on "SAE confirm before commit"
to avoid "ping-pong" issues with other mesh nodes. This is obvious when
number of mesh nodes in MBSS reaching 6.
Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Add state transition logic to the SAE frame handling in order to more
fully implement the state machine from the IEEE 802.11 standard. Special
cases are needed for infrastructure BSS case to avoid unexpected
Authentication frame sequence by postponing transmission of the second
Authentication frame untile the STA sends its Confirm.
[original patch by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>]
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
New kernels in wiphy_suspend() will call cfg80211_leave_all() that will
eventually end up in cfg80211_stop_ap() unless wowlan_triggers were set.
For now, use the parameters from the station mode as-is. It may be
desirable to extend (or constraint) this in the future for specific AP
mode needs.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
This adds support for AKM 00-0F-AC:11 to specify the integrity and
key-wrap algorithms for EAPOL-Key frames using the new design where
descriptor version is set to 0 and algorithms are determined based on
AKM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new AKM uses a different mechanism of deriving the PMKID based on
KCK instead of PMK. hostapd was already doing this after the KCK had
been derived, but wpa_supplicant functionality needs to be moved from
processing of EAPOL-Key frame 1/4 to 3/4 to have the KCK available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds definitions for the 128-bit level Suite B AKM 00-0F-AC:11. The
functionality itself is not yet complete, i.e., this commit only
includes parts to negotiate the new AKM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use SSLv23_method() to enable TLS version negotiation for any version
equal to or newer than 1.0. If the old behavior is needed as a
workaround for some broken authentication servers, it can be configured
with phase1="tls_disable_tlsv1_1=1 tls_disable_tlsv1_2=1".
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is needed since the SCAN command with radio work returns before the
actual driver operation to trigger a scan has been executed and as such,
cannot return result of that operation.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
It looks like some APs are incorrectly selecting descriptor version 3
(AES-128-CMAC) for EAPOL-Key frames when version 2 (HMAC-SHA1) was
expected to be used. This is likely triggered by an attempt to negotiate
PMF with SHA1-based AKM.
Since AES-128-CMAC is considered stronger than HMAC-SHA1, allow the
incorrect, but stronger, option to be used in these cases to avoid
interoperability issues with deployed APs.
This issue shows up with "WPA: CCMP is used, but EAPOL-Key descriptor
version (3) is not 2" in debug log. With the new workaround, this issue
is ignored and "WPA: Interoperability workaround: allow incorrect
(should have been HMAC-SHA1), but stronger (is AES-128-CMAC), descriptor
version to be used" is written to the log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some flag already using a bit larger than 32, so extend the hostapd
drv_flags type similarly to the earlier wpa_supplicant change to get the
full flag content.
Signed-off-by: Yanbo Li <yanbol@qti.qualcomm.com>
This was used in driver_test.c, but that driver wrapper has been removed
and there are no remaining or expected users for EVENT_MLME_RX.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was used in hostapd driver_test.c, but that driver wrapper has been
removed and there are no remaining or expected users for
EVENT_FT_RRB_RX.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The MadWifi project is not active anymore and the last release happened
in early 2008. As such, there is no remaining justification for
maintaining the madwifi-specific driver interface for hostapd either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
With the radio work interface, the actual request to start p2p_scan
operation is scheduled from a radio work and hence the initial return
value cannot provide the real result of the driver operation to trigger
a scan. Introduce a new notification API to indicate the scan trigger
status based on which the p2p_scan_running instance can be set using the
real return value from the driver operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
macsec_validate variable was set incorrectly to FALSE(0) or TRUE(1)
instead of the enum validate_frames values (Disabled(0), Checked(1),
Strict(2). This ended up policy == SHOULD_SECURE to be mapped to
macsec_validate == Checked instead of Strict. This could have resulted
in unintended SecY forwarding of invalid packets rather than dropping
them.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This function is always called with the peer argument equal to
p2p->go_neg_peer, so there is no need for that argument to be there. In
addition, p2p->go_neg_peer is not NULL in cases where there is an
ongoing GO Negotiation, so the function can be simplified to just check
once whether the peer pointer is set and if not, skip all processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The timeout check while waiting for the peer to accept the GO
Negotiation depended on the WAIT_PEER_IDLE or WAIT_PEER_CONNECT states
being in use. Any P2P command to alter such states would have resulted
in the failure to time out GO Negotiation and thus ended up in not
indicating GO Negotiation failure or left the selected peer available
for new GO negotiation after the expected two minute timeout.
Fix this by using a separate timer to time out GO Negotiation
irrespective of the P2P state.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit b41f26845a ('Add support for
offloading key management operations to the driver') used incorrect
variable for determining the KCK length. This does not get triggered in
normal use cases since KCK and KEK are always included and of the same
length (in currently supported key management cases). Anyway, this needs
to be fixed to check the correct attribute. (CID 74491)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Proxy ARP allows the AP devices to keep track of the hardware address to
IP address mapping of the STA devices within the BSS. When a request for
such information is made (i.e., ARP request, Neighbor Solicitation), the
AP will respond on behalf of the STA device within the BSS. Such
requests could originate from a device within the BSS or also from the
bridge. In the process of the AP replying to the request (i.e., ARP
reply, Neighbor Advertisement), the AP will drop the original request
frame. The relevant STA will not even know that such information was
ever requested.
This feature is a requirement for Hotspot 2.0, and is defined in IEEE
Std 802.11-2012, 10.23.13. While the Proxy ARP support code mainly
resides in the kernel bridge code, in order to optimize the performance
and simplify kernel implementation, the DHCP snooping code was added to
the hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows setting a network parameter on the bridge that the BSS
belongs to.
This commit adds the needed functionality in driver_nl80211.c for the
Linux bridge implementation. In theory, this could be shared with
multiple Linux driver interfaces, but for now, only the main nl80211
interface is supported.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows setting a bridge port attribute. Specifically, the bridge
port in this context is the port to which the BSS belongs.
This commit adds the needed functionality in driver_nl80211.c for the
Linux bridge implementation. In theory, this could be shared with
multiple Linux driver interfaces, but for now, only the main nl80211
interface is supported.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows adding/deleting an IPv4 neighbor entry to/from the bridge,
to which the BSS belongs. This commit adds the needed functionality in
driver_nl80211.c for the Linux bridge implementation. In theory, this
could be shared with multiple Linux driver interfaces, but for now, only
the main nl80211 interface is supported.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is an initial step in starting to split the large driver_nl80211.c
implementation into somewhat smaller parts.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to figure out from hostapd control interface
whether an interface had been added to a bridge externally at the time
hostapd interface was enabled or if the interface gets added during
hostapd operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These can be convenient for upper layer programs to determine if the
hostapd interface gets disabled/re-enabled, e.g., due to rfkill
block/unblock.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Save the group common frequencies when starting a GO due to
an invitation signaling requesting to re-invoke a persistent GO.
To do so, move the code that handles the translation of p2p_channels to
frequency list into a public function so it can be re-used both when GO
Negotiation is done and invitation signaling is done.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When a beacon was deleted from the kernel in
wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit_ap(), bss->beacon_set was not cleared so
restarting the AP again was not possible.
Fix this by clearing the variable once the beacon was deleted.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add the following channel flags:
* INDOOR_ONLY: The channel can be used if and only if there is a clear
assessment that the device is operating in an indoor environment, i.e.,
it is AC power.
* CONCURRENT_GO: The channel can be used for instantiating a GO if and
only if there is an additional station interface that is currently
connected to an AP on the same channel or on the same U-NII band
(assuming that the AP is an authorized master).
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Use the 'no_ir' notation instead of the 'passive scan' and
'no_ibss' notations to match the earlier change in nl80211.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
When a P2P timeout occurs and p2p_state_timeout is executed, the
stop_listen function can be called besides setting in_listen to zero in
cases where the driver is still in ROC. That should not really happen in
normal cases, but it is possible for some drivers to extend the ROC
duration. If that happens, the next start_listen request may get
rejected with "P2P: Reject start_listen since p2p_listen_work already
exists".
Signed-off-by: Constantin Musca <constantin.musca@intel.com>
Modify hostapd.c logic to add checks for valid mconf data structure:
- For hostapd_setup_bss we don't need to flush old stations in case
we're rejoining a mesh network.
- In hostapd_setup_interface_complete, we don't need to setup the
interface until we join the mesh (same reasoning for
hostapd_tx_queue_params).
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Modify network mode to support mode number 5 when CONFIG_MESH is
enabled.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
The mesh peering manager establishes and maintains links among
mesh peers, tracking each peer link via a finite state machine.
This implementation supports open mesh peerings.
[assorted fixes from Yu Niiro <yu.niiro@gmail.com>]
[more fixes from Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>]
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Ashok Nagarajan <ashok.dragon@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-hostap: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Add routines to (de)initialize mesh interface data structures and
join and leave mesh networks.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <thomas@noack.us>
For mesh mode to work properly, set supported rates only once.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
This is needed for managing STA entries for mesh use cases.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
sta_info call these to send out the disassoc and deauth frame
which are both not relevent to mesh. So don't send them.
Signed-off-by: Chun-Yeow Yeoh <yeohchunyeow@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
If both HT and VHT was enabled on AP and channel switch event from the
driver indicated that HT was disabled, VHT was left enabled. This
resulted in the following channel configuration failing. Fix this by
disabling VHT if HT gets disabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Advertise static/dynamic SMPS mode support (according to the wiphy
feature bits) and pass the configured smps_mode when starting the AP.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Add smps_modes field, and let the driver fill it with its supported SMPS
modes (static/dynamic). This will let us start an AP with specific SMPS
mode (e.g., dynamic) that will allow it to reduce its power usage.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
The previous TX operation could be on another channel if there are
multiple peers with pending SD queries. To avoid failing to send the
following query, stop the last one to allow any Listen channel to be
used for the following query during p2p_find iteration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 7139cf4a4f ('P2P: Decrement
sd_pending_bcast_queries when sd returns success') added support for
retrying P2P SD queries. However, it did this without limiting how many
retries are allowed. This can result in excessive number of retries if a
peer device does not show up on its Listen channel and there is a
pending SD query to it. Limit the maximum number of SD retries to 100
per p2p_find operation for each peer to avoid unlimited retries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 7139cf4a4f ('P2P: Decrement
sd_pending_bcast_queries when sd returns success') changed P2P SD
behavior in a way that the P2P search loop ended up in continuing with
the first peer entry until it acknowledged receipt of a pending
broadcast SD request while the previous design went through all peers
once. While it is reasonable to retry SD, getting stuck with the first
peer is not really desirable. Change the p2p_continue_find() loop to
continue from the next peer in each iteration to allow progress through
all peers that have pending operations if any other peer is not
acknowledging frames (e.g., due to not being on Listen channel).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit introduces a QCA vendor command and event to provide an
option to use extended versions of the nl80211 connect/roam operations
in a way that allows drivers to offload key management operations to the
driver/firmware.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This avoids an issue where a wpa_supplicant build with CONFIG_P2P=y and
CONFIG_HS20=y ended up processing a P2P SD query twice when operating as
a GO and sending out two replies. Only the P2P SD implementation should
reply to P2P SD query in such a case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This reverts commit 851b0c5581.
The kernel now has full support for this (and it is turned off
by default for hwsim) so wpa_supplicant should really go back
to autodetecting this so clients don't have to figure out what
to do.
Also add a debug message stating that P2P_DEVICE support is used.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This allows the URL to be passed as a single argument to the program
instead of getting split into multiple by os_exec(). This makes the
operation more robust for cases where the URL could have been received
from an external source and could potentially add extra arguments to the
command line.
In addition, fix the /system/bin/input execution by using system() for
it instead of execv() through os_exec(). /system/bin/input is a script
that execv() won't be able to run. Since the full command line is
specified, system() can be used for this. The keycode is also changed
from 3 to KEYCODE_HOME to make this work with current Android version.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows the URL to be passed as a single argument to the program
instead of getting split into multiple by os_exec(). This makes the
operation more robust for cases where the URL could have been received
from an external source and could potentially add extra arguments to the
command line.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows the URL to be passed as a single argument to the program
instead of getting split into multiple by os_exec(). This makes the
operation more robust for cases where the URL could have been received
from an external source and could potentially add extra arguments to the
command line.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new "bss_load_update_period" parameter can be used to configure
hostapd to advertise its BSS Load element in Beacon and Probe Response
frames. This parameter is in the units of BUs (Beacon Units).
When enabled, the STA Count and the Channel Utilization value will be
updated periodically in the BSS Load element. The AAC is set to 0 sinze
explicit admission control is not supported. Channel Utilization is
calculated based on the channel survey information from the driver and
as such, requires a driver that supports providing that information for
the current operating channel.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is now possible to run hwsim_test like data connectivity test through
wpa_supplicant/hostapd control interface if CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y is
used for the build. Test functionality is enabled/disabled at runtime
with "DATA_TEST_CONFIG <1/0>". The "DATA_TEST_TX <dst> <src> <tos>"
command can be used to request a test frame to be transmitted.
"DATA-TEST-RX <dst> <src>" event is generated when the test frame is
received.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Create init_mesh, mesh_join, and mesh_leave actions to kernel.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Convert the driver flags variable to u64 since there was no room for
more flags.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Javier Cardona <javier@cozybit.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Add an implementation of Synthetic Initialization Vector (SIV)
Authenticated Encryption Using the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).
This mode of AES is used to protect peering frames when using
the authenticated mesh peering exchange.
Signed-off-by: Javier Lopez <jlopex@gmail.com>
Signed-off-by: Jason Mobarak <x@jason.mobarak.name>
Signed-off-by: Bob Copeland <me@bobcopeland.com>
Patch 51e9f22809 added the option
p2p_add_cli_chan to allow P2P GC to connect on passive channels
assuming the GO should know whether allowed to send on these channels.
This patch adds missing cli_channels to invitation response messages
to allow re-connecting to a persistent group as GC on passive
channels.
Signed-off-by: Mikael Kanstrup <mikael.kanstrup@sonymobile.com>
This makes wpa_supplicant SME create PMKSA cache entries from SAE
authentication and try to use PMKSA caching if an entry is found for the
AP. If the AP rejects the attempt, fall back to SAE authentication is
used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes hostapd create PMKSA cache entries from SAE authentication
and allow PMKSA caching to be used with the SAE AKM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows multiple sessions using the same PMKSA cache entry to be
combined more easily at the server side. Acct-Session-Id is still a
unique identifier for each association, while Acct-Multi-Session-Id will
maintain its value for all associations that use the same PMKSA.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 8b24861154 ('Add Acct-Session-Id
into Access-Request messages') added Acct-Session-Id building into the
helper function shared between authentication and accounting messages.
However, it forgot to remove the same code from the generation of
accounting messages and as such, ended up with Accounting-Request
messages containing two copies of this attribute. Fix this by removing
the addition of this attribute from the accounting specific function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds definition and names for the RADIUS attributes defined in RFC
5580 (Carrying Location Objects in RADIUS and Diameter).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Increase EAPOL startWhen to 2 for the case where the AP/GO has
advertised it supports WPS 2.0. This is done to make it less likely for
the EAPOL-Start frame to be sent out since that is only required for WPS
1.0. Not sending it can remove one unnecessary round trip from the EAP
exchange when the AP is going to start with EAP-Request/Identity
immediately based on the Association Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the kernel seems to have accepted the message to set linkmode and
operstate without the final attribute getting padded to 32-bit length,
it is better to get this cleaned up to match expected format. The double
NLMSG_ALIGN() followed by RTA_LENGTH() did not make much sense here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The definition of wpa_ctrl_get_remote_ifname is conditional on
CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_UDP. This change makes the header declaration of
this function also conditional on the same define.
Signed-off-by: Toby Gray <toby.gray@realvnc.com>
This change adds a cast to void to indicate that the path parameter is
unused when CONFIG_DEBUG_FILE is not defined. This fixes a compiler
warning about unused parameters.
Signed-off-by: Toby Gray <toby.gray@realvnc.com>
When WFD IE of a P2P device changes, the field is locally updated in P2P
supplicant but upper layer is not informed about this change.
Signed-off-by: Jean Trivelly <jean.trivelly@intel.com>
The new openssl_cipher configuration parameter can be used to select
which TLS cipher suites are enabled for TLS-based EAP methods when
OpenSSL is used as the TLS library. This parameter can be used both as a
global parameter to set the default for all network blocks and as a
network block parameter to override the default for each network
profile.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new openssl_cipher configuration parameter can be used to select
which TLS cipher suites are enabled when hostapd is used as an EAP
server with OpenSSL as the TLS library.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the TLS wrapper code to allow OpenSSL cipherlist string to
be configured. In addition, the default value is now set to
DEFAULT:!EXP:!LOW to ensure cipher suites with low and export encryption
algoriths (40-64 bit keys) do not get enabled in default configuration
regardless of how OpenSSL build was configured.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This use does not really need a strong random number, so fall back to
os_random() if a theoretical error case occurs. (CID 72682)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this specific case does not really care what value is used, the
the theoretical error case can be handled more consistently. (CID 72684)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the code more consistent by checking the somewhat theoretical
error cases more consistently (CID 72685).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The payload lengths were not properly verified and the first check on
there being enough buffer for the header was practically ignored. The
second check for the full payload would catch length issues, but this is
only after the potential read beyond the buffer. (CID 72687)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The dh_p_len, dh_g_len, and dh_ys_len parameters were validated against
the received message structure, but that did not seem to be done in a
way that some static analyzers would understand this (CID 72699).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the MACsec implementation more consistent with rest of
wpa_supplicant. (CID 72677, CID 72695, CID 72701, CID 72709, CID 72711)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e8c08c9a36 ('EAP-FAST server: Fix
potential read-after-buffer (by one byte)') changed the while loop
design in a way that does not require the pos variable to be updated
anymore. Remove that unneeded code to clean up static analyzer warnings
about unused assignments.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The hlen and len variables are identical here, but only the hlen was
used in the end. Change this to use the len variable to avoid
unnecessary static analyzer warnings about unused writes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver_test.c driver wrapper (-Dtest in wpa_supplicant and
driver=test in hostapd) was previously used for testing without real
Wi-Fi hardware. mac80211_hwsim-based tests have practically replaced all
these needs and there has been no improvements or use for driver_test.c
in a long while. Because of this, there has not really been any effort
to maintain this older test tool and no justification to change this
either. Remove the obsoleted test mechanism to clean up the repository.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like the use of sm->wpa == WPA_VERSION_WPA2 in two locations
within the function was a bit too much for clang static analyzer to
understand. Use a separate variable for storing the allocated memory so
that it can be freed unconditionally. The kde variable can point to
either stack memory or temporary allocation, but that is now const
pointer to make the design clearer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
dl_list_del() followed by dl_list_add() seemed to confuse clang static
analyzer somehow, so explicitly check for the prev pointer to be
non-NULL to avoid an incorrect warning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The preceding dl_list_len() check guarantees that dl_list_first()
returns an entry and not NULL. However, that seems to be a bit too
difficult path to follow for static analyzers, so add an explicit check
for the dl_list_first() return value to be non-NULL to avoid warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows drivers that implement AP SME internally to generate a
Deauthentication or Disassociation frame with the specified reason code.
This was already done with drivers that use hostapd/wpa_supplicant for
AP SME.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new ext_eapol_frame_io parameter can be used to configure hostapd
and wpa_supplicant to use control interface for receiving and
transmitting EAPOL frames. This makes it easier to implement automated
test cases for protocol testing. This functionality is included only in
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A P2P Client may be able to connect to the GO even if the WPS
provisioning step has not terminated cleanly (e.g., P2P Client does not
send WSC_Done). Such group formation attempt missed the event
notification about started group on the GO and also did not set the
internal state corresponding to the successful group formation.
This commit addresses the missing part by completing GO side group
formation on a successful first data connection if WPS does not complete
cleanly. Also, this commit reorders the STA authorization indications to
ensure that the group formation success notification is given prior to
the first STA connection to handle such scenarios.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use os_exec() to run the external browser to avoid undesired command
line processing for control interface event strings. Previously, it
could have been possible for some of the event strings to include
unsanitized data which is not suitable for system() use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use os_exec() to run the external browser to avoid undesired command
line processing for control interface event strings. Previously, it
could have been possible for some of the event strings to include
unsanitized data which is not suitable for system() use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use os_exec() to run the external browser to avoid undesired command
line processing for control interface event strings. Previously, it
could have been possible for some of the event strings to include
unsanitized data which is not suitable for system() use.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows cases where neither 80 MHz segment requires DFS to be
configured. DFS CAC operation itself does not yet support 80+80, though,
so if either segment requires DFS, the AP cannot be brought up.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends the "XOR t" operation in aes_wrap() and aes_unwrap() to
handle up to four octets of the n*h+i value instead of just the least
significant octet. This allows the plaintext be longer than 336 octets
which was the previous limit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds kek_len argument to aes_wrap() and aes_unwrap() functions and
allows AES to be initialized with 192 and 256 bit KEK in addition to
the previously supported 128 bit KEK.
The test vectors in test-aes.c are extended to cover all the test
vectors from RFC 3394.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The (int) typecast I used with sk_GENERAL_NAME_num() to complete the
BoringSSL compilation was not really the cleanest way of doing this.
Update that to use stack_index_t variable to avoid this just like the
other sk_*_num() calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
BoringSSL is Google's cleanup of OpenSSL and an attempt to unify
Chromium, Android and internal codebases around a single OpenSSL.
As part of moving Android to BoringSSL, the wpa_supplicant maintainers
in Android requested that I upstream the change. I've worked to reduce
the size of the patch a lot but I'm afraid that it still contains a
number of #ifdefs.
[1] https://www.imperialviolet.org/2014/06/20/boringssl.html
Signed-off-by: Adam Langley <agl@chromium.org>
_pmksa_cache_free_entry() is a static function that is never called with
entry == NULL, so there is no need to check for that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the first entry in the PMKSA cache did not match the station's MAC
address, an infinite loop could be reached in pmksa_cache_get_okc() when
trying to find a PMKSA cache entry for opportunistic key caching cases.
This would only happen if OKC is enabled (okc=1 included in the
configuration file).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, WPA/WPA2 case ended up using the hardcoded
dot11RSNAConfigPMKLifetime (43200 seconds) for PMKSA cache entries
instead of using the Session-Timeout value from the RADIUS server (if
included in Access-Accept). Store a copy of the Session-Timeout value
and use it instead of the default value so that WPA/WPA2 cases get the
proper timeout similarly to non-WPA/WPA2 cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use hostapd_freq_params instead of simple frequency parameter for driver
commands. This is preparation for IBSS configuration to allow use of
HT/VHT in IBSS.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Commit 4fdc8def88 changed the wpa_ctrl
socket to be be non-blocking, so the comment about wpa_ctrl_recv()
blocking is not valid anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 97279d8d (after hostap-2.0) dropped frame events from foreign
addresses. Unfortunately this commit did not handle the case where the
interface's MAC address might be changed externally, which other
wpa_supplicant code already handled. This causes the driver to reject
any MLME event because the address from the event doesn't match the
stale address in the driver data.
Changing an interface's MAC address requires that the interface be
down, the change made, and then the interface brought back up. This
triggers an RTM_NEWLINK event which driver_nl80211.c can use to
re-read the MAC address of the interface.
Signed-hostap: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
Relying on qos qosinfo is not enough, as it can be 0 for WMM enabled
peers that don't support U-APSD. Further, some peers don't even contain
this IE (Google Nexus 5), but do contain the WMM IE during setup.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
A recent mac80211 patch ("8f02e6b mac80211: make sure TDLS peer STA
exists during setup") forces the TDLS STA to exist before sending any
mgmt packets. Add the STA before sending a concurrent-setup test packet.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Some drivers need to know the initiator of a TDLS connection in order
to generate a correct TDLS mgmt packet. It is used to determine
the link identifier IE. Pass this information to the driver.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Commit 97ed9a06df ('nl80211: Remove bridge
FDB entry upon sta_remove()') used nl_sock and nl_socket_* functions
which are not compatible with older versions of libnl. Fix this.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
IEEE 802.11 standard sends AID in a field that is defined in a bit
strange way to set two MSBs to ones. That is not the real AID and those
extra bits need to be filtered from the value before passing this to the
driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
random_mac_addr_keep_oui() is similar to random_mac_addr(), but it
maintains the OUI part of the source address.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The FDB entry removal ensures that the traffic destined for a
disassociated station's MAC address is no longer forwarded from the
bridge to the BSS.
Signed-off-by: Kyeyoon Park <kyeyoonp@qca.qualcomm.com>
Support 60 GHz band in P2P module by selecting random social channel
from all supported social channels in 2.4 GHz and 60 GHz bands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In case P2P is not enabled the if (dev_addr) is always ignored as
dev_addr will be NULL. As this code is relevant only to P2P, it can be
moved to be the ifdef to avoid static analyzer warnings. (CID 72907)
Signed-off-by: Philippe De Swert <philippe.deswert@jollamobile.com>
'\e' representing ESC (0x1b) is not C standard, it's an GNU extension.
https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Character-Escapes.html#Character-Escapes
Since the code also compiles on Windows with Microsoft compiler, we
should use '\033' instead.
Note: I didn't try to build the whole wpa_supplicant on Windows, so I
don't know if it still builds (I have no Visual Studio 2005 for a quick
test). I just needed the string conversion routines for the P"" syntax
in both directions.
Signed-off-by: Bernhard Walle <bernhard@bwalle.de>
The sd_pending_bcast_queries variable should be decremented only
in case of success. This way, the supplicant can retry if a service
discovery request fails.
Signed-off-by: Constantin Musca <constantin.musca@intel.com>
It was possible for the p2p_go_neg_start timeout handler to get called
when there was a pending timeout from an earlier GO Negotiation start.
This could result in that old timeout expiring too early for the newly
started GO Negotiation to complete. Avoid such issues by setting a
sufficiently long timeout here just before triggering the new GO
Negotiation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, it was possible for the p2p->pending_listen_freq to be left
at non-zero value if Probe Request frame was received from a peer with
which we were waiting to start GO Negotiation/Invite process. That could
result in the following Listen operation getting blocked in some
operation sequences if the peer did not acknowledge the following P2P
Public Action frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, extra connect/roam events were ignored when user space SME
was used to avoid confusing double events for association. However,
there was no matching code for ignoring auth/assoc events when using
driver SME. Such events would not normally show up since the driver SME
case would not generated them. However, when testing forced connect
command with force_connect_cmd=1 driver param, these events are
indicated.
Ignore the extra events in testing cases to make the hwsim test cases
match more closely the real code path for driver SME. In addition, this
resolves some test case failures where double association event could
end up causing a failure, e.g., when doing PMKSA caching in
pmksa_cache_oppurtunistic_connect.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes couple of code paths where the WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_DFS_OFFLOAD
flag was not checked properly and unexpected DFS operations were
initiated (and failed) in case the driver handles all these steps.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In theory, this call could fail, so check the return value before using
the received data. These specific cases would not really care much about
the failures, but this keeps the code more consistent and keeps static
analyzer warnings more useful. (CID 72678, CID 72679, CID 72680,
CID 72683, CID 72689, CID 72698, CID 72703)
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver-based SME case did not set STA flags properly to the kernel
in the way that hostapd-SME did in ieee802_11.c. This resulted in the FT
protocol case not marking the STA entry authorized. Fix that by handling
the special WLAN_AUTH_FT case in hostapd_notif_assoc() and also add the
forgotten hostapd_set_sta_flags() call to synchronize these flag to the
driver.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows updating roaming policy for drivers that select the BSS
internally so that wpa_supplicant (based on bssid parameter
configuration) and the driver remain in sync.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The network block bssid parameter can be used to force a specific BSS to
be used for a connection. It is also possible to modify this parameter
during an association. Previously, that did not result in any
notification to the driver which was somewhat problematic with drivers
that take care of BSS selection. Add a new mechanism to allow
wpa_supplicant to provide a driver update if the bssid parameter change
for the current connection modifies roaming policy (roaming
allowed/disallowed within ESS).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a TX status event and RX event for a GO Negotiation frame gets
delayed long enough to miss the initial wait, it was possible for
reception of a GO Negotiation Response frame with status 1 to try to
initiate a new p2p-listen work item to wait for the peer to become ready
while a previous p2p-listen was already in progress due to that earlier
timeout while waiting for peer. This would result in the new
start_listen request getting rejected ("P2P: Reject start_listen since
p2p_listen_work already exists") and the negotiation not proceeding.
Work around this by using P2P_WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state instead of
P2P_WAIT_PEER_IDLE if P2P_CONNECT_LISTEN state has already been entered
when processing this special GO Negotiation Response status=1 case. This
can avoid double-scheduling of p2p-listen and as such, completion of the
GO negotiation even if the driver event or peer response are not
received in time (the response is supposed to be there within 100 ms per
spec, but there are number of deployed devices that do not really meet
this requirement).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the shorter startWhen value was used based on build
parameters (i.e., if WPS was enabled). This is not really ideal and the
knowledge of WPS use can be provided to the EAPOL state machine to allow
this (and similar WPS workarounds) to be done only when the association
is for the purpose of WPS.
Reduce the default startWhen value from 3 to 2 seconds for non-WPS case
since WPS builds have likely received most testing for the past years
with the 1 second value and there is no strong justification for forcing
the longer 3 second wait should a frame be lost or something else
require the EAPOL-Start to initiate operation after a connection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The internal entropy pool was previously used to prevent 4-way handshake
in AP mode from completing before sufficient entropy was available to
allow secure keys to be generated. This commit extends that workaround
for boards that do not provide secure OS level PRNG (e.g., /dev/urandom
does not get enough entropy) for the most critical WPS operations by
rejecting AP-as-enrollee case (use of AP PIN to learn/modify AP
configuration) and new PSK/passphrase generation. This does not have any
effect on devices that have an appropriately working OS level PRNG
(e.g., /dev/random and /dev/urandom on Linux).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Even when hs20 action frame is unable to be registered,
for whatever reason, it should be possible to register
event handle for received driver messages. This patch also
avoids a segmentation fault, when p2p and hs20 were enabled
and GO NEG was unable to create p2p iface, the destroy eloop
was crashing by reading an invalid handle.
Signed-off-by: Eduardo Abinader <eduardo.abinader@openbossa.org>
In theory, this function could fail, so check the return value before
printing out the RADIUS local address debug message (CID 72700).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Due to a missing curly brackets, the OCSP status checking was not
working in the expected way. Instead of allowing optional-OCSP
configuration to accept connection when OCSP response was ready, all
such cases were marked as hard failures. In addition, the debug prints
were not necessarily accurate for the mandatory-OCSP-but-no-response
case (CID 72694, CID 72704).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using implicit limit based on 16-bit unsigned integer having
a maximum value of 65535, limit the maximum length of a CID explicitly
to 1500 bytes. This will hopefully help in reducing false warnings from
static analyzers (CID 72712).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
TDLS Setup Request frame has to be rejected with status code 37 ("The
request has been declined"), if the BSSID in the received Link
Identifier does not match the current BSSID per IEEE Std 802.11-2012,
10.22.4 ('TDLS direct-link establishment') step (b). The previously used
status code 7 ('Not in same BSS') is described to used only when
processing TPK Handshake Message 2 in TDLS Setup Response frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When a netdev is removed from a bridge, RTM_DELLINK message is received
with ifname (IFLA_IFNAME) pointing to the main netdev event though that
netdev is not deleted. This was causing issues with P2P GO interface
getting disabled when the netdev was removed from a bridge. Fix this by
filtering RTM_DELLINK events that are related to the bridge when
indicating interface status changes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While hostapd should not really receive the EVENT_ASSOC message for
IBSS, driver_nl80211.c could potentially generate that if something
external forces the interface into IBSS mode and the IBSS case does not
provide the struct assoc_info data. Avoid the potential NULL pointer
dereference by explicitly verifying for the event data to be present.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Disable Probe Request reporting for statically created AP interfaces
during de-initialization. We will enable it again while starting AP
operations.
Signed-off-by: Avinash Patil <avinashapatil@gmail.com>
Some devices have limitations which do not allow changing virtual
interface mode from AP to station or vice versa. To work around this,
check if such AP interface is not dynamic. If such an interface is
enumarated, just set ifmode to AP and avoid setting nlmode to default
station mode on deinit.
Signed-off-by: Avinash Patil <avinashapatil@gmail.com>
This adds hostapd support for the new WLAN-Pairwise-Cipher,
WLAN-Group-Cipher, WLAN-AKM-Suite, and WLAN-Group-Mgmt-Pairwise-Cipher
attributes defined in RFC 7268. These attributes are added to RADIUS
messages when the station negotiates use of WPA/RSN.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds hostapd support for the new WLAN-HESSID attribute defined in
RFC 7268. This attribute contains the HESSID and it is added whenever
Interworking is enabled and HESSID is configured.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds hostapd support for the new Mobility-Domain-Id attribute
defined in RFC 7268. This attribute contains the mobility domain id and
it is added whenever the station negotiates use of FT.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The special PAC_OPAQUE_TYPE_PAD case did not skip incrementing of the
pos pointer and could result in one octet read-after-buffer when parsing
the PAC-Opaque data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This forces EAP peer implementation to drop any possible fast resumption
data if the network block for the current connection is not the same as
the one used for the previous one. This allows different network blocks
to be used with non-matching parameters to enforce different rules even
if the same authentication server is used. For example, this allows
different CA trust rules to be enforced with different ca_cert
parameters which can prevent EAP-TTLS Phase 2 from being used based on
TLS session resumption.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is similar to wpa_msg_global() in the same way as wpa_msg_ctrl() is
to wpa_msg(). In other words, wpa_msg_global_ctrl() is used to send
global control interface events without printing them into the debug
log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any configuration parameter and
dynamic data that contains private information like keys or identity.
This brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length
of time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the EAP-pwd server and peer implementations more robust
should OpenSSL fail to derive random number for some reason. While this
is unlikely to happen in practice, the implementation better be prepared
for this should something unexpected ever happen. See
http://jbp.io/2014/01/16/openssl-rand-api/#review-of-randbytes-callers
for more details.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This changes OpenSSL calls to explicitly clear the EC_POINT memory
allocations when freeing them. This adds an extra layer of security by
avoiding leaving potentially private keys into local memory after they
are not needed anymore. While some of these variables are not really
private (e.g., they are sent in clear anyway), the extra cost of
clearing them is not significant and it is simpler to just clear these
explicitly rather than review each possible code path to confirm where
this does not help.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This changes OpenSSL calls to explicitly clear the bignum memory
allocations when freeing them. This adds an extra layer of security by
avoiding leaving potentially private keys into local memory after they
are not needed anymore. While some of these variables are not really
private (e.g., they are sent in clear anyway), the extra cost of
clearing them is not significant and it is simpler to just clear these
explicitly rather than review each possible code path to confirm where
this does not help.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
FreeRADIUS releases before 1.1.4 did not send MS-CHAP2-Success in
EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2. A wpa_supplicant workaround for that was added in
2005 and it has been enabled by default to avoid interoperability
issues. This could be disabled with all other EAP workarounds
(eap_workaround=0). However, that will disable some workarounds that are
still needed with number of authentication servers.
Old FreeRADIUS versions should not be in use anymore, so it makes sense
to remove this EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 workaround completely to get more
complete validation of server behavior. This allows MSCHAPv2 to verify
that the server knows the password instead of relying only on the TLS
certificate validation.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
When driver interface is destroyed (via wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit) the
"preq" nl socket isn't always deleted but the callback struct associated
is. After the interface is destroyed we may still get event on the
socket but as the callback has been freed this will cause wpa_supplicant
to crash.
This patch ensures that the "preq" socket is destroyed when destroying
the interface.
Signed-off-by: Cedric IZOARD <cedricx.izoard@intel.com>
This allows external programs to use vendor specific information from
P2P peers without wpa_supplicant having to be able to parse and
understand all such vendor specific elements.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds following new control interface commands to allow arbitrary
vendor elements to be added into number of frames:
VENDOR_ELEM_ADD <frame id> <hexdump of elem(s)>
VENDOR_ELEM_GET <frame id>
VENDOR_ELEM_REMOVE <frame id> <hexdump of elem(s)>
VENDOR_ELEM_REMOVE <frame id> *
The following frames are supported in this commit (additional frames can
be added in the future):
0 = Probe Request frame in P2P device discovery
1 = Probe Response frame from P2P Device role
2 = Probe Response frame from P2P GO
3 = Beacon frame from P2P GO
4 = PD Req
5 = PD Resp
6 = GO Neg Req
7 = GO Neg Resp
8 = GO Neg Conf
9 = Invitation Request
10 = Invitation Response
11 = P2P Association Request
12 = P2P Association Response
One or more vendor element can be added/removed with the commands. The
hexdump of the element(s) needs to contain the full element (id, len,
payload) and the buffer needs to pass IE parsing requirements to be
accepted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
set_dfs_state() return value is not currently checked anywhere, so
remove the dead assignment to avoid static analyzer complaints.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any configuration parameter and
dynamic data that contains private information like keys or identity.
This brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length
of time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any hostapd configuration parameter
that contains private information like keys or identity. This brings in
an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of time this
type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any hs20-osu-client configuration
parameter that contains private information like keys or identity. This
brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of
time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reduce the amount of time keying material (MSK, EMSK, temporary private
data) remains in memory in EAP methods. This provides additional
protection should there be any issues that could expose process memory
to external observers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reduce the amount of time keying material (MSK, EMSK, temporary private
data) remains in memory in EAP methods. This provides additional
protection should there be any issues that could expose process memory
to external observers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any wpa_supplicant configuration
parameter that contains private information like keys or identity. This
brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of
time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The pos pointer is not used after this now nor in future plans, so no
need to increment the value. This remove a static analyzer warning about
dead increment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using the pre-calculated length of the buffer, determine the
length of used data based on the pos pointer. This avoids a static
analyzer warning about dead increment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function is meant for comparing passwords or hash values where
difference in execution time could provide external observer information
about the location of the difference in the memory buffers. The return
value does not behave like os_memcmp(), i.e., os_memcmp_const() cannot
be used to sort items into a defined order. Unlike os_memcmp(),
execution time of os_memcmp_const() does not depend on the contents of
the compared memory buffers, but only on the total compared length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using implicit limit based on 16-bit unsigned integer having
a maximum value of 65535, limit the maximum length of a fragmented
EAP-pwd message explicitly to 15000 bytes. None of the supported groups
use longer messages, so it is fine to reject any longer message without
even trying to reassemble it. This will hopefully also help in reducing
false warnings from static analyzers (CID 68124).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier for static analyzers to figure out which code paths
are possible within eap_sim_msg_finish() for EAP-SIM. This will
hopefully avoid some false warnings (CID 68110, CID 68113, CID 68114).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the earlier commit e6270129f6
('Clean up EAPOL-Key Key Data processing') design to be used with
PeerKey EAPOL-key processing as well. This avoids false warnings from
static analyzer (CID 62860, CID 62861, CID 62862).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This will be useful in wpa_supplicant part to signal if a peer got its
group changed.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
GroupMember is unusable in itself and all the necessary informations are
stored in Peer objects, thus replace the use of GroupMember by Peer.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
This will be useful in wpa_supplicant to match group's SSIDs against a
specific one.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
This will be useful for finding the interface related to this group
after formation based on the group SSID.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
Use a helper function to avoid multiple copies of the same long list of
argument parameters to wpa_sm_tdls_peer_addset() from the peer entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Update the peer STA with full info sending TDLS Setup Response/Confirm
frames instead of after the full setup exchange. This makes it easier
for some drivers to properly negotiate QoS and HT information on the
direct link.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
There is no need to keep the peer entry in memory after the link has
been removed.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Tested-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
It's worth giving a try to fallback to re-starting BSSes at least once
hoping it works out instead of just leaving BSSes disabled.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Currently hostapd data structures aren't ready for multi-channel BSSes,
so make DFS work now at least with single-channel multi-BSS channel
switching.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Fix a bug where changing the mode of the interface to IBSS
fails because the interface is sitting on a channel where IBSS is
disallowed because of a previous association.
Signed-off-by: Christopher Wiley <wiley@chromium.org>
In preparation for another wrinkle around switching into IBSS mode,
refactor existing mode switch logic for simplicity at the expense
of some brevity.
Signed-off-by: Christopher Wiley <wiley@chromium.org>
Previously, eight character random passphrase was generated
automatically for P2P GO. The new p2p_passphrase_len parameter can be
used to increase this length to generate a stronger passphrase for cases
where practicality of manual configuration of legacy devices is not a
concern.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Hitting maximum number of AT_KDF attributes could result in an infinite
loop due to the attribute parser not incrementing the current position
properly when skipping the extra KDF.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a local variable and size_t in length comparison to make this easier
for static analyzers to understand. In addition, set the return list and
list_len values at the end of the function, i.e., only in success case.
These do not change the actual behavior of the only caller for this
function, but clarifies what the helper function is doing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use size_t instead of int for storing and comparing the TLV length
against the remaining buffer length to make this easier for static
analyzers to understand.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was added by commit 8a45811638
('hostapd: Add Operating Mode Notification support'), but the validation
steps cannot be true either for the channel width (which is a two-bit
subfield that cannot encode more than the list four values) or Rx NSS
(which cannot encode a value larger 7). Furthermore, the VHT_CHANWIDTH_*
defines do not match the definition of the Channel Width subfield
values.
Since this check cannot ever match, it is better to remove it to make
the code easier to understand and to avoid getting complaints about dead
code from static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some APs (Cisco) may tack on a weird IE to the end of a TDLS Discovery
Request packet. This needn't fail the response, since the required IEs
are verified separately.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Some APs (Cisco) may tack on a weird IE to the end of the TDLS confirm
packet, which can fail negotiation. As an interoperability workaround,
ignore IE parser failures and reject the frame only if any of the
mandatory IEs are not included.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Commit 342bce63cd introduced a possibility
of a NULL pointer dereference on the error path if a new peer entry
fails to get added (i.e., memory allocation failure). Fix that by
skipping the wpa_tdls_peer_free() call if necessary.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit b36935be1a ('nl80211: Fix EAPOL
frames not being delivered') and commit
147848ec4d ('nl80211: Do not add all
virtual interfaces to drv->if_indices') were not fully in sync and it
was possible for some non-hostapd use cases to end up adding undesired
ifindexes into the list of interfaces from which events and EAPOL frames
are processed on the parent interface. This could result, e.g., in P2P
Device management interface on getting unexpected events, including
RTM_NEWLINK event that could end up getting interpreted as an
indication of the interface being down and unavailable.
Make both add_ifidx() calls use the same criteria for adding interfaces
to the local list. This is not really a complete solution, but it is
good enough for now to fix the most visible side effects of this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The driver might not be able to add the TDLS STA. Fail if this happens.
Also fix the error path to always reset the TDLS peer data.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
If a link is unreachable, the specification mandates we should send a
teardown packet via the AP with a specific teardown reason. Force this
by first disabling the link and only then sending the teardown packet
for the LOW_ACK event.
Rename the TDLS LOW_ACK event handler to better reflect its purpose.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Earlier commit related to MAC address based access control list
offloaded to the driver was not sending ACL configuration to the driver
if the MAC address list was empty. Remove this check as empty access
control list is a valid use case and sending ACL parameters should not
be dependent on whether the list is empty.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Performing a P2P Device flow such as p2p_listen or
p2p_find, can degrade the performance of an active interface
connection, if the listen frequency is different than the
frequency used by that interface.
To reduce the effect of P2P Device flows on other interfaces,
try changing the listen channel of the P2P Device to match the
operating channel of one of the other active interfaces. This change
will be possible only in case that the listen channel is not forced
externally, and will be delayed to a point where the P2P Device
state machine is idle.
The optimization can be configured in the configuration file and
is disabled by default.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In p2p_get_pref_freq, if the channels argument is NULL, select a
preferred channel that is also one of the P2P Device configured
channels.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Use a single location in wpa_sm_rx_eapol() for preparing the pointer to
the Key Data field and to its validated length instead of fetching that
information in number of processing functions separately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Re-order wpa_sm_rx_eapol() to first go through all EAPOL (802.1X) header
validation steps using the original message buffer and re-allocate and
copy the frame only if this is a valid EAPOL frame that contains an
EAPOL-Key. This makes the implementation easier to understand and saves
unnecessary memory allocations and copying should other types of EAPOL
frames get here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These error messages had an incorrect frame name (likely copy-pasted
from the commit message handler) and couple of typos.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this call cannot really fail, check the return value to be more
consistent with all the other wps_build_wfa_ext() calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While the hash functions would be very unlikely to fail in practice,
they do have option of returning an error. Check that return value more
consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The additional eight octet field was removed from keydatalen without
proper validation of the Key Data Length field. It would have been
possible for an invalid EAPOL-Key frame to be processed in a way that
ends up reading beyond the buffer. In theory, this could have also
resulted in writing beyond the EAPOL-Key frame buffer, but that is
unlikely to be feasible due to the AES key wrap validation step on
arbitrary memory contents.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since there is a limit on the EAP exchange due to maximum number of
roundtrips, there is no point in allowing excessively large buffers to
be allocated based on what the peer device claims the total message to
be. Instead, reject the message if it would not be possible to receive
it in full anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Action code field is in a fixed location, so the IEEE80211_HDRLEN
can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid false reports from
static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There seemed to be an off-by-one error in the validation of GAS request
frames. If a Public Action frame without the Action code field would
have reached this function, the length could have been passed as
(size_t) -1 which would likely have resulted in a crash due to reading
beyond the buffer. However, it looks like such frame would not be
delivered to hostapd at least with mac80211-based drivers. Anyway, this
function better be more careful with length validation should some other
driver end up reporting invalid Action frames.
In addition, the Action code field is in a fixed location, so the
IEEE80211_HDRLEN can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid
false reports from static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Action code field is in a fixed location, so the IEEE80211_HDRLEN
can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid false reports from
static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation here was doing what it was supposed to, but the code
was indented in a way that made it quite confusing in the context of a
single line if statement body.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In tncc_read_config(), the memory allocted for the config
did not get freed if an error occured.
Signed-off-by: Philippe De Swert <philippe.deswert@jollamobile.com>
The driver may reject offchannel TX operation if the requested wait time
is longer than what the driver indicates as the maximum
remain-on-channel time. Two of the P2P action frame cases used long
enough wait times (1000 ms for DevDisc and 5000 ms for SD) that could go
beyond the limit with some drivers. Fix these to limit the maximum wait
to what the driver indicates as supported.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the set of supported cipher suites to include CCMP-256, GCMP,
GCMP-256, CMAC-256, GMAC, and GMAC-256 when ATH_GCM_SUPPORT=y is set in
the build configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It does not look like there is going to be any additional use for this
old build option that could be used to build the EAP-IKEv2 peer
implementation in a way that interoperates with the eap-ikev2.ccns.pl
project. Remove the workarounds that matches incorrect implementation in
that project to clean up implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While it does not look like that eapol_sm_get_key() would ever be called
with sm == NULL, the current implementation is inconsistent on whether
that is allowed or not. Check sm != NULL consistently to avoid warnings
from static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The following kde.rsn_ie_len != peer->rsnie_i_len was already taking
care of enforcing the length to be within the target buffer length.
Anyway, this explicit check makes this clearer and matches the design in
TPK M1 processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In theory, gmtime() could return NULL if the year value would not fit
into an integer. However, that cannot really happen with the current
time() value in practice. Anyway, clean up static analyzer reports by
checking for this corner case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Must check that UDN was present before trying to parse it. Avoid a NULL
pointer dereference by checking the result before using os_strstr() when
parsing device description from an AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
prev cannot be NULL here in the hostapd_eid_country_add() call since
prev is set whenever start becomes non-NULL. That seems to be a bit too
difficult for some static analyzers, so check the prev pointer
explicitly to avoid false warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes an issue where a driver using the deprecated set_ieee8021x()
callback did not include rsn_pairwise bits in the driver configuration
even if mixed WPA+WPA2 configuration was used. This could result, e.g.,
in CCMP not being enabled properly when wpa_pairwise=TKIP and
rsn_pairwise=CCMP was used in the configuration. Fix this by using
bitwise OR of the wpa_pairwise and rsn_pairwise values to allow the
driver to enable all pairwise ciphers.
In addition, make the newer set_ap() driver_ops use the same bitwise OR
design instead of picking between rsn_pairwise and wpa_pairwise. This
makes the code paths consistent and can also fix issues with mixed mode
configuration with set_ap().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the peer provides a username with large part of it being non-ASCII
characters, the previously used buffers may not have been long enough to
include the full string in debug logs and database search due to forced
truncation of the string by printf_encode(). Avoid this by increasing
the buffer sizes to fit in the maximum result.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The off-by-one error in printf_encode() bounds checking could have
allowed buffer overflow with 0x00 being written to the memory position
following the last octet of the target buffer. Since this output is used
as \0-terminated string, the following operation would likely read past
the buffer as well. Either of these operations can result in the process
dying either due to buffer overflow protection or by a read from
unallowed address.
This has been seen to cause wpa_supplicant crash on OpenBSD when control
interface client attaches (debug print shows the client socket address).
Similarly, it may be possible to trigger the issue in RADIUS/EAP server
implementation within hostapd with a suitable constructed user name.
Signed-off-by: Stuart Henderson <sthen@openbsd.org>
If PMF was enabled, the validation step for EAPOL-Key descriptor version
ended up rejecting the message if GCMP had been negotiated as the
pairwise cipher. Fix this by making the GCMP check skipped similarly to
the CCMP case if a SHA256-based AKM is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move to PTKINITDONE state and mark PTK valid after successful completion
of FT protocol. This allows the AP/Authenticator to start GTK rekeying
when FT protocol is used. Previously, the station using FT protocol did
not get the new GTK which would break delivery of group addressed
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
I got the below prints on a particular Android platform:
I/wpa_supplicant( 2637): nl80211: send_and_recv->nl_recvmsgs failed: 20
I/wpa_supplicant( 2637): nl80211: send_and_recv->nl_recvmsgs failed: 20
In JellyBean libnl_2 code, I see that the nl_recvmsgs returns postive values
too. In some cases, nl_recvmgs return the output of nl_recv function. nl_recv
function can return Number of bytes read, 0 or a negative error code.
Looks like this positive return value for nl_recvmsgs may be specific to
Android. While this is not how the API is supposed to work, this does no
harm with upstream libnl which returns only 0 or -1 from the function.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The dev_found() callback from NFC connection handover message processing
ended up using the p2p_dev_addr pointer that points to the parsed
message. However, that parsed data was freed just before the call. Fix
this by reordering the calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the randomly generated bignum does not meet the validation steps, the
iteration loop in sae_get_rand() did not free the data properly. Fix the
memory leak by freeing the temporary bignum before starting the next
attempt at generating the value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Couple of code paths in hostapd.c could have left hapd->drv_priv
pointing to memory that was freed in driver_nl80211.c when a secondary
BSS interface is removed. This could result in use of freed memory and
segfault when the next driver operation (likely during interface
deinit/removal). Fix this by clearing hapd->drv_priv when there is
reason to believe that the old value is not valid within the driver
wrapper anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These three calls were used already in three different paths. Use a
helper function to avoid adding even more copies of this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If for some reason interface setup fails mid-way when setting up
multi-BSS AP it was possible to get segmentation fault because driver
was not properly cleaned up.
One possible trigger, when using nl80211 driver, was udev renaming an
interface created by hostapd causing, e.g., linux_set_iface_flags() to
fail.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This variable is updated when calling hostapd_if_add(), so it makes
sense to do the same thing when calling hostapd_if_remove().
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Performing, e.g. `wpa_cli -p /var/run/hostapd raw DISABLE` twice led to
hostapd segmentation fault if multiple BSSes were configured. Fix this
by checking if there is anything to disable at all before trying.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Make sure to not remove interfaces that were not created by
hostapd/wpa_supplicant. This was already done on number of the error
paths, but not all.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
It is possible for the connect() call to fail (e.g., due to unreachable
network based on local routing table), so the current auth/acct_sock may
be left to -1. Use that as an addition trigger to allow server failover
operation to be performed more quickly if it is known that the
retransmission attempt will not succeed anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The re-open socket to the current RADIUS server code path did not work
in the expected way here. The pending authentication messages do not
need to be flushed in that case and neither should the retransmission
parameters be cleared. Fix this by performing these operations only if
the server did actually change as a part of a failover operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current RADIUS server pointer was updated after each SET command
which broke parsing of multiple RADIUS servers over the control
interface. Fix this by doing the final RADIUS server pointer updates
only once the full configuration is available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Both IPv4 and IPv6 sockets were not closed consistently in the paths
that tried to change RADIUS servers. This could result in leaking
sockets and leaving behind registered eloop events to freed memory on
interface removal.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While iterating through RADIUS messages in radius_client_timer(), one
message entry may get flushed by "radius_client_retransmit -->
radius_client_handle_send_error --> radius_client_init_auth -->
radius_change_server --> radius_client_flush". This could result in
freed memory being accessed afterwards.
Signed-off-by: Jerry Yang <xyang@sonicwall.com>
This is one more possible send() error that should trigger RADIUS server
change if multiple servers are configured.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the RADIUS authentication/accounting socket to not be
open even if partial RADIUS server configuration has been done through
the control interface SET commands. Previously, this resulted in send()
attempt using fd=-1 which fails with bad file descriptor. Clean this up
by logging this as a missing configuration instead of trying to send the
message when that is known to fail.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes invitation process more consistent with GO Negotiation as far
as the debug log entries are concerned and the resulting log is more
helpful for understanding channel selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of using X509_print_fp() to print directly to stdout, print the
certificate dump to a memory BIO and use wpa_printf() to get this into
the debug log. This allows redirection of debug log to work better and
avoids undesired stdout prints when debugging is not enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This configuration parameter was not used at all in the RADIUS server
implementation and instead, hard coded 0 was sent.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 04eff7d5ba or something around that
timeframe may have caused a regression on how drv->if_indices gets used
with wpa_supplicant. Most (curretly likely all) wpa_supplicant virtual
interface use cases should not actually use this. This could result in
issues with P2P group interfaces delivering events to incorrect
interface (parent rather than the group interface). The previous commit
removed some of the issues, but more complete fix is to undo some of
those merged hostapd/wpa_supplicant operations.
Filter add_ifidx() uses based on hostapd vs. wpa_supplicant and iftype
to get closer to the earlier wpa_supplicant behavior for the driver
events from virtual interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for a virtual interface to be added and removed by
different parent interfaces. This can happen, e.g., with P2P group
interfaces if the P2P parent interface does not happen to be the first
entry in the wpa_supplicant global interface list. That first entry is
used to remove the group interface while the addition would have
happened with the dedicated P2P management interface.
This can result in the interface that added a new virtual interface
getting stuck with an obsolete ifindex value in the drv->if_indeces list
and as such, deliver some extra events to incorrect destination wpa_s
instance. In particular, this can result in INTERFACE_DISABLED event
from deletion of a P2P group interface getting delivered incorrectly to
the parent wpa_s instance which would disable that interface even though
the interface remains in enabled state.
Fix this by clearing the removed interface from all if_indeces lists
instead of just the one that was used to delete the interface. This is
the simplest approach since the ifindex is unique and there is no need
to track which interface added the new virtual interface to always hit
the same one when removing the interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add regulatory classes for the 60GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-off-by: Boris Sorochkin <qca_bsoroc@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of silently dropping the response that requires fragmentation,
send an error response to the station to make it aware that no full
response will be available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If p2p_listen is called while previous listen command's
remain_on_channel event is pending, the p2p_listen would fail
and it used to clear pending_listen_freq. Now when the remain-
on-channel event comes from the driver, the pending_listen_freq
doesn't match and gets ignored. This was leading to a case
where listen state was getting stuck (in case of WAIT_PEER_CONNECT
state).
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Previously, the NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES was skipped if either of these
SHA256-based AKMs was negotiated.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
This is similar to the existing functionality that parsed ASN.1-encoded
RSA public key by generating a similar public key instance from already
parsed n and e parameters.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Follow the PKCS #1 v1.5, 8.1 constraint of at least eight octets long PS
for the case where the internal TLS implementation decrypts PKCS #1
formatted data. Similar limit was already in place for signature
validation, but not for this decryption routine.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Based on PKCS #1, v1.5, 10.1.3, the block type shall be 01 for a
signature. This avoids a potential attack vector for internal TLS/X.509
implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Verify that there is no extra data after the hash field. This is needed
to avoid potential attacks using additional data to construct a value
that passes the RSA operation and allows the hash value to be forged.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, hostapd had to be started with at least one of the
configuration files enabling TNC for TNC to be usable. Change this to
allow TNC to be enabled when the first interface with TNC enabled gets
added during runtime.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is for enabling easier testing of TNCS/TNCC functionality as part
of the test scripts without having to use the fixed /etc/tnc_config
location that could be used by the main system and would require changes
within /etc.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This patch adds epoll option for the eloop implementation. This can be
selected with the CONFIG_ELOOP_EPOLL=y build option.
[merit]
See Table1.
Table1. comparison table
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| | add fd | remove fd | prepare fd | dispatch fd |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| select | O(1) | O(1) | O(N) | O(N) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| poll | O(1) | O(1) | O(N) | O(N) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| epoll | O(1) | O(1) | 0 | O(M) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
"add fd" is addition of fd by eloop_sock_table_add_sock().
"remove fd" is removal of fd by eloop_sock_table_remove_sock().
"prepare fd" is preparation of fds before wait in eloop_run().
"dispatch fd" is dispatchment of fds by eloop_sock_table_dispatch().
"N" is all watching fds.
"M" is fds which could be dispatched after waiting.
As shown in Table1, epoll option has better performance on "prepare fd" column.
Because select/poll option requires setting fds before every select()/poll().
But epoll_wait() doesn't need it.
And epoll option has also better performance on "dispatch fd" column.
Because select/poll option needs to check all registered fds to find out
dispatchable fds. But epoll option doesn't require checking all registered fds.
Because epoll_wait() returns dispatchable fd set.
So epoll option is effective for GO/AP functionality.
[demerit]
The epoll option requires additional heap memory. In case of P2P GO, it is
about 8K bytes.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
p2p_get_pref_freq() went through the full list only if the channels
arguments was provided. If no channel list contraint was in place, the
first pref_chan item was picked regardless of whether it is valid
channel and as such, a later valid entry could have been ignored. Allow
this to loop through all the entries until a valid channel is found or
the end of the pref_chan list is reached. As an extra bonus, this
simplifies the p2p_get_pref_freq() implementation quite a bit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Before starting a 20/40 MHz BSS on the 2.4 GHz band, a 40-MHz-capable HT
AP is required by the rules defined in IEEE Std 802.11-2012 10.15.5 to
examine the channels of the current operational regulatory domain to
determine whether the operation of a 20/40 MHz BSS might unfairly
interfere with the operation of existing 20 MHz BSSs. The AP (or some of
its associated HT STAs) is required to scan all of the channels of the
current regulatory domain in order to ascertain the operating channels
of any existing 20 MHz BSSs and 20/40 MHz BSSs. (IEEE 802.11-2012 S.5.2
Establishing a 20/40 MHz BSS).
Add the check for an overlapping 20 MHz BSS to the initial AP scan for
the P == OT_i case in 10.15.3.2.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qti.qualcomm.com>
scard_gsm_auth() used SIM_CMD_GET_RESPONSE for both SIM and USIM. Convert
the command into USIM_CMD_GET_RESPONSE for USIM.
Since commit eb32460029 ("Fix switching from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA/AKA'")
EAP-SIM is using the USIM if available. This triggers a probably ancient
bug in scard_gsm_auth(), which results in sending the wrong get response
command to the USIM. Thus, EAP-SIM stopped to work after this change on
USIMs that expect the proper command.
Signed-off-by: Simon Baatz <gmbnomis@gmail.com>
If WPS isn't enabled, hostapd_cli returns 'OK' even though WPS doesn't
get activated because WPS context is not valid:
$ hostapd_cli wps_pbc
Selected interface 'wlan0'
OK
$ hostapd_cli wps_cancel
Selected interface 'wlan0'
OK
Fix this by returning appropriate error when WPS fails to activate:
$ hostapd_cli wps_pbc
Selected interface 'wlan0'
FAIL
$ hostapd_cli wps_cancel
Selected interface 'wlan0'
FAIL
Signed-off-by: Petar Koretic <petar.koretic@sartura.hr>
CC: Luka Perkov <luka.perkov@sartura.hr>
Peer should handle a GO Negotiation exchange correctly when the
responding device does not have WSC credentials available at the
time of receiving the GO Negotiation Request. WSC Credentials
(e.g., Pushbutton) can be entered within the 120 second timeout.
Presently, if concurrent session is not active, the peer would wait for
GO Negotiation Request frame from the other device for approximately one
minute due to the earlier optimization change in commit
a2d6365760. To meet the two minute
requirement, replace this design based on number of iterations with a
more appropriate wait for the required number of seconds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the previous commit 0f1034e388 to
skip extended listen also based on ongoing provision discovery operation
(which does not show up as a separate P2P module state and as such, was
not coveraged by the previous commit).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
bss->freq was not updated for IBSS, so whatever old value was stored
from a previous AP mode operation could end up having been used as the
channel when trying to send Authentication frames in an RSN IBSS. This
resulted in the frame not sent (cfg80211 rejects it) and potentially not
being able to re-establish connection due to 4-way handshake failing
with replay counter mismatches. Fix this by learning the operating
channel of the IBSS both when join event is received and when a
management frame is being transmitted since the IBSS may have changed
channels due to merges.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
RFC 5106 is not exactly clear on the requirements for the "no data"
packet that is used to acknowledge a fragmented message. Allow it to be
processed without the integrity checksum data field since it is possible
to interpret the RFC as this not being included. This fixes reassembly
of fragmented frames after keys have been derived.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If invalid group was negotiated, compute_password_element() left some of
the data->grp pointer uninitialized and this could result in
segmentation fault when deinitializing the EAP method. Fix this by
explicitly clearing all the pointer with eap_zalloc(). In addition,
speed up EAP failure reporting in this type of error case by indicating
that the EAP method execution cannot continue anymore on the peer side
instead of waiting for a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The extra data (nonce_s) used in this message was pointing to the
parsed, decrypted data and that buffer was previously freed just before
building the new message. This resulted in use of freed data and
possibly incorrect extra data value that caused the authentication
attempt to fail. Fix this by reordering the code to free the decrypted
data only after the new message has been generated. This was already the
case for EAP-AKA/AKA', but somehow missing from EAP-SIM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current position pointer was not updated when issuerUniqueID or
subjectUniqueID were present. This could result in extensions being
ignored.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not perform extended listen period operations when either a P2P
connection is in progress. This makes the connection more robust should
an extended listen timer trigger during such an operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Propagate max associated STAs in AP mode advertised by the driver to
core wpa_supplicant implemantion. This allows wpa_supplicant to update
the P2P GO group limit information automatically without having to
configure this limit manually. The information (if available) is also
used in the generic AP implementation to control maximum number of STA
entries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a new wowlan_triggers option to wpa_supplicant.conf. The triggers in
this key will be used to configure the kernel wowlan configuration.
For now, support only simple flags. More complex triggers can be added
later on.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Disabling the link only clears the local state. The remote peer will
still think we are connected and disallow the setup.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
When de-authenticating from the AP, disable each TDLS link after
sending the teardown packet. Postpone the reset of the peer state
data until after the link disable request.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Indicate to cfg80211 that interfaces created by the wpa_supplicant
or hostapd are owned by them, and that in case that the socket that
created them closes, these interfaces should be removed.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Got segfault, when freeing drv and there exists registered timeout for
blocked rfkill. This patch adds cancel timeout to avoid this.
Signed-off-by: Eduardo Abinader <eduardo.abinader@openbossa.org>
Commit 96ecea5eb1 did not consider
to pass the VHT/HT/WMM capabilities of the peer for BSS with
open mode.
Address this issue by passing the capabilities irrespective of
the security mode.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Reddy POTTETI <c_ppotte@qti.qualcomm.com>
If a driver wrapper misbehaves and does not indicate a frame body in the
event, core hostapd code should handle this consistently since that case
was already checked for in one location.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
sta == NULL check is already done above based on category !=
WLAN_ACTION_PUBLIC, but that seems to be too complex for some static
analyzers, so avoid invalid reports by explicitly checking for this
again in the WLAN_ACTION_FT case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous check for dl_list_len() or having an entry from the list is
sufficient, but some static analyzers cannot figure out that
dl_list_first() and dl_list_last() will return non-NULL in this type of
cases. Avoid invalid reports by explicitly checking for NULL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Checking sm->pmksa is sufficient here, but that seems to be too
difficult for static analyzers to follow, so avoid false reports by
explicitly checking pmkid as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
clang scan-build does not seem to like the 'd' suffix on floating
constants and ends up reporting analyzer failures. Since this suffix
does not seem to be needed, get rid of it to clear such warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_freq_to_channel() could return an error if the GO or P2P Client
operating channel is not valid. Check for this before generating the NFC
handover message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not of any real use anymore with nl80211_set_channel() taking
care of channel setting operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Configure driver with the new channel parameters (mainly, HT 20/40 MHz
bandwidth changes) as part of set_ap().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes the initial OBSS scans in AP mode before starting 40 MHz BSS
more robust. In addition, HT20 can be used as a backup option if none of
the scans succeed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a 2.4 GHz band AP receives a 20/40 Coexistence management frame from
a connected station with 20/40 BSS Intolerant Channel Report element
containing the channel list in which any legacy AP are detected or AP
with 40 MHz intolerant bit set in HT Cap IE is detected in the affected
range of the BSS, the BSS will be moved from 40 to 20 MHz channel width.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the minimal HT 20/40 co-ex support to include dynamic changes
during the lifetime of the BSS. If any STA connects to a 2.4 GHz AP with
40 MHz intolerant bit set then the AP will switch to 20 MHz operating
mode.
If for a period of time specified by OBSS delay factor and OBSS scan
interval AP does not have any information about 40 MHz intolerant STAs,
the BSS is switched from HT20 to HT40 mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides information to allow the driver to be configured for
updated channel parameters, e.g., when dynamically changing HT20/HT40
bandwidth.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like the demangle.h from binutils-dev is not installed that
commonly anymore. Since we need only two defines from that file, replace
the header file with those defines to make it easier to build with
WPA_TRACE_BFD=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some trailing whitespace and spaces for indentation were present in the
driver wrapper and header files.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move the definitions that depended in common.h into a separate header
file so that qca-vendor.h can be copied and used as-is in other
projects.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allocates a QCA vendor subcmd for extended statistics
functionality and also an attribute for delivering the payload
for extended statistics.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These functions are not standard and do not exist in all systems, e.g.,
variants of Android. Instead use the macros defined in common.h.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
With hidden SSID (ignore_broadcast_ssid), an IOS device trying to
connect to the AP will send a probe request with ANT == 2. If
interworking support is just compiled (not enabled), we will drop the
probe request since default ANT is 0.
Check that interworking is enabled before filtering based on ANT or
HESSID to match the behavior of code without CONFIG_INTERWORKING.
Signed-off-by: Maxime Bizon <mbizon@freebox.fr>
This allows the specific SIM to be identified for authentication
purposes in multi-SIM devices. This SIM number represents the index of
the SIM slot. This SIM number shall be used for the authentication using
the respective SIM for the Wi-Fi connection to the corresponding
network.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Sometimes function hostapd_is_dfs_required() returns -1 which indicates
that it was not possible to check if DFS was required. This happens for
channels from the 2.4 GHz band where DFS checking should not happen.
This can be fixed by returning DFS-not-required for mode different from
IEEE80211A and when DFS support is not available (ieee80211h not set).
Signed-off-by: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
Some of the buffers used to keep a copy of PTK/TPTK/GTK in the
supplicant implementation maintained a copy of the keys longer than
necessary. Clear these buffers to zero when the key is not needed
anymore to minimize the amount of time key material is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The sample code here ended up trying to register an eloop socket with fd
== -1. This was not really ever supposed to be used, but it is now also
hitting an assert in eloop. Skip the unnecessary
eloop_register_read_sock() to avoid this.
This was causing issues for hostapd since CONFIG_L2_PACKET is not set by
default. If CONFIG_RSN_PREAUTH=y was not used for CONFIG_L2_PACKET was
not set in .config explicitly, the defaul use of l2_packet_none.c ended
up hitting the newly added assert() in eloop.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Rather than ignoring packets with a minimal 8-byte radiotap
header, which may occur elsewhere, tag generated (decrypted)
packets with an empty vendor namespace tag and ignore those.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Update the radiotap parser to the latest version of the
http://git.sipsolutions.net/radiotap.git/ library to get
parsing for vendor namespaces.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This was already done for the disconnect event, but
SME-in-wpa_supplicant case needs to do same with the deauth event to
avoid getting extra events during WPS disconnect-and-reconnect sequence.
This can speed up WPS processing by removing unnecessary failures or
retries due to the extra event being processed during the next
association attempt.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows external programs to monitor driver signal change events
through wpa_supplicant when bgscan is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The first combination may allow single-channel concurrency for
P2P + managed, but there may be others that allow multi-channel
concurrency. Parse all of them to find the maximum number of channels.
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
wpa_supplicant now retries for P2P_GO_NEG_CNF_MAX_RETRY_COUNT times if
it doesn't receive acknowledgement for GO Negotiation Confirmation
frame. Currently, P2P_GO_NEG_CNF_MAX_RETRY_COUNT is set to 1.
While this is not strictly speaking following the P2P specification,
this can improve robustness of GO Negotiation in environments with
interference and also with peer devices that do not behave properly
(e.g., by not remaining awake on the negotiation channel through the
full GO Negotiation).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
NL80211_CMD_LEAVE_IBSS was used only with wpa_supplicant-based SME.
Extend this to drivers that implement SME internally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some OpenSSL versions have vulnerability in TLS heartbeat request
processing. Check the processed message to determine if the attack has
been used and if so, do not send the response to the peer. This does not
prevent the buffer read overflow within OpenSSL, but this prevents the
attacker from receiving the information.
This change is an additional layer of protection if some yet to be
identified paths were to expose this OpenSSL vulnerability. However, the
way OpenSSL is used for EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST in hostapd/wpa_supplicant
was already rejecting the messages before the response goes out and as
such, this additional change is unlikely to be needed to avoid the
issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Only the Neighbor Report element should be included here, so verify that
the element id matches. In addition, verify that each subelement has
valid length before using the data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes the definitions match the terminology used in IEEE Std
802.11-2012 and makes it easier to understand how the HT Operation
element subfields are used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was used to fill in the "PSMP support" subfield that was defined
during P802.11n development. However, this subfield was marked reserved
in the published IEEE Std 802.11n-2009 and it is not supported by
current drivers that use hostapd for SME either. As such, there is not
much point in maintaining this field as ht_capab parameter within
hostapd either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
QCA vendor extension is used for NAN functionality. This defines the
subcommand and attribute to address this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Now that WPS 2.0 support is enabled unconditionally, WEP and Shared auth
type are not allowed. This made some of the older code unused and that
can now be removed to clean up the implementation. There is still one
place where WEP is allowed for testing purposes: wpa_supplicant as
Registrar trying to configure an AP to use WEP. That is now only allowed
in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds, though.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is somewhat of a corner case since there is no real point in using
so short a fragmentation threshold that it would result in this message
getting fragmented. Anyway, it is better be complete and support this
case as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If fragmentation is used, the temporary inbuf/outbuf could have been
leaked in error cases (e.g., reaching maximum number of roundtrips).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"SET tdls_testing 0x800" can be used to enable a special test mode that
forces the FTIE MIC in TDLS setup messages to be incorrect.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Following events are now sent to ctrl_iface monitors to indicate if
credential blocks have been added, modified, or removed:
CRED-ADDED <id>
CRED-MODIFIED <id> <field>
CRED-REMOVE <id>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_supplicant and wpa_cli had already moved to allowing up to 4096 byte
buffer size to be used for control interface commands. This was limited
by the line edit buffer in interactive mode. Increase that limit to
match the other buffers to avoid artificially truncating long commands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"user" MACACL "password" style lines in the eap_user file can now be
used to configured user entries for RADIUS-based MAC ACL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_dev_addr was not NULL, so the all zeros case was printed as well.
Clean this up by printing p2p_dev_addr in debug prints only if it is a
real P2P Device Address.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add support of vendor command to hostapd ctrl_iface.
Vendor command's format:
VENDOR <vendor id> <sub command id> [<hex formatted data>]
The 3rd argument will be converted to binary data and then passed as
argument to the sub command.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
When primary and secondary channel were switched and config was
reloaded, secondary channel was incorrectly overwritten.
Proceed as for other settings that should not be changed and don't
allow to overwrite.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
While framing the TDLS Setup Confirmation frame, the driver needs to
know if the TDLS peer is VHT/HT/WMM capable and thus shall construct the
VHT/HT operation / WMM parameter elements accordingly. Supplicant
determines if the TDLS peer is VHT/HT/WMM capable based on the presence
of the respective IEs in the received TDLS Setup Response frame.
The host driver should not need to parse the received TDLS Response
frame and thus, should be able to rely on the supplicant to indicate
the capability of the peer through additional flags while transmitting
the TDLS Setup Confirmation frame through tdls_mgmt operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When hostapd choose to reuse an existing interface, it does not add it
to the set of interfaces from which we accept EAPOL packets.
Make sure we always add it to that set.
Signed-off-by: Maxime Bizon <mbizon@freebox.fr>
This allows drivers that build the WPA/RSN IEs internally to use similar
design for building the OSEN IE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is not much point in building devices with WPS 1.0 only supported
nowadays. As such, there is not sufficient justification for maintaining
extra complexity for the CONFIG_WPS2 build option either. Remove this by
enabling WSC 2.0 support unconditionally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Scan for GO on the negotiated operating channel for few iterations
before searching on all the supported channels during persistent group
reinvocation. In addition, use the already known SSID of the group in
the scans. These optimizations reduce group formation time.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Especially when multiple BSSes are used with ACS, number of the error
paths were not cleaning up driver initialization properly. This could
result in using freed memory and crashing the process if ACS failed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the PMK-R1 needs to be pulled for the R0KH, the previous
implementation ended up rejecting the over-the-air authentication and
over-the-DS action frame unnecessarily while waiting for the RRB
response. Improve this by postponing the Authentication/Action frame
response until the pull response is received.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This moves some of the p2p_prepare_channel_best() functionality into
separate helper functions to make the implementation easier to read.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The main WPS code rejects WEP parameters, so this code is not used and
can be commented out from WPS 2.0 builds. This is similar to the earlier
commit that commented out in-memory update.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 94b84bc725 missed one path where
p2p->op_reg_class should have been updated. Set this to 81 during
operating channel selection from 2.4 GHz.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the driver supports full offloading of DFS operations, do not disable
a channel marked for radar detection. The driver will handle the needed
operations for such channels.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This uses a QCA vendor extension to determine if the driver supports
fully offloaded DFS operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The main WPS code rejects WEP parameters, so this code is not used and
can be commented out from WPS 2.0 builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not select pre-configured channel as operating channel preference if
it is unavailable maybe due to interference or possible known
co-existence constraints, and try to select random available channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There was possibility that the current channel in Beacon information
element was incorrectly set. This problem was easily observed when
primary and secondary channel were switched and then some of hostapd
settings (for example password) were changed using WPS External
Registrar. This caused hostapd_reload_config() function overwrite the
current channel information from config file.
This patch prevents this situation and does not allow to overwrite
channel and some other settings when config is reloaded.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
It was possible for hapd->wps_beacon_ie and hapd->wps_probe_resp_ie to
be set if WPS initialization in hostapd failed after having set these
parameters (e.g., during UPnP configuration). In addition, many of the
other WPS configuration parameters that were allocated during the first
part of the initialization were not properly freed on error paths.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the device itself may support WPA/WPA2-Enterprise, enrollment of
credentials for EAP authentication is not supported through WPS. As
such, there is no need to claim support for these capabilities within
WPS information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The scan_for_auth workaround for cfg80211 missing a BSS entry for the
target BSS during authentication uses a single channel scan controlled
within driver_nl80211.c. This operation does not indicate
EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS to the upper layer code. However, it did report
EVENT_SCAN_STARTED and this resulted in the radio work protection code
assuming that an external program triggered a scan, but that scan never
completed. This resulted in all new radio work items getting stuck
waiting for this scan to complete.
Fix this by handling the scan_for_auth situation consistently within
driver_nl80211.c by filtering both the EVENT_SCAN_STARTED and
EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Do not truncate CURLINFO entries on first linefeed to get full IN/OUT
headers and data into debug log. Use wpa_hexdump_ascii() if any
non-displayable characters are included. Remove the separate header/data
debug dumps since all that information is now available from the debug
callback.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These were previous set to 3.0 and 1.5 ms which ended up using values 93
and 46 in 36 usec inits. However, the default values for these are
actually defined as 3.008 ms and 1.504 ms (94/47) and those values are
also listed in the hostapd.conf example.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
test-tls-4: Short 511-bit RSA-DHE prime
test-tls-5: Short 767-bit RSA-DHE prime
test-tls-6: Bogus RSA-DHE "prime" 15
test-tls-7: Very short 58-bit RSA-DHE prime in a long container
test-tls-8: Non-prime as RSA-DHE prime
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The center segment0 calculation for VHT20 ACS was incorrect. This caused
ACS to fail with: "Could not set channel for kernel driver".
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Secondary channel was compared incorrectly (-4/4 vs. actual channel
number) which broke matching neighboring 40 MHz BSSes and only the
no-beacons-on-secondary-channel rule was applied in practice. Once
sec_chan was fixed, this triggered another issue in this function where
both rules to switch pri/sec channels could end up getting applied in a
way that effectively canceled the switch.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
previous_ap and last_assoc_req were not really used for anything
meaninful, so get rid of them to reduce the size of per-STA memory
allocation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the control interface and some of the BSS setup to
be left partially initialized in failure cases while the BSS structures
were still freed. Fix this by properly cleaning up anything that may
have passed initialization successfully before freeing memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows hostapd to set a different management group cipher than the
previously hardcoded default BIP (AES-128-CMAC). The new configuration
file parameter group_mgmt_cipher can be set to BIP-GMAC-128,
BIP-GMAC-256, or BIP-CMAC-256 to select one of the ciphers defined in
IEEE Std 802.11ac-2013.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
For some client OBSS implementations that are performed in
firmware, all OBSS parameters need to be set to valid values.
Do this, as well as supplying the "20/40 Coex Mgmt Support"
flag in the extended capabilities IE.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
The 802.11ac amendment specifies that that the center segment 0 field
is reserved, so it should be zero. Hostapd previously required it to
be set, which is likely a good idea for interoperability, but allow it
to be unset. However, don't allow it to be set to a random value, only
allow zero and the correct channel.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some of the remote ANQP server concepts were introduces into gas_serv.c,
but these were not completed. Remote the unused implementation for now.
It can be added back if support for remote ANQP server is added at some
point.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When wpa_psk_file is used instead of wpa_psk/wpa_passphrase, each WPS
Enrollee was given a unique PSK. This did not work for the
station-as-Registrar case where ER would learn the current AP settings
instead of enrolling itself (i.e., when using the AP PIN instead of
station PIN). That case can be covered with a similar design, so
generate a per-device PSK when building M7 as an AP in wpa_psk_file
configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd DEAUTHENTICATE and DISASSOCIATE control interface commands
accepted both a test=<0/1> and reason=<val> parameters, but these were
not supported in the same command as a combination. Move the code around
a bit to allow that as well since it can be helpful for automated test
scripts.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
TDLS Setup Request/Response frames from the peers include the WMM IE,
hence parse the same and consider the QoS Info from the WMM IE. The
qos_info obtained in the WMM IE overwrites the one obtained through
WLAN_EID_QOS attribute.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_find removes P2P_DEV_REPORTED flag from every existing P2P peer
entry. Thus, if a GO Negotiation Request frame is received before the
peer is re-discovered based on Probe Response frame, report
P2P-DEVICE-FOUND indication prior to the P2P-GO-NEG-REQUEST similarly to
how this is done the first time the peer is found.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, some of the last initialization steps could fail without
clearly marking the interface disabled. For example, configuring the
channel to the driver could fail, but hostapd would not clearly identify
as the interface not being in functional state apart from not moving it
to the ENABLED state. Send an AP-DISABLED event and mark interface state
DISABLED if such a setup operation fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This hs20-osu-client client command can be used to parse a DER encoded
X.509v3 certificate with the logotype extensions and
id-wfa-hotspot-friendlyName values shown in detail.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE fails due to exiting authentication, forced
deauthentication is used to clear cfg80211 start and a new
authentication command is retried. This resulted in an extra
disconnection event getting delivered to the core wpa_supplicant code
and that could end up confusing state there, e.g., by clearing
connection parameters like wpa_s->key_mgmt and preventing the following
association from reaching proper COMPLETED state with open networks.
Fix this by hiding the unnecessary disconnection event when using the
deauth-for-auth workaround.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
On RF-kill, we should not request the kernel to start a P2P device. In
addition, we should call i802_set_iface_flags() both for a P2P Device
interface and any other interface instead of calling a dedicated
function for each.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <Moshe.Benji@intel.com>
At least in nl80211, broadcast management frames like Probe Request
frames, may be processed multiple times per BSS if multi-BSS is active
and NL80211_CMD_FRAME event is used to deliver them. In the case of
Probe Request frames, hostapd will create multiple redundant Probe
Response frames which are problematic when many BSS are on one channel.
This problem is caused by driver_nl80211 generating an event for
wpa_supplicant_event() for each BSS, and hostapd_mgmt_rx() calls
ieee802_11_mgmt() for each BSS, too.
Fix this by processing broadcast events only for the BSS the driver
intended to. The behavior is not changed for drivers not setting a BSS.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
If channels are "available", change to "usable" DFS channels as a
fallback, too. This requires CAC, but it is still better to do that
instead of stopping service completely.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
If DFS channels are marked as "available", an AP can switch to them
immediately without performing CAC. Therefore, the channel selection
function should consider these channels even though these are radar
channels.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
Different channels allow different transmission power, at least in ETSI
countries. Also, ETSI requires a "channel plan" for DFS operation, and
channels should be randomly choosen from these channels.
Add a channel list configuration option for users to add channels
hostapd may pick from.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
Previously, EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' did not work with number of crypto
libraries (GnuTLS, CryptoAPI, NSS) since the required FIPS 186-2 PRF
function was not implemented. This resulted in somewhat confusing error
messages since the placeholder functions were silently returning an
error. Fix this by using the internal implementation of FIP 186-2 PRF
(including internal SHA-1 implementation) with crypto libraries that do
not implement this in case EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' is included in the build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Incorrect PTK length was used in PMK-to-PTK derivation and the Michael
MIC TX/RX key swapping code was incorrectly executed for these ciphers
on supplicant side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While these were already available from elsewhere in the debug log, it
is convenient to have the values also available at the location where
the actual nl80211 command is issued.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The internal TLS server implementation and RADIUS server implementation
in hostapd can be configured to allow EAP clients to be tested to
perform TLS validation steps correctly. This functionality is not
included in the default build; CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y in
hostapd/.config can be used to enable this.
When enabled, the RADIUS server will configure special TLS test modes
based on the received User-Name attribute value in this format:
<user>@test-tls-<id>.<rest-of-realm>. For example,
anonymous@test-tls-1.example.com. When this special format is used, TLS
test modes are enabled. For other cases, the RADIUS server works
normally.
The following TLS test cases are enabled in this commit:
1 - break verify_data in the server Finished message
2 - break signed_params hash in ServerKeyExchange
3 - break Signature in ServerKeyExchange
Correctly behaving TLS client must abort connection if any of these
failures is detected and as such, shall not transmit continue the
session.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the internal TLS implementation to write log entries to the
same authlog with rest of the RADIUS server and EAP server
functionality.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If eap_user_file is configured to point to an SQLite database, RADIUS
server code can use that database for log information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, this was silently dropped which left the connection waiting
for timeout. decrypt_error alert can be used here to avoid that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This same design is used in both the server and the client roles in the
internal TLS implementation. Instead of duplicated implementation, use a
helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of separate server and client side implementations, use a common
set of helper functions for calculating the ServerParams hash for
ServerKeyExchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The SHA256-based RSA-AES-128/256 cipher suites were already implemented
and enabled for the internal TLS client, but they had not been enabled
for the server.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, this was enabled only at msgdump verbosity level, but any
level that is more verbose than it should also be included.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 4345fe963e. That
introduced number of memory leaks and since the rest of the VLAN changes
did not yet go in, it is easier to revert this for now and bring back
the changes after fixes if there is sufficient interest for them in the
future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the design already available for Access-Request packets to
the RADIUS server and Access-Accept messages. Each user entry can be
configured to add arbitrary RADIUS attributes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Request the driver to send a Deauthentication frame before doing
any other disconnection steps on the session timeout path. This is
needed when PMF is negotiated for the association since the driver
will need to find the STA entry and the PTK for it to be able to
protect the robust Deauthentication frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In case of Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) failure, we do not have a
real fallback path. Interface still remains in ACS state. To reflect we
did not succeed with ACS, simply disable the interface and indicate this
to user/upper layer entity so that a suitable recovery or error
notification can be performed.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
wpa_supplicant already allowed beacon interval to be configured for AP
mode operations, but this was not passed to the driver for IBSS even
though the same parameter can used for that case. Add this for the
nl80211 driver interface to allow beacon interval to be controlled for
IBSS as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
handle_assoc_cb() got this addition, but the check in
hostapd_new_assoc_sta() was not modified to be aware of the OSEN special
case for EAPOL state machines to be used for marking a STA authorized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was done in handle_assoc_cb() in ieee802_11.c for drivers that use
hostapd SME/MLME. However, drivers that include SME/MLME implementation
do not use that function and the STA flag needs to be set when
processing the association notification. This is needed to get the STA
entry into showing the proper authorized state and to get the
AP-STA-CONNECTED/DISCONNECTED events on the control interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
As per IEEE Std 802.11ac-2013, 'Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent' field
value is in the range of 0 to 7. Previous implementation assumed EXP0 to
be the maximum length (bits 23, 24 and 25 set) what is incorrect.
This patch adds options to set it up within the 0 to 7 range.
Signed-off-by: Bartosz Markowski <bartosz.markowski@tieto.com>
For example, the previous implementation considered [44, 48, 52, 56] to
be a valid VHT80 channel -- which it is not. This resulted in, e.g.,
failure to start CAC when channels on overlapped segments included DFS
channels.
Add a check similar to the HT40 one to prevent that. The check is
performed this way as the ACS implementation assumes the primary channel
to be the first channel in a given segment.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Previously, we printed this message as a debug one, which was confusing
in case verbose debug messages were disabled. User could think CAC
started but never ended. Add more parameterss to DFS_EVENT_CAC_START, so
external programs can more easily check what was wrong in case of
errors.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This commit adds an option to optimize AP teardown by leaving the
deletion of keys (including group keys) and stations to the driver.
This optimization option should be used if the driver supports stations
and keys removal when stopping an AP.
For example, the optimization option will always be used for cfg80211
drivers since cfg80211 shall always remove stations and keys when
stopping an AP (in order to support cases where the AP is disabled
without the knowledge of wpa_supplicant/hostapd).
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Previously, both this and combination of OUI_WFA and P2P_OUI_TYPE were
used. Using the full 32-bit value as a single operation saves a bit in
code size, so start moving towards using it more consistently when
writing or finding the P2P vendor specific element.
Signed-off-by: Rahul Jain <rahul.jain@samsung.com>
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y build of wpa_supplicant now allows arbitrary
cfg80211 commands to be performed through the new VENDOR ctrl_iface
command by using a special vendor_id ffffffff. The command identifier
(NL80211_CMD_*) is encoded as the subcmd and the attributes in the
hexformatted data area. Response attributes are returned as a hexdump.
For example, this shows a NL80211_CMD_FRAME and a response (cookie
attribute) on a little endian host:
wpa_cli -i wlan0 vendor ffffffff 59 080003004d0000000800260085090000....
0c00580000d7868c0388ffff
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When an interface is disabled through rtm event, wpa_supplicant's
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED is generated, which in turn, may
completely destroy wpa_driver_nl80211_data struct (drv). This
scenario happens now when P2P GO interface is disabled. Since this
struct may be used later in this function it causes segmentation fault.
Fix it by trying to find drv again in the interface list after
wpa_supplicant's event handling.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add a callback to the driver interface that allows vendor specific
commands to be sent. In addition, a control interface command is added
to expose this new interface outside wpa_supplicant:
Vendor command's format:
VENDOR <vendor id> <sub command id> [<hex formatted data>]
The 3rd argument will be converted to binary data and then passed as
argument to the sub command.
This interface is driver independent, but for now, this is only
implemented for the nl80211 driver interface using the cfg80211 vendor
commands.
Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com>
wpa_driver_nl80211_if_remove() checks bss->if_added before deleting an
interface, which is 0 for the first BSS. The only part of
wpa_driver_nl80211_if_remove() that should get called for WDS STA
interfaces is the call to nl80211_remove_iface(), which can be pulled in
here directly.
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
There is no need to use a for loop here since the h variable is
set identically at the beginning of the body anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The following if statements set the new_op_mode value in all cases,
so there is no need to initialize this to 0 first. This removes a
static analyzer warning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The pos variable was not used between its first and second assignment.
Clean this up by using the pos variables instead of the buf (start of
the buffer).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to maintain a separate counter for this in addition to
the pointer to the current location. In addition, this gets rid of
warnings about unused variable write.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hapd_iface->bss[i] == NULL, this could have resulted in NULL pointer
dereference in the debug print. Avoid this by skipping the message in
case of NULL pointer. In addition, clear iface->bss[i] to NULL for
additional robustness even though this array gets freed immediately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was previously checked through the eap_peer_tls_ssl_init() call
which made it difficult for static analyzers. Add an explicit check for
config == NULL into the beginnign of eap_fast_init() since this will
always result in initialization failing anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If wpa_driver_roboswitch_read() fails before such comparison, the values
that are being compared are not initialized properly and as such, there
is not much point in comparing them either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This seemed to be fine on most code paths, but the code was complex
enough to make the analysis difficult (and a bit too much for static
analyzers). There is no harm in forcing these parameters to be
initialized, so do that to make sure they cannot be left uninitialized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
bfd_demangle() call could be skipped if data.function == NULL. Make sure
the already freed aname pointer cannot be used again in such a case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
record->type == NULL case was handled through the record->type_length
comparison. While this was correct, it is a bit difficult for static
analyzers to understand, so add an extra check for NULL to avoid false
reports on this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
no_offchannel_tx=1 driver parameter can now be used to force the older
remain-on-channel -based offchannel TX design to be used with
mac80211_hwsim. This can be used to increase test coverage with the
hwsim test cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the error path to try to use P2P Group ID attribute
even if one was not included in the message. This could result in
dereferencing a NULL pointer, so re-check the pointer before copying the
data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The special case of non-zero status code used in a GAS Comeback Response
frame to indicate that additional delay is needed before the response is
available was not working properly. This case needs to allow the status
code check to be bypassed for the comeback case prior to having received
any response data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like leaving behind the freed pointed at the end of the array
could end up in a crash triggered by double free in some cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PD Response is sent out using a 200 ms offchannel wait, but that wait
was not cancelled on TX status report. This could result in offchannel
operation being left waiting unnecessarily long. Fix this by making the
P2P_NO_PENDING_ACTION case in Action TX callback cancel the wait if a
pending wait is marked (and mark this for PD Response).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like some deployed devices may send an invalid supported
operating class element (length = 0) in TDLS Setup messages. With
cfg80211, this results in the NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION command failing
due to an invalid argument (cfg80211 mandates supported operating
classes information to have a length of 2..253 octets).
Work around this interop issue by ignoring the Supported Operating Class
element if it has invalid length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new hostapd.conf parameter subscr_remediation_url can be used to
define the URL of the Subscription Remediation Server that will be added
in a WFA VSA to Access-Accept message if the SQLite user database
indicates that the user need subscription remediation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd can now be configured to advertise OSU Providers with the
new osu_* confgiuration parameters.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd can now be configured to provide access for icon files
(hs20_icon config file parameter) for OSU. The hs20_icon data contains
additional meta data about the icon that is not yet used, but it will be
needed for the OSU Providers list ANQP element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the authentication server includes the WFA HS 2.0 Session Info URL
AVP in Access-Accept, schedule ESS Disassociation Imminent frame to be
transmitted specified warning time prior to session timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the RADIUS server includes deauthentication request in Access-Accept,
send a WNM-Notification frame to the station after 4-way handshake and
disconnect the station after configurable timeout.
A new control interface command, WNM_DEAUTH_REQ, is added for testing
purposes to allow the notification frame to sent based on local request.
This case does not disconnect the station automatically, i.e., a
separate control interface command would be needed for that.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the RADIUS server includes the WFA RADIUS VSA in Access-Accept to
indicate need for subscription remediation, copy the server URL from
the message and send it to the station after successfully completed
4-way handshake (i.e., after PTK is set to allow PMF to work) in a
WNM-Notification.
AP must not allow PMKSA caching to be used after subscription
remediation association, so do not add the PMKSA cache entry whenever
the authentication server is indicating need for subscription
remediation. This allows station reassociation to use EAP authentication
to move to non-remediation connection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the station indicated support for Hotspot 2.0, send its release
number and PPS MO ID in Access-Request messages using the WFA RADIUS
VSA.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The Access-Request frames are used to inform the RADIUS server about the
Hotspot 2.0 release number supported by the AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Subscription remediation notification can now be sent from hostapd with:
hostapd_cli hs20_wnm_notif 02:00:00:00:00:00 http://example.com/foo/
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The HS 2.0 Indication element from hostapd now includes the release
number field and the new ANQP Domain ID field. This ID can be configured
with anqp_domain_id parameter in hostapd.conf.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move excluded SSID filtering step to the end of credential validation
process and return list of BSSes that would otherwise have matching
credentials, but have an excluded SSID. Automatic network selection will
not select such a network, but interworking_connect command can be used
to pick excluded networks.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_supplicant can request OSU icon data with "hs20_icon_request <BSSID>
<icon filename>". This transmits an Icon Request ANQP element and
processes the response in Icon Binary File ANQP elements.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Subscription remediation notification WNM-Notification Request is now
shown in the following way in wpa_supplicant control interface:
<3>HS20-SUBSCRIPTION-REMEDIATION http://example.com/foo/
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The HS 2.0 Indication element from wpa_supplicant now includes the
release number field and wpa_supplicant shows the release number of the
AP in STATUS command (hs20=1 replaced with hs20=<release>).
The new update_identifier field in the cred block can now be used to
configure the PPS MO ID so that wpa_supplicant adds it to the Indication
element in Association Request frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Many drivers support operation without GTK configured, but most (if any)
today do not advertise this. Handle this by skipping GTK cipher suite
configuration if the driver did not advertise support in order to work
around cfg80211 validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Allow mixed DFS and non-DFS channels, e.g., VHT160 on channels 36-64.
This is useful for testing VHT160 with mac80211_hwsim.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add IPv6 support when using udp/udp-remote control interface using the
following new build configuration options:
CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp6
CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp6-remote
This is useful for testing, while we don't need to assign IPv4 address
(static or using DHCP) and can just use auto configured IPv6 addresses
(link local, which is based on the MAC address). Also add scope id
support for link local case.
For example,
./wpa_cli
./wpa_cli -i ::1,9877
./wpa_cli -i fe80::203:7fff:fe05:69%wlan0,9877
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
The regulatory rules in Japan do not allow OFDM to be used on channel
14. While this was to some extend assumed to be enforced by drivers
(many of which apparently don't), it is safer to make hostapd enforce
this by disabling any OFDM-related functionality. This tries to avoid
backwards compatibility issues by downgrading the mode rather than
rejecting the invalid configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add configuration of Spectrum Management subfield in the Capability
Information of Beacon, Probe Response, and Association Response frames.
Spectrum Management bit is set when directly requested by new
configuration option spectrum_mgmt_required=1 or when AP is running on
DFS channels. In the future, also TPC shall require this bit to be set.
Signed-hostap: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanyatk@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
Add Power Constraint information element to Beacon and Probe Response
frames when hostapd is configured on 5 GHz band and Country information
element is also added. According to IEEE Std 802.11-2012 a STA shall
determine a local maximum transmit power for the current channel based
on information derived from Country and Power Constraint elements.
In order to add Power Constraint element ieee80211d option need to be
enabled and new local_pwr_constraint config option need to be set to
unsigned value in units of decibels. For now this value is statically
configured but the future goal is to implement dynamic TPC algorithm
to control local power constraint.
Signed-hostap: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanyatk@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
UPnP-arch-DeviceArchitecture describe ErrorCode 412 to be used for the
case where no un-epxired subscription matches. This used to return 200
which is not strictly speaking correct even though it is unlikely to
cause any problems.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The caller of the GET parser is checking this already and the GET case
was the only one that ended up doing the duplicated validation step.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When a Probe Request frame from an invitation peer is received, a timer
is schedule to start invitation. However, this could have been scheduled
multiple times (once per Probe Request frame) which is undesirable since
only a single invitation should be initiated.
Signed-off-by: Rahul Jain <rahul.jain@samsung.com>
The previous parser would have skipped a WFA vendor extension attribute
that includes only a single zero-length subelement. No such subelement
has been defined so far, so this does not really affect any
functionality, but better make the parser address this correctly should
such an element ever be added.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like discovery_dev_id test case can still fail and based on the
previously added debug prints, this is happening since the P2P module
believes it is not in Listen state even when a P2P_LISTEN was issued.
p2p_listen_cb() did not get called on remain-on-channel event for some
reason, so lets add more debug to find out why this can happen.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Suppose we have multiple peers and we have peers advertising SD
capability, but no services registered for advertising. In this case,
even if there are multiple broadcast queries set, we might end up
sending only the lastly added broadcast query to the same device (since
SD_INFO won't get set for the first broadcast query). Add support for
multiple wildcard queries to be tracked to enable this type of use
case.
Some times it is seen that before advancing to next device in the list,
the scan results come and update SD_SCHEDULE flag. This will result in
sending the already sent query to the same device without giving chance
to other devices. This issue again is seen with peer devices advertising
SD capability without any services registered.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
These can be used to disable TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2 as a workaround for AAA
servers that have issues interoperating with newer TLS versions.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
This allows NAS-IP-Address, NAS-Identifier, and NAS-IPv6-Address to be
included in the Disconnect-Request packets.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When a station is disconnected based on Disconnect-Request, it is better
to force the station to go through full EAP authentication if it tries
to reconnect.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for an ER to send an unexpected PutWLANResponse action
when the destination STA is in disassociated, but not fully
deauthenticated state. sta->eapol_sm can be NULL in such state and as
such, it would be possible to hit a NULL pointer dereference in the
eapol_auth_eap_pending_cb() call at the end of the
hostapd_wps_probe_req_rx() when trying to proxy the WPS message to the
station. Fix this by validating that sta->eapol_sm is set before
processing the message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This reverts commit 51e3eafb68. There are
too many deployed AAA servers that include both id-kp-clientAuth and
id-kp-serverAuth EKUs for this change to be acceptable as a generic rule
for AAA authentication server validation. OpenSSL enforces the policy of
not connecting if only id-kp-clientAuth is included. If a valid EKU is
listed with it, the connection needs to be accepted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It can be helpful to see from the debug log why the P2P Device role did
not reply to a Probe Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the connection from hostapd authentication server to hlr_auc_gw fails
due to hlr_auc_gw not running yet, the local socket file was left
behind. Delete the socket file on connect() failure path.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes issues in using a password that includes a UTF-8 character
with three-byte encoding with EAP methods that use NtPasswordHash
(anything using MSCHAPv2 or LEAP).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use nl80211_set_iface_id() in wpa_driver_nl80211_get_hw_feature_data(),
as otherwise the function fails for a P2P Device interface (which does
not have a netdev associated with it).
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In function ieee802_1x_get_mib_sta(), eap_server_get_name() may return
NULL, and it could be dereferenced immidiately by os_snprintf() (if the
snprintf implementation does not handle NULL pointer).
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
In function tls_verify_cb(), X509_STORE_CTX_get_current_cert() may
return NULL, and it will be dereferenced by X509_get_subject_name().
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
Initialize variables explicitly to avoid [-Wmaybeuninitialized] compiler
warning in hostapd_handle_dfs() and
hostapd_dfs_start_channel_switch_cac() functions.
Signed-hostap: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
This uses the new nl80211 attributes to allow the connect command to
provide bssid and freq hints to the driver without limiting roaming to
the specific BSS/frequency. This can be used by drivers that perform
internal BSS selection (WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION) as a candidate
for initial association.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Confirm-before-commit validation step allowed execution to continue on
error case. This could result in segfault in sae_check_confirm() if the
temporary SAE data was not available (as it would not be, e.g., in case
of an extra SAE confirm message being received after successful
exchange). Fix this by stopping SAE processing immediately after
detecting unexpected state for confirm message. In addition, make the
public sae.c functions verify sae->tmp before dereferencing it to make
this type of bugs less likely to result in critical issues.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible to FAIL return for a P2P_FIND command that was issued
while an already started P2P_FIND operation was in the scan phase. This
can be confusing for upper layer software, so hide the failure report
from the ctrl_iface response. The previously started scan will continue
the find operation after this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, unconfigured state was forcing the best supported
authentication and encryption state to be shown in WPS messages,
including AP Settings in M7 in case the AP acts as an Enrollee. This is
not really correct for the AP Settings case, so change that one to
indicate the currently configured state.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The mechanism of using Status attribute in GO Negotiation Request was
used in some early specification drafts, but it is not compliant with
the current P2P specification where GO Negotiation Request is used only
for the purpose of initiating a new GO Negotiation. However, some
deployed devices use it to indicate rejection of GO Negotiation in a
case where they have sent out GO Negotiation Response with status 1. The
P2P specification explicitly disallows this.
To avoid unnecessary interoperability issues and extra frames, mark the
pending negotiation as failed and do not reply to this GO Negotiation
Request frame. Previously, GO Negotiation Response frame with status=4
was sent back as an indication of the GO Negotiation Request frame being
invalid. This response is not sent anymore and the status code for the
P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE event is changed from 4 (invalid parameters) to 11
(rejected by user) for this specific workaround case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for the driver to report Beacon RX prior to hostapd
having completed AP mode setup, e.g., when changing country code. Beacon
frame processing for OLBC was not prepared for this and could trigger
segfault due to NULL pointer dereference. Fix this by ignoring the
Beacon frames received prior to completing interface setup when
determining OLBC updates.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit b1f625e0d8 extended
ap_scan_as_station to be able to distinguish between AP and P2P GO
iftypes. However, it did this in a way that completely lost the original
mode because drv->nlmode had already been replaced with the station
mode. Fix this by storing the correct old mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the peer device has already acknowledge receipt of the Invitation
Request frame, it is better not to re-start invitation by sending
another Invitation Request. This should not be needed since the peer
already has received the Invitation Request frame and sending the second
round in this type of sequence can cause issues with nl80211 offloaded
offchannel TX operations since driver_nl80211.c will lose the cookie
value for the first pending Action frame and may not be able to cancel
offchannel wait for it properly. this has been seen to trigger a failure
in the p2p_go_invite_auth test case with the scan failing due to GO
sending out Probe Response frame on incorrect channel (the channel used
in that not-cancelled Action TX).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit bd3a373767 added a mechanism to use
AP Channel attribute from within a Credential attribute to optimize
scans. However, this design is not actually used with the WPS NFC use
cases. With configuration token, the AP Channel attribute is in the same
container with the Credential attribute (and that was also handled in
the previous implementation). With connection handover, AP Channel
information is outside the Credential attribute as well.
Simplify implementation by removing the AP Channel within Credential
case. This allows wpas_wps_use_cred() to get the AP Channel from the
container instead of having to find this during credential iteration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not really used in practice and there is no need to maintain
unsed code that would only print debug log entries.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 795baf773f ('hostapd: Filter
channel list updated events after country code change') uses the
EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED data pointer, but it updated only one of the
callers to provide that data. NL80211_CMD_REG_BEACON_HINT event was
still sending the event without the initiator data and resulted in NULL
pointer dereference, e.g., if a scan was run while hostapd was running
and the driver was in world roaming state and enabled a channel for
active scans.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The hostapd compilation displays a below warning On NetBSD 6.1.2.
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:72:1: warning: 'get80211opmode' defined but not used
This patch solves it and moves other functions to appropriate position to
reduce #ifdef.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Before this patch, 1 second timeout was used for regulatory updates. In
some cases, specially when we reload driver modules on some slower
platforms this could take more than 1 second (about 2 seconds). This is
important specially for DFS case, where we have to have correct DFS
region before we will start CAC. In other case (unknown DFS region), CAC
will fail. 5 seconds should be enough for all cases.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
The original RSSI filter semantics for scheduled scan were
really confusing - a separate matchset was created, but it
wasn't actually treated as a separate matchset in the kernel
but rather used as the global RSSI value. The RSSI matchset
thus behaved like an RSSI filter outside of the matchsets,
being ANDed rather than ORed (as normal between matchsets.)
To make this less confusing, I changed the kernel API a bit
to actually treat the RSSI inside each matchset properly,
but keeping it compatible with the old approach by using a
matchset with only an RSSI value as the default for all the
other matchsets, and adding it as a separate matchset only
if it's the only one.
The proper way for wpa_supplicant to do this then would be
to add the RSSI to each SSID matchset, and only add another
matchset without SSID if there's none with.
However, to keep compatibility with older kernels, always
keep the non-SSID matchset and only add the RSSI to all the
other matchsets. This gets close to the desired behaviour,
the only difference would be that we shouldn't add the RSSI
matchset if there are others, but stays compatible with old
and new kernels, as new ones ignore the RSSI-only matchset
if there are others and those others have an RSSI.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
1. In wpa_config_process_bgscan() fix memory leak after
calling wpa_config_parse_string()
2. In hostapd_config_defaults(), on failure to allocate bss->radius,
conf->bss was not freed.
3. In p2p_deauth_nofif(), memory allocated in p2p_parse_ies() was not
freed in case of NULL minor_reason_code.
4. In p2p_disassoc_nofif(), memory allocated in p2p_parse_ies() was
not freed in case of NULL minor_reason_code.
5. In p2p_process_go_neg_conf(), memory allocated was not freed in
case that the P2P Device interface was not waiting for a
GO Negotiation Confirm.
6. In wpa_set_pkcs11_engine_and_module_path(), the wrong pointer was
checked.
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
It is possible for channel switch notification to be missing channel
type attribute. This is true at least for VHT80. This led to
iface->conf->secondary_channel being set to 0. This in turn made
subsequent DFS-triggered CSA to fail due to invalid frequency
parameters.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This checks if the NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX attribute is present before
trying to get the value of interface index.
Signed-hostap: Shital Jaju <shitalj@broadcom.com>
If CONFIG_WPS_TESTING=y is enabled in build configuration, the new
wps_corrupt_pkhash parameter (similar to wps_testing_dummy_cred) can be
used to request public key hash to be corrupted in all generated OOB
Device Password attributes. This can be used for testing purposes to
validate public key hash validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a new P2P Invitation mechanism to invite a P2P Device with an
NFC Tag to an already operating group when the GO with NFC Device reads
the NFC Tag. The P2P Device with the NFC Tag will then accept invitation
and connect to the group automatically using its OOB Device Password.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When "P2P_SET nfc_tag 1" is used to enable the own NFC Tag for P2P, also
enable it for any running GO interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
P2P Group ID can optionally be included in the connection handover
messages when acting as a P2P Client in a group. Add this information
and show it in the P2P-NFC-PEER-CLIENT event message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the NFC connection handover message received from a peer indicates
that the peer is operating as a GO on a specific channel, use that
information to avoid having to go through full scan. In addition, skip
the separate join-a-group scan since we already know the operating
channel, GO P2P Device Address, and SSID.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was already done for Registrar, but the Enrollee case did not
set config error properly if Registrar public key did not match the
hash received during NFC connection handover.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of automatically triggering a connection, provide an indication
of one of the devices being a P2P client to upper layers to allow user
to determine what to do next.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Send a P2P-NFC-BOTH-GO event to upper layers to determine what to
do in case both devices going through NFC connection handover are
already operating as a GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new mechanism allows P2P Client to request an IPv4 address from the
GO as part of the 4-way handshake to avoid use of DHCP exchange after
4-way handshake. If the new mechanism is used, the assigned IP address
is shown in the P2P-GROUP-STARTED event on the client side with
following new parameters: ip_addr, ip_mask, go_ip_addr. The assigned IP
address is included in the AP-STA-CONNECTED event on the GO side as a
new ip_addr parameter. The IP address is valid for the duration of the
association.
The IP address pool for this new mechanism is configured as global
wpa_supplicant configuration file parameters ip_addr_go, ip_addr_mask,
ip_addr_star, ip_addr_end. For example:
ip_addr_go=192.168.42.1
ip_addr_mask=255.255.255.0
ip_addr_start=192.168.42.2
ip_addr_end=192.168.42.100
DHCP mechanism is expected to be enabled at the same time to support P2P
Devices that do not use the new mechanism. The easiest way of managing
the IP addresses is by splitting the IP address range into two parts and
assign a separate range for wpa_supplicant and DHCP server.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When NFC connection handover is used to trigger GO Negotiation, the
channel used for the GO Negotiation frames is already known. As such,
there is no need to use the Listen operations to find the peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The device with the NFC Tag can be configured to enable NFC to be used
with "P2P_SET nfc_tag 1" and "P2P_LISTEN" commands to allow static
handover to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"NFC_REPORT_HANDOVER {INIT,RESP} P2P <req> <sel>" can now be used to
report completed NFC negotiated connection handover in which the P2P
alternative carrier was selected.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"NFC_GET_HANDOVER_{REQ,SEL} NDEF P2P-CR" can now be used to build P2P
alternative carrier record for NFC connection handover request/select
messages.
Static connection handover case can be enabled by configuring the DH
parameters (either with wps_nfc_* configuration parameters or with
WPS_NFC_TOKEN command at run time. The NFC Tag contents can be generated
with "NFC_GET_HANDOVER_SEL NDEF P2P-CR-TAG" after having configured
Listen channel (p2p_listen_reg_class/p2p_listen_channel).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
GO Negotiation needs to know which OOB Device Password ID is assigned
for the peer when NFC is used as the trigger.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These functions can be used to build the WPS attributes for P2P NFC
connection handover messages.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new WPS connection handover select includes Registrar public key
hash instead of credential. Use the new information to start
abbreviated WPS handshake instead of configuring a new network directly
from the old Credential-from-NFC design.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The contents of the WPS connection handover select message was modified
to include the Registrar public key hash instead of the credential.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new NFC connection handover design requires the AP/Registrar to
process the connection handover request message received from the
Enrollee. Add control interface commands for handling this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is more useful to be able to build a single NFC carrier record
instead of the full connection handover request message to allow
external components to decide whether to negotiate which alternative
carrier is used. This updates the carrier record contents to the new
design to include Enrollee public key hash and provides this as a
carrier record instead of full message. An external program is expected
to be used to build the full NFC connection handover message with
potentially other alternative carrier records included.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows DH key generation to be shared for other purposes than just
the case of OOB Device Password building. In addition, force the DH
public key buffer to be full 192 octets with zero padding to avoid
issues with the buffer being used in messages sent to a peer device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new Device Password ID 7 is used to indicate that NFC connection
handover is used with DH public key hash from both devices being
exchanged over the NFC connection handover messages. This allows an
abbreviated M1-M2 handshake to be used since Device Password does not
need to be used when DH is authenticated with the out-of-band
information (validation of the public key against the hash).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When both the Registrar and Enrollee public key hashes are delivered
out-of-band (in NFC connection handover), use abbreviated WPS handshake
(skip M3-M8).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since the Enrollee can now get the public key hash from the Registrar,
there is need to validate this during the WPS protocol run.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of terminating the WPS protocol immediately, go through an M2D
exchange to notify Enrollee of the public key hash mismatch.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This old Version attribute is not really needed anymore for these use
cases with the assumption that there are no existing WPS+NFC
deployments. It was removed from the WSC specification, so make the
implementation match that change.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Provide local GO channel to the P2P module so that it can be used in
messages that indicate the current operating channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This functionality is needed for other messages, too, so split the group
info building code into a separate helper function.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a QCA vendor specific nl80211 event to allow the driver to
indicate a list of frequency ranges that should be avoided due to
interference or possible known co-existance constraints. Such
frequencies are marked as not allowed for P2P use to force groups to be
formed on different channels.
If a P2P GO is operating on a channel that the driver recommended not to
use, a notification about this is sent on the control interface and
upper layer code may decide to tear down the group and optionally
restart it on another channel. As a TODO item, this could also be changed
to use CSA to avoid removing the group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This file is used as a registry of identifier assignments from the
Qualcomm Atheros OUI 00:13:74 for purposes other than MAC address
assignment. One of the first uses will be for nl80211 vendor
commands/events which is reason for the preparation change in
driver_nl80211.c
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action
frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e.,
the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Conver Public Action
GAS queries to use Dual of Public Action frame if PMF has been
negotiated with the AP to which the frame is being sent.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action
frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e.,
the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Add support for this
different category of Action frames being used for GAS. The payload
after the Category field is identical, so the only change is in using
the Category field based on what was received in the request frames. For
backwards compatibility, do not enforce protected dual to be used on the
AP side, i.e., follow what the station does.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Due to misplaced parenthesis, unprotected not-Robust Action frames
(e.g., Public Action frames) were dropped in handle_assoc() when such
frames were received during an association that had negotiated use of
PMF. This is not correct since only unprotected Robust Action frames
were supposed to be handled in this way.
This would have broken any Public Action frame use during PMF
association, but such frames were not really supposed to be used
currently (ANQP as the only possible use case should really use
protected dual option in such case).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Fix sizeof in a validity comparison of nl80211_vendor_cmd_info size. The
incorrect version happened to work on 64-bit builds due the structure
being eight octets, but this was incorrect and would not used with
32-bit builds.
Signed-hostap: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
While iterating over the stations hostapd_ctrl_iface_sta_mib()
might be called with sta == NULL. Fix this.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The new default value (from 300 to 60 seconds) makes the internal P2P
peer list somewhat faster to react to peers becoming unreachable while
still maintaining entries for some time to avoid them disappearing
during user interaction (e.g., selecting a peer for a connection or
entering a PIN).
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
A P2P Device while in the Listen state waiting to respond for the
obtained group negotiation request shall give a fair chance for other
concurrent sessions to use the shared radio by inducing an idle time
between the successive listen states. However, if there are no
concurrent operations, this idle time can be reduced.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, GO Negotiation Request frame was used to update a peer entry
if only a Probe Request from that peer had been received. However, it
would be possible, even if unlikely, for a peer to be discovered based
on receiving Provision Discovery Request frame from it and no Probe
Request frame. In such a case, the Listen frequency of the peer would
not be known and group formation could not be (re-)initialized with that
peer. Fix this by allowing the GO Negotiation Request frame to update
peer entry if the current peer entry does not include Listen or
Operating frequency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds one more case of active P2P peer detection so that
p2p_expire_peers() cannot hit a case where a GO Negotiation peer would
be removed.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The information of the peer's supported channel and operating class
is required for the driver to do TDLS off channel operations with a
compatible peer. Pass this information to the driver when the peer
station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some EAP methods can go through a step that is expected to fail and as
such, should not trigger temporary network disabling when processing
EAP-Failure or deauthentication. EAP-WSC for WPS was already handled as
a special case, but similar behavior is needed for EAP-FAST with
unauthenticated provisioning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-FAST requires pac_file to be configured, so make it clearer from the
debug output if missing configuration parameter was the reason for
EAP-FAST initialization failing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The hash return buffer was previously left uninitialized in case
externally stored password ("password=ext:...") was used. This could
result in MSCHAPv2 failure if that uninitialized memory happened to be
something else than zero.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the configuration to be temporarily invalid when
adding a new AP through SET commands followed by ENABLE. Avoid this
issue by using less strict validation on SET commands and perform full
configuration validation only on ENABLE. Use cases with configuration
file maintain their previous behavior, i.e., full validation after the
file has been read.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 792c8877c3
('P2P: Send GO Negotiation Confirm without wait').
Some drivers rely on the wait period for sending packets on the
off-channel. If the wait value is small, there's a race condition where
the driver ROC might complete before the packet was sent out. This
doesn't impede other drivers, as the wait is cancelled when a
Tx-completion arrives from the remote peer.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
The missing call to scan_action_done() may keep us off-channel for 250
ms following sending GO Negotiation Response. In case the operating
channel is different from this channel and we're GO, a race could lead
to start beaconing while off-channel. This could potentially cause the
Beacon frames to go out on incorrect channel with some drivers.
Signed-hostap: Eyal Shapira <eyal@wizery.com>
The error path in bsd_init() on struct bsd_driver_data allocation was
jumping to location where drv is dereferenced. That will crash and it is
easier to just return from the function since no cleanup steps are
needed in this case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently these three steps runs for each event.
1. get buffer size via system
2. allocate a memory for event
3. free the memory
The wpa_supplicant receives 4 events from boot to be connected.
So this patch prepare the event buffer at the init process.
I have tested wpa_supplicant on NetBSD 6.1.2.
But I could not tested hostapd because I do not have AP enabled device.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Replace channel_switch_supported flag of the
wpa_driver_nl80211_data by WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_AP_CSA inside
wpa_driver_capa.flags. It makes more sense and also can
be accessed by wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This is just like the same command in wpa_supplicant, i.e., "hostapd_cli
status driver" can be used to fetch information about the driver status
and capabilities.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PEAPv2 implementation was not fully completed and there does not seem to
be any deployments of PEAPv2 nor any clear sign of such showing up in
the future either. As such, there is not much point in maintaining this
implementation in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The standard fragment_size network parameter can now be used to
configure EAP-pwd fragmentation limit instead of always using the
hardcoded value of 1020.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The standard fragment_size network parameter can now be used to
configure EAP-IKEv2 fragmentation limit instead of always using the
hardcoded value of 1400.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Setting methodState = DONE for the case where GPSK-1 is found to be
invalid or incompatible allows EAP state machine to proceed to FAILURE
state instead of remaining stuck until AP times out the connection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
phase1 parameter 'cipher' can now be used to specify which algorithm
proposal is selected, e.g., with phase1="cipher=1" selecting AES-based
design and cipher=2 SHA256-based. This is mainly for testing purposes,
but can also be used to enforce stronger algorithms to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
One of the RFC 4137 state transitions (METHOD -> FAILURE) had been
forgotten and this could result in EAP peer method processing not
reporting failure immediately and instead, remain stuck waiting for the
connection to time out. Fix this by adding the methodState == DONE &&
decision == FAIL case to allow immediate reporting of failures.
The condition from RFC 4137 as-is would cause problems for number of the
existing EAP method implementations since they use that in places where
the final message before EAP-Failure should really be sent to the EAP
server (e.g., WSC_Done in EAP-WSC). Address this by includng eapRespData
== NULL as an additional constraint for entering FAILURE state directly
from METHOD.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e2f5a9889a was supposed to prevent
new scan request from pushing out the old one. However, it did not
really do that since eloop_deplete_timeout() returned 0 both for the
case where the old timeout existed (and was sooner) and if the old
timeout did not exist. It returned 1 only for the case where an old
timeout did exist and was larger than the new requested value. That case
used to result in wpa_supplicant_req_scan() rescheduling the timeout,
but hew code in eloop_deplete_timeout() did the exact same thing and as
such, did not really change anything apart from the debug log message.
Extend the eloop_deplete_timeout() (and eloop_replenish_timeout() for
that matter since it is very similar) to return three different values
based on whether the timeout existed or not and if yes, whether it was
modified. This allows wpa_supplicant_req_scan() to schedule a new
timeout only in the case there was no old timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new control interface command RADIO_WORK can be used by external
programs to request radio allocation slots from wpa_supplicant if
exclusive radio control is needed, e.g., for offchannel operations. If
such operations are done directly to the driver, wpa_supplicant may not
have enough information to avoid conflicting operations. This new
command can be used to provide enough information and radio scheduling
to avoid issues with such cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid concurrent P2P scan requests with any other exclusive use of the
radio by using the radio work queuing mechanism. This removes some of
the earlier workarounds that postponed scans depending on other
operations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the port status did not change or would not need to get an update
after portEnabled changes, there is no need to try to set the driver to
use the same value it is already using based on the previous state.
Remove such calls to reduce number of operations during reassociation.
In addition, this cleans up the debug log by removing unnecessary
duplicated entries.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the BSS table within wpa_supplicant is flushed, request the driver to
flush its own scan result table during the next scan. This can avoid
unexpected old BSS entries showing up after BSS_FLUSH or FLUSH command
in cases where the driver may maintain its internal cache of scan
results (e.g., cfg80211 BSS table persists at least for 15 seconds).
In addition to doing this automatically on BSS_FLUSH/FLUSH, a new SCAN
command argument, only_new=1, can be used to request a manual scan
request to do same. Though, it should be noted that this maintains the
BSS table within wpa_supplicant. BSS_FLUSH followed by SCAN command can
be used to clear all BSS entries from both the driver and
wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This debugging mechanism has now been deprecated by the control
interface commands that can be used to fetch same internal information
from hostapd in a more convenient way. Leave the empty USR1 signal
handler and configuration file parameter for backwards compatibility.
They can be removed in future versions of hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The per-STA/Supplicant state information from the EAPOL authenticator
is now available through "STA <MAC Address> eapol" command.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds TX/RX statistics and information about association into the
per-STA data that is available through the hostapd control interface. In
addition, information about the EAP method is now included with the IEEE
802.1X data.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These old driver wrappers have been removed quite some time ago, but
some of the build configuration notes were still describing how they
are configured.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Print into the debug log the list of vendor commands and events that the
driver supports. In addition, add a generic handler for vendor events.
This can be extended for each vendor/subcmd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The P2P_PRESENCE_REQ command did not give any easily available
indication of the response received from the GO. Make this more useful
by providing such response (if received) as a ctrl_iface monitor event
(P2P-PRESENCE-RESPONSE).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intval is marked le16 and should be used through proper byte order
conversion functions even if it ended up getting set correctly due to
the two operations cancelling each other.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These were somewhat more hidden to avoid direct use, but there are now
numerous places where these are needed and more justification to make
the extern int declarations available from wpa_debug.h. In addition,
this avoids some warnings from sparse.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
use_monitor=1 and force_connect_cmd=1 driver parameters can now be used
to force older monitor interface design and the connect API (SME in
driver) to increase hwsim testing coverage.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If Action frame registration in nl80211_mgmt_subscribe_non_ap() failed
for any frame type, the previous implementation skipped
nl80211_mgmt_handle_register_eloop() call. This is not desirable since
none of the Action frame types could be received and even worse, the
following nl80211_destroy_eloop_handle() call for nl_mgmt would likely
result in crashing the process due to the ELOOP_SOCKET_INVALID XOR
operation. This could be triggered at least in a P2P group interface
startup failure case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, it was possible for bss_info_handler() to end up dropping a
newer scan result entry if there were two entries with the same BSSID
and SSID (i.e., only frequency was different) and we were not associated
with either. This could happen, e.g., in some P2P use cases where device
discovery may happen on different channels. Fix this by checking the age
of the scan entries as well to prefer the most recent response.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Most of the attributes to these commands are identical and there is no
need to maintain two copies of the same functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
WPA_CIPHER_* and CIPHER_* are used for the exact same set of cipher
suites with the main difference being that the WPA_CIPHER_* version is
suitable to be used as a bitfield. Similarly, WPA_KEY_MGMT_* and
KEY_MGMT_* have similar design for AKMs. There is no need to maintain
two separate copies of the definitions since the bitfield compatible
version can be used for both needs. Get rid of the CIPHER_* and
KEY_MGMT_* versions to clean up the implementation by getting rid of
unnecessary mapping functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT was previously set only for
NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, but it should also be set when using
NL80211_CMD_COMMAND (driver-based SME) even though none of the current
non-mac80211 drivers use this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The option of handling upper layer P2P management operations within the
driver/firmware was originally planned to be used with wpa_supplicant,
but this has not really happened and there is no clear sign of this
being needed in the near term either. This functionality has not been
completed and it is certainly not being kept up-to-date or tested. As
such, it is best to remove it for now and if this or something similar
is needed in the future, it can be brought back once a clear need for it
has been demonstrated first.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
prime_len was added to the start pointer twice and because of this, the
actual y coordinate was not verified to be valid. This could also result
in reading beyond the buffer in some cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
phase1 parameters dhgroup, encr, prf, and mac can now be used to specify
which algorithm proposal is selected, e.g., with phase1="dhgroup=3
encr=1 prf=1 mac=1" selecting the mandatory-to-implement case. This is
mainly for testing purposes, but can also be used to enforce stronger
algorithms to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These information elements are not really used anywhere in hostapd or
wpa_supplicant nor is there any plan to use them. As such, there is no
need to keep the code here either, so save couple of bytes here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all
the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have
been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the
received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management
frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so
get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as
well as other management frame subtypes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to silence compiler warnings in cases where #ifdef
blocks can leave some variables or functions unused and there is no
cleaner way of avoiding the warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 88b32a99d3 added support for using
some Action frame processing in hostapd for drivers that handle most of
SME/MLME internally (it added FT, this has since be extended for SA
Query and WNM). However, this was added in a way that ended up getting
both the hostapd_rx_action() and hostapd_action_rx() called for Action
frames. This could result in an attempt to process FT, SA Query, and WNM
Action frames twice.
There is need for more significant cleanup in Action frame processing in
hostapd depending on the driver type, but as a simple step to avoid
issues, skip the hostapd_action_rx() call if hostapd_rx_action()
processed the frame.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even though this is a short timeout, it is at least theoretically
possible for the interface to be removed while waiting for
reconfiguration to start. Avoid issues with this by cancelling the
timeout on any WPS interface deinit. In theory, this should be postponed
until interface removal, but that does not fit very nicely to the
current wps_hostapd.c style.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, wps_version_number was used only to test extensibility to
newer version numbers, but it can also be used to enable testing of
older versions (1.0), e.g., to avoid hitting some 2.0 specific
validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is fine to try to cancel a registration that does not exist, so there
is no need to have the duplicated checks for eloop timeout and socket
registration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was already possible to configure hostapd and wpa_supplicant to use
FT-SAE for the key management, but number of places were missing proper
AKM checks to allow FT to be used with the new AKM.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Action frame RX report through EVENT_RX_ACTION did not indicate whether
the frame was protected or not even though that information is available
in mlme_event_mgmt(). hostapd_rx_action() has a workaround for setting
the protected flag for SA Query frames, but that did not apply for other
frames, like FT Action. This broke FT-over-DS when PMF is enabled with
newer kernel versions (i.e., the ones that do not use monitor interface
for receiving management frames).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The earlier changes to buffer EAPOL frames when not associated to avoid
race conditions (especially commit
3ab35a6603 but maybe something even before
that) broke PeerKey 4-way handshake. Fix this by using a separate check
before the race condition workaround to process PeerKey 4-way handshake
EAPOL-Key messages differently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PeerKey entries need to be removed on disassociation and this needs to
be done in a way that cancels the possibly pending eloop timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is not really needed for anything and the standard does not require
such validation step to be made for Authentication frame transmission.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be useful for displaying the current STA state and also for
determining whether some operations are likely to fail or need
additional delay.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd_drv_wnm_oper() needs to indicate an error if the driver callback
function is not implemented. Without this, the buf_len argument could
have been left uninitialized which could result in crashing the process.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to trigger the ESS Disassociation Imminent
operation from different sources.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds first steps at processing a BSS Transition Management Query on
the AP side. Mainly, the message is parsed and printed out in the debug
log and a minimal BSS Transition Management Request frame is sent as a
response. BSS Transition Management Response frame is also parsed and
details printed out in the debug log.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous version could end up calling WPA authenticator routines
even though the authenticator had not been initialized and this could
result in NULL pointer dereference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This prepares wpa_supplicant for accepting cases where the AP does not
use group addressed frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the extended key usage of the AAA server certificate indicates
that the certificate is for client use, reject the TLS handshake.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
OCSP response may not include all the needed CA certificates, so use the
ones received during TLS handshake.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The five second timeout to call wps_er_deinit_finish() could potentially
be left behind when removing the ER data based on some other event. This
could result in double-freeing of wps_er context killing the process,
e.g., if the WPS ER functionality is stopped while in the process of
unsubscribing from an AP and then restarted.
In addition, AP entries could still be present in the
er->ap_unsubscribing list when the deinit timeout hits. These entries
would still maintain HTTP context pointing to the ER which would be
freed here and as such, the following HTTP client callback could refer
to freed memory and kill the process. Fix this by freeing AP entries
from ap_unsubscribing list when ER is deinitialized from timeout even if
such AP entries have not completed unsubscription from UPnP events.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reduce race condition of the station trying to reconnect immediately
after AP reconfiguration through WPS by rescheduling the reload
timeout to happen after EAP completion rather than the originally
scheduled 100 ms after new configuration became known.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This enables more convenient protocol testing of station side
functionality in various error cases and unexpected sequences without
having to implement each test scenario within hostapd.
ext_mgmt_frame_handle parameter can be set to 1 to move all management
frame processing into an external program through control interface
events (MGMT-RX and MGMT-TX-STATUS) and command (MGMT_TX).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These files have been distributed only under the BSD license option
since February 2012. Clarify the license statements in the files to
match that to avoid confusion.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If configuration of the group key to the driver fails, move the WPA
group into failed state and indication group setup error to avoid cases
where AP could look like it is working even through the keys are not set
correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds initial parts for supporting the new GCMP-256, CCMP-256,
BIP-GMAC-128, BIP-GMAC-256, and BIP-CMAC-256 cipher suites.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If secondary channel is provided for CSA, advertise it in the Secondary
Channel Offset element in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
When CSA flow starts, store the entire struct hostapd_freq_params and
not only CS frequency as it was before. The additional freq_params are
required to advertise CS supplementary IEs such as secondary channel,
wide bandwidth CS, etc.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This allows use of structs (and not only pointers) defined in drivers.h.
Remove also some not needed forward declarations and redundant includes.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The event debouncing isn't very accurate (since it doesn't
take sub-second resolution into account), but it should use
monotonic time anyway since it doesn't care about the wall
clock.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The PBC ignore-start workaround just needs to check whether
the time is within 5 seconds, so should use monotonic time.
While at it, add a few more ifdefs to clearly separate the
code and variables needed.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
PBC sessions are just time-stamped when activated, and
eventually time out, so should use monotonic time.
While at it, make the code use os_reltime_expired().
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The eloop already tracks the expiration/lifetime, and the expiration
isn't really used, so remove it. It should otherwise have used monotonic
time, but since it's not actually used, we can remove it instead.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The RADIUS server needs to calculate uptime, which is relative
and thus should use monotonic time.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Since the RADIUS client cares about relative time (retry timeout)
only, it should use monotonic time.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The BSS table, scan timeout, and related functionality should use
monotonic time since they care about relative values (age) only.
Unfortunately, these are all connected, so the patch can't be split
further. Another problem with this is that it changes the driver wrapper
API. Though, it seems only the test driver is using this.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This should probably have used monotonic time for entry timestamps, but
as those aren't used at all right now, so just remove them entirely.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The request retry loop only retries for 5 seconds, so any time
jumps would probably not affect it much, but it should be using
monotonic time nonetheless since it only cares about duration.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Wall time jumps shouldn't affect MMIC failure/TKIP countermeasures,
so use monotonic time. Change the michael_mic_failure variable to
struct os_reltime for type-safety.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Since the PMKSA cache only uses relative time, use the monotonic time
functions instead of wall time to be correct when the clock jumps.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
For type-safety, make sta->acct_session_start a struct os_reltime
and then use monotonic time for accounting. For RADIUS reporting,
continue to use wall clock time as specified by RFC 2869, but for
the session time use monotonic time.
Interestingly, RFC 2869 doesn't specify a timezone, so the value
is somewhat arbitrary.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Do not assume the driver supports QoS Mapping, but instead, advertise
support for this only if CONFIG_INTERWORKING is defined and driver
indicates support for configuring QoS Map.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The driver_nl80211.c changes are needed to avoid compiler warnings
with two frequency attributes pointing to the same value.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If more BSSes are added in config file than are supported by the driver,
segmentation fault can appear. For this case, the interface_added flag
needs to be cleared if adding a new BSS fails.
Signed-hostap: Marek Kwaczynski <marek.kwaczynski@tieto.com>
Until now DFS was simply restarting the AP when radar was detected. Now
CSA is used to perform smooth switch to the new channel. Stations not
supporting CSA will behave as before.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This is needed for AP CSA. Since CSA must happen immediately after radar
is detected there's no time to perform CAC. Thus, radar channels must be
disabled when looking for a new channel to escape to after a radar is
detected.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Adds support for VHT by parsing bandwidth and center_freq{1,2}.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Just the usual, with a new function os_reltime_initialized()
thrown in that checks whether time has ever been retrieved
(time can't be completely zero).
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This helper functions checks whether a given entry has expired,
given the last active timestamp, the current time, and a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Based on priority, remove the connection with least priority whenever
a frequency conflict is detected.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Allow another EAP method to be tried if one of the enabled methods
fails. If all the remaining methods fail, reject connection by adding a
new METHOD_REQUEST -> FAILURE transition. Previously, this case resulted
in the state machine trying to send a message when none was available
and then waiting for a following event until timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the authentication server to be configured with a
PKCS #12 file that includes a private key, a server certificate, and a
CA certificate. This combination could result in server_cert and ca_cert
parameters not being present and that should still result in TLS context
getting initialized.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible to configure hostapd in a way that could try to
initialize a TLS-based EAP method even when TLS library context was not
initialized (e.g., due to not configuring server or CA certificate).
Such a case could potentially result in NULL pointer dereference in the
TLS library, so check for this condition and reject EAP method
initialization.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 390e489c0d extended hostapd BSS
interface removal capabilities. However, it ended up causing a
regression in wpa_supplicant P2P group interface handling. That P2P
group interface is removed through another driver_nl80211.c BSS context
and as such, the bss->added_if is not set. Fix this by verifying whether
the request is for another ifindex and if so, removing the interface
even if added_if is not marked.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some non-mac80211 drivers, such as ath6kl, support STA inactivity timer
in firmware and may not provide connected stations' idle time to the
userspace. If the driver indicates support for offloaded operation, do
not start the inactivity timer in the hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Mohammed Shafi Shajakhan <mohammed@qca.qualcomm.com>
struct beacon_data contains a lot of pointers. Make sure it gets cleared
to zero if hostapd_build_beacon_data() gets called from a path that does
not clear the structure first.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This is a mechanism used in Android to extend driver interface in vendor
specific ways. This is included only for the purpose of Android
compatibility. Proper interface commands should be used for any new
functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Android uses a vendor specific library for implementing couple of driver
interface functions. Add the wrapper code to allow that mechanism to be
used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Despite interface (and group) related sockets are not used
for control, they are created and may be left.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Check if the BSS interface has started before setting beacon.
Lack of this condition can cause segmantation fault.
Signed-hostap: Marek Kwaczynski <marek.kwaczynski@tieto.com>
A reenable of the TDLS link while the host driver is already processing
the same (due to the retransmitted M2/M3 frames) might result in a
failed TDLS setup handshake due to some host driver's implementation.
Thus, issue enable link only when the peer's TDLS status signifies no
prior link (tpk_success=0).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit de3cdf354a adding copying of the
STA's VHT capabilities into the STA entry on the AP. This was done in
allocated memory, but that new memory allocation was not freed anywhere.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Relative time shouldn't be calculated based on gettimeofday
because that clock can jump (e.g., when the time is adjusted
by the system administrator.)
On systems where that is available, use CLOCK_BOOTTIME (on
fairly recent Linux systems, this clock takes into account
the time spend suspended) or CLOCK_MONOTONIC (on Linux and
some POSIX systems, this clock is just freely running with
no adjustments.)
Reported-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The 'started' state was tracked incorrectly. It also broke DFS
as it was using hostapd_enable/disable_iface() functions.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Some devices disable use of U-NII-1 (channels 36-48) for P2P due to it
being indoor use only in number of locations. If U-NII-3 (channels
149-161) is available, try to pick a channel from that range first
during random channel selection to reduce likelihood of interoperability
issues.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random VHT channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel or 5 GHz/HT40 channel preference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random HT40 channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel or 5 GHz channel preference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random 5 GHz channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel (which is selected by default to be 1, 6, or 11).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the new p2p_channel_select() function to select a VHT channel
at random when no other preferences are in effect.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the new p2p_channel_select() function to select an HT40 channel
at random when no other preferences are in effect.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new p2p_channel_select() function can be re-used to implement
random channel selection from a set of operating classes in all
places that need such functonality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows wlantest debug log output to be directed to a file so that
RELOG command can be used to rotate files more easily than stdout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add chan_switch to the control interface of wpa_supplicant and hostapd,
and also to wpa_cli and hostapd_cli.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Build CSA settings and call the driver to perform the switch. Construct
Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames both for CSA
period and for the new channel. These frames are built based on the
current configuration. Add CSA IE in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add csa_settings struct which holds parameters for CSA. Change driver
interface for switch_channel(), so that it will receive this struct and
not only the new frequency as it was before. This allows wpa_supplicant
to provide all the required parameters (beacons, proberesp, assocresp,
CSA IE) which are required by cfg80211 implementation.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This was supposed to be a minimal sample of eloop wrapper, but it is
unclear whether this is of that much use and the file has not been kept
up-to-date. Remove this file to reduce maintenance effort. The other
eloop*.c files can be used as a starting point if something new is
needed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit eb32460029 left an unneeded
sim_type argument to scard_init(). Remove that unnecessary argument to
clean up the implementation.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Add DBus methods for TDLS operations similar to those available
for the control interface. This includes Discover, Setup, and
Teardown commands. While here, add a method to query the TDLS
link status and add a DBus method for it.
Tested with CONFIG_TDLS enabled, on a TDLS-enabled host and
peer capable of TDLS:
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "peer does not exist"
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSDiscover string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSSetup string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "connected" after TDLS completes
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSTeardown string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "peer not connected"
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
During persistent group re-invocation, GO may end up using a different
channel as the operation channel compared to what was indicated in the
invitation frames. This may break the connection if the peer device ends
up scanning the GO only on the channel from the invitation frame. Fix
this by using the negotiated channel (if available) on the GO as the
operating channel instead of the channel that was provided in the
p2p_invite command to start negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
We were not filtering the EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED events based on the
regulatory hint initiator. So wait for EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED event
after our own change was triggered even when regulatory hint initiator
was the driver. This could result in the wait for the channel list to be
updated to be terminated before the real change has occurred and as
such, old channel list remaining in use when configuring
hostapd/wpa_supplicant country parameter. Fix this by filtering the
hints according to the initiator and only regulatory hints initiated by
user will be used to stop the wait.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If hostapd was started with the interface already in AP mode, leave the
interface in AP mode on deinit instead of unconditionally forcing it to
station mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is common to build wpa_supplicant with AP mode support and it is
justifiable to clean up driver_nl80211.c by removing the conditional
build blocks based on hostapd vs. wpa_supplicant builds.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This gets rid of some ifdef HOSTAPD constructs and shares more
of the initialization code between hostapd and wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These variables were originally used in hostapd to clear HT channel
information when exiting. However, that functionality was lost with
commit f019981aee when moving to a common
code for setting the channel. Taken into account that no one seems to
have missed this functionality over the last four years, it seems safe
to drop this rather than try to fix the old hostapd behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It's not possible to get a raw private key from keystore anymore, so
this would fail every time anyway. Remove it so it doesn't confuse
anyone that looks at this code.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
The new keystore ENGINE is usable to perform private key operations when
we can't get the actual private key data. This is the case when hardware
crypto is enabled: the private key never leaves the hardware.
Subsequently, we need to be able to talk to OpenSSL ENGINEs that aren't
PKCS#11 or OpenSC. This just changes a few #define variables to allow us
to talk to our keystore engine without having one of those enabled and
without using a PIN.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
If remaining AP session timeout is less than 5 seconds
for an existing station, replenish the timeout to 5 seconds.
This allows stations to be able to recycle a dialog token
value beyond 5 seconds for GAS exchange.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
eloop_replenish_timeout() finds a registered matching
<handler,eloop_data,user_data> timeout. If found, replenishes
the timeout if remaining time is less than the requested time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
system/core/libnl_2 does not include nl_socket_set_nonblocking(), so
need to implement that to fix the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a parameter to send the overlapping BSS scan parameter
information element. This will require clients to perform
background scans to check for neigbors overlapping this
HT40 BSS. Since the implementation is incomplete it should
only be used for testing.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
If we are already connected to the selected AP with a network block
that was created based on the selected credential, do not force a
reconnection or network block update.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for additional BSSs to be added while the primary
interface is still in the process of determining channel parameters (HT
co-ex scan, ACS, DFS). Do not enable secondary interfaces in such state
immediately, but instead, wait for the pending operation on the primary
interface to complete. Once that's done, the added extra BSSs will also
be enabled in hostapd_setup_interface_complete().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reject multiple calls to hostapd_setup_bss() for any specific interface.
hostapd_cleanup() must have been called first before trying to restart a
BSS.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd_bss_deinit() takes care of freeing the associated stations and
calling hostapd_cleanup() to deinit per-BSS services.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This reverts parts of commit 390e489c0d
that tried to enable removal of the first BSS. Since that operation is
now forced to remove all BSSs, these changes are not needed. The
hostapd_if_remove() operation in hostapd_free_hapd_data() is problematic
for the first BSS since it ends up freeing driver wrapper information
that is needed later when deinitializing the driver wrapper.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since the control interface is now initialized as part of
hostapd_setup_interface(), it needs to be deinitialized on the error
path.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a secondary BSS is removed while it is waiting for the primary BSS to
complete channel setup (e.g., due to HT co-ex scan, ACS, or DFS), the
hostapd_data instance has not yet been initialized. Fix the BSS removal
code to take this special case into account and not try to deinitialize
the hostapd_data instance that has not yet been started.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The changes in commit 5592065850 to allow
any BSS to be removed were a bit too early since there are still number
of areas that use the first BSS as a special case. Especially the
driver_ops API is going to require quite a bit of cleanup before removal
of the first BSS without the other BSSes of the same radio can be done
safely.
For now, force all BSSs to be removed in case the first one is removed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This call requires a struct hostapd_data pointer and that is not really
something that the driver wrappers should be using.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like abs() result is signed and gcc warns about this when
running a build with -O0 but not with -O2.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Limit the calls to eloop_terminate() to happen only for the
initialization failure from the interfaces that we specified on the
command line. This allows hostapd process to continue operating even if
a dynamically added interface fails to start up. This allows the upper
layer software to fix a configuration error and retry.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When WFD Subelements are set, the IE in the Beacon frames of already
existing groups are not updated. This patch fixes this issue by setting
beacon_update to be 1 on WFD IE update.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The allocation was not verified to complete successfully and the
allocated memory was not freed on error paths.
Signed-hostap: Adriana Reus <adriana.reus@intel.com>
hostapd_set_freq_param() rejected the 20 MHz channel case with
vht_enabled due to the existing validation step including only 5 GHz (to
be more exact, only >= 5000 MHz). While the behavior may not be fully
defined for 2.4 GHz, we can enable this based on driver capability
advertisement to fix automatic VHT selection for P2P use cases.
mac80211_hwsim advertises VHT for 2.4 GHz band and that resulted in
failures when trying to start GO on that band with vht=1 parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1 is defined to be used for anything but 20 MHz
bandwidth, so it could be unset for 20 MHz channels. Do not use it to
override center frequency from NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ (if available)
for 20 MHz channels to avoid clearing frequency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Better share the same function for initializing control interface from
the two possible paths that can add a new interface to hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a per-BSS configuration parameter and as such, needs to be
configured to the driver from hostapd_setup_bss() instead of
hostapd_driver_init().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
DFS operations are specific to the interface (radio/wiphy), not BSS
(netdev/vif), so hostapd_iface is the appropriate element to use in
them.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If per-BSS configuration enabling did not provide a phy name, iface->phy
was left empty. It can be helpful to set this up automatically, so fill
that when initializing the interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Only scan the affected channels instead of all enabled channels when
determining whether the primary and secondary channel for HT40 needs to
be swapped. This speed up HT40 setup considerably on 5 GHz band.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hostapd is requested to set the country code and the previous country
code differs from the new one, the channel list information from the
driver may change. This change may not be instant, so wait for an
EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED event before continuing interface setup with
fetching of the channel list information. This fixes issues where the
selected channel is not available based on the previous regulatory data
and update through CRDA takes some time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Channel determination may take considerable time when ACS or DFS is
used, so it is useful to be able to observe this process through the
control interface. Move the initialization of the control interfaces to
happen before channel determination so that this can be achieved.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use hostapd_interface_init2() for all interfaces instead of the
previously used different paths for per-interface-config and
per-BSS-config cases. This moves the calls to hostapd_driver_init() and
hostapd_setup_interface() to happen after all configuration files have
been read.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While these attributes may be expected to be present always, this needs
to be verified within driver_nl80211.c since we cannot depend on the
kernel/driver working correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, ENABLE command ended up freeing the hostapd_iface context on
initialization failures, but did not even remove the interface from the
list of available interfaces. This resulted in use of freed memory with
any following operation on the same interface. In addition, removing the
interface on initialization failure does not seem like the best
approach. Fix both of these issues by leaving the interface instance in
memory, but in disabled state so that the configuration can be fixed and
ENABLE used again to enable the interface or REMOVE used to remove the
interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Number of regressions had shown up in wpa_supplicant implementation of
SAE group selection due to different integer array termination (-1 in
hostapd, 0 in wpa_supplicant) being used for SAE groups. The
default_groups list did not seem to use any explicit termination value.
In addition, the sae_group_index was not cleared back to 0 properly
whenever a new SAE session was started.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When removing and re-adding the first wlan# netdev to hostapd
dynamically, the netdev is already present and should not be removed and
re-added to maintain its state as not-added-by-hostapd so that it does
not get removed automatically.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The global control interface command "REMOVE <ifname>" can now be used
to remove a single virtual interface (BSS) without affecting other
virtual interfaces on the same radio.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The global control interface command "ADD
bss_config=<phyname>:<config file>" can now be used to add a single
virtual interface (BSS) to an interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This moves the vif added check from core hostapd to the driver wrapper
(only driver_nl80211.c uses this) and reorders operations a bit to allow
the first BSS (vif) to be removed from a multi-BSS setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The first user of monitor interface was not counted and that could
result in the monitor interface getting removed if the initial interface
was removed from a multi-BSS setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Return control flow to hostapd by calling hostapd_acs_completed()
if requesting a scan from the underlying device fails.
Signed-hostapd: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
If radar was detected single BSS is notified about it. This caused only
that single BSS to be stopped and restarted. However, due to nl80211
interface combinations the BSS was not started on a new channel and
other BSSes remained operating on the old channel.
The downside is that hostapd_disable_iface() causes deauth frames to be
sent. This is undesired but on the other hand it doesn't make sense to
create workarounds that imitate CSA's 'block tx'. For proper Tx
quiescing CSA should be properly implemented.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Decouple HT/VHT offset/center-freq calculations from channel lookup.
This will be necessary for further improvements on the DFS codebase.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
The GTK rekey offload information was sent to the driver immediately
after the 4-way handshake which ended up being before the initial group
key exchange in the case of WPA (v1). This could result in even that
initial GTK handshake being offloaded and wpa_supplicant being left in
WPA_GROUP_HANDSHAKE state. Fix this by postponing the operation to
happen only after the full set of initial EAPOL-Key exchanges have been
completed (i.e., in the existing location for WPA2 and a after the group
key handshake for WPA).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reject RELOAD control interface command if the dynamic configuration
changes have resulted into a state where the configuration is invalid.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows the configuration validation routines to be called from
src/ap/*.c for runtime updates of configuration without reprocessing the
full configuration file.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides a new option for configuring multiple virtual interfaces
(BSS) that share a single radio. The new command line parameter
-b<phyname>:<config file name> is used to define one or more virtual
interfaces for each PHY. The first such entry for a new PHY is used to
initialize the interface structure and all consecutive parameters that
have the same PHY name will be added as virtual BSS entries to that
interface. The radio parameters in the configuration files have to be
identical.
This can be used as an alternative for the bss=<ifname> separator and
multiple BSSes in a single configuration file design while still
allowing hostapd to control the PHY (struct hostapd_iface) as a group of
virtual interfaces (struct hostapd_data) so that common radio operations
like OLBC detection and HT40 co-ex scans can be done only once per real
radio.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it more convenient to move BSS configuration entries between
struct hostapd_config instances to clean up per-BSS configuration file
design.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This may be needed if the wpa_psk information for previously derived
from passphrase and either the SSID or the passphrase has changed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of duplicating the functionality and missing changes (like the
hostapd_broadcast_wep_clear() call), use the hostapd_clear_old()
function that was already used for the similar case with configuration
file reload.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Start GO with VHT support if VHT option was requested
and the appropriate channels are available.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Add the option to ask for VHT operation similarly to the way ht40 is
configured - either by adding 'vht' param to the relevant p2p_*
commands or by configuring p2p_go_vht=1 in the configuration file.
This patch only adds the configuration option (e.g., via control
interface). The actual handling of the VHT parameter (asking the driver
to use VHT, etc.) will be done by the following patch.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Later on, we'll consider the availability of these
channels when starting P2P GO with VHT support.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Mask the remote VHT capabilities with our own capabilities, similarly
to what is done for HT capabilities.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Make sure the driver supports 160/80+80 MHz VHT capabilities
before trying to configure these channels.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
VHT_CAP_BEAMFORMEE_STS_MAX, VHT_CAP_SOUNDING_DIMENSION_OFFSET, and
VHT_CAP_MAX_A_MPDU_LENGTH_EXPONENT were not defined properly (wrong
name/size). Fix that and update the hostapd.conf parsing accordingly.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Previously the Country element contained the max TX power the local
hardware was capable of. Change this to just use the regulatory limit.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
The new p2p_add_cli_chan=1 configuration parameter can be used to
request passive-scan channels to be included in P2P channel lists for
cases where the local end may become the P2P client in a group. This
allows more options for the peer to use channels, e.g., if the local
device is not aware of its current location and has marked most channels
to require passive scanning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new p2p_no_go_freq frequency range list (comma-separated list of
min-max frequency ranges in MHz) can now be used to configure channels
on which the local device is not allowed to operate as a GO, but on
which that device can be a P2P Client. These channels are left in the
P2P Channel List in GO Negotiation to allow the peer device to select
one of the channels for the cases where the peer becomes the GO. The
local end will remove these channels from consideration if it becomes
the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When we have CAC active and receive a radar event, we should ignore
CAC_ABORT event and handle channel switch in the radar event handler.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This fixes a problem when operating on non-DFS channel and receiving a
radar event for that channel. Previously, we would have decided to
switch channels.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add a table of available VHT80 channels. This table contains the first
available channel. We will also choose this first channel as the control
one.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
To avoid a problem where the beacon socket occasionally
blocks, mark any sockets on the eloop as non-blocking.
The previous patch reordered the code to never send a
command after a socket was put on the eloop, but now also
invalidate the nl handle pointer while it's on there.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Abstract the handling of sockets on the eloop to avoid
destroying sockets still on the eloop and also to allow
the next patch to mark the socket non-blocking.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The IBSS code registers the bss nl_mgmt socket for auth
frames when the join event happens, but that is too late
as then the socket is already on the eloop, which could
cause problems when other events are received at the
same time as the registration is done.
Move the auth frame registration to the initial setup
before the socket is put onto the eloop.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some driver wrappers may implement this by writing eight octets even
though IPN is only six octets. Use a separate WPA_KEY_RSC_LEN (8) octet
buffer in the call to make sure there is enough buffer room available
for the full returned value and then copy it to IPN field.
The previous implementation used the following igtk field as the extra
buffer and then initialized that field afterwards, so this change does
not fix any real issue in behavior, but it is cleaner to use an explicit
buffer of the maximum length for get_seqnum().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even though the length of this buffer is based only on locally
configured information, it is cleaner to include explicit buffer room
validation steps when adding the attributes into the buffer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
linux_br_get() was forcing null termination on the buffer, but did not
check whether the string could have been truncated. Make this more
strict by rejecting any truncation case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The allocation of new_bss and its use was separated by a lot of code in
this function. This can be cleaned up by moving the allocation next to
the use, so that this all can be within a single #ifdef HOSTAPD block.
The i802_check_bridge() call was outside type == WPA_IF_AP_BSS case, but
in practice, it is only used for WPA_IF_AP_BSS (and if used for
something else, this would have resulted in NULL pointer dereference
anyway).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If SSL_CTX_new() fails in tls_init(), the per-SSL app-data allocation
could have been leaked when multiple TLS instances are allocated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The VHT_CHANWIDTH_160MHZ case fell through to the default case and
printed out a debug message that was not supposed to be shown here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
os_strlpcy() should be used instead of os_strncpy() to guarantee null
termination. Since there are no remaining strncpy uses, remove
os_strncpy() definition.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already included in all the other calls to eap_proxy, but
somehow the get_imsi call had been forgotten.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Trying to access the SIM card details without checking if the eap_proxy
layer has been initialized can results in a crash. Address this by
sending the request for the IMSI through eapol_supp_sm.c which can
verify that eap_proxy has been initialized.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously ACS required valid survey data on all available channels.
This can however not be guaranteed. Instead of just failing, fall back
to the subset of channels that have valid ACS data.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Otherwise hostapd might hang doing nothing anymore. Propagate ACS
errors so we can fail gracefully.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
If ACS fails we still need to call hostapd_setup_interface_complete.
Otherwise hostapd will just hang doing nothing anymore. However, pass
an error to hostapd_setup_interface_complete to allow a graceful fail.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
This makes it easier to go through the P2P channel list operations in
the debug log without having to parse through the hexdump manually.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Incorrect nla_get variants were used to get event type and frequency.
Kernel passes both as u32. This caused issues on tinynl/big-endian hosts
- CAC finished was treated as radar detection and frequency was 0.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
It is possible for a vif netdev to be removed by something else than
hostapd and if that happens for a virtual AP interface, if_remove()
handler should still free the local data structure to avoid memory leaks
if something external removes a netdev.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the send_mlme->send_frame->send_frame_cmd path that could be
used when a GO sends an offchannel Action frame ended up not updating
drv->send_action_cookie. This can result in an issue with not being able
to cancel wait for the response, e.g., in invitation-to-running-group
case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes issues where a GO used offchannel-TX operation to send an
Invitation Request frame. Wait for the offchannel TX operation needs to
be stopped as soon as the Invitation Response frame has been received.
This addresses some issues where Probe Response frame from the GO
through the monitor interface may end up going out on a wrong channel
(the channel of this offchannel TX operation for invitation).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Join-a-group needs to force the current operating channel of the target
group as the frequency to use for the PD exchange. When the channel was
selected based on a BSS entry for the GO, this worked only for the first
PD Request frame while the retries reverted to a potentially different
channel based on a P2P peer entry. Fix this by maintaining the forced
channel through the PD retry sequence.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
P2P Invitation Response frame is required to include the Channel List
attribute only in Status=Success case. Skip the debug message claiming
that a mandatory attribute was not included in non-Success case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the new external_sim=1 case to be used to perform UMTS
authentication step in EAP-AKA/AKA' peer process. Following control
interface event is used to request the operation:
CTRL-REQ-SIM-<network id>:UMTS-AUTH:<RAND>:<AUTN> needed for SSID <SSID>
Response from external processing is returned with
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> UMTS-AUTH:<IK>:<CK>:<RES>
or
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> UMTS-AUTS:<AUTS>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the new external_sim=1 case to be used to perform GSM
authentication step in EAP-SIM peer process. Following control interface
event is used to request the operation:
CTRL-REQ-SIM-<network id>:GSM-AUTH:<RAND1>:<RAND2>[:<RAND3>] needed
for SSID <SSID>
For example:
<3>CTRL-REQ-SIM-0:GSM-AUTH:5e3496ce7d5863b3b09f97f565513bc3:
73f0f0bc5c47bcbed6f572d07ab74056:447b784f08de80bdc2b1e100fccbb534
needed for SSID test
Response from external processing is returned with
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> GSM-AUTH:<Kc1>:<SRES1>:<Kc2>:<SRES2>
[:<Kc3>:<SRES3>]
For example:
wpa_cli sim 0 GSM-AUTH:d41c76e0079247aa:2709ebfb:43baa77cfc8bcd6c:
0fa98dc1:a8ad1f6e30e
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new configuration parameter external_sim=<0/1> can now be used to
configure wpa_supplicant to use external SIM/USIM processing (e.g., GSM
authentication for EAP-SIM or UMTS authentication for EAP-AKA). The
requests and responses for such operations are sent over the ctrl_iface
CTRL-REQ-SIM and CTRL-RSP-SIM commands similarly to the existing
password query mechanism.
Changes to the EAP methods to use this new mechanism will be added in
separate commits.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to handle cases where the application is restarted
and the previously used local TCP port may not have been fully cleared
in the network stack.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new bss_load_test parameter can be used to configure hostapd to
advertise a fixed BSS Load element in Beacon and Probe Response frames
for testing purposes. This functionality is disabled in the build by
default and can be enabled with CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Indicate support for QoS Mapping and configure driver to update the QoS
Map if QoS Map Set elements is received from the AP either in
(Re)Association Response or QoS Map Configure frame.
This commit adds support for receiving the frames with nl80211 drivers,
but the actual QoS Map configuration command is still missing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows QoS Map Set element to be added to (Re)Association Response
frames and in QoS Map Configure frame. The QoS Mapping parameters are
also made available for the driver interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new domain_suffix_match (and domain_suffix_match2 for Phase 2
EAP-TLS) can now be used to specify an additional constraint for the
server certificate domain name. If set, one of the dNSName values (or if
no dNSName is present, one of the commonName values) in the certificate
must have a suffix match with the specified value. Suffix match is done
based on full domain name labels, i.e., "example.com" matches
"test.example.com" but not "test-example.com".
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add DFS structures/events handlers, CAC handling, and radar detection.
By default, after radar is detected or the channel became unavailable, a
random channel will be chosen.
This patches are based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Most of the DFS code is moved to a new dfs.c/dfs.h
files.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
When hostapd receives an auth frame during ACS the transmission of
the according auth response will always fail:
ACS: Automatic channel selection started, this may take a bit
[..]
send_auth_reply: send: Resource temporarily unavailable
[..]
However, a station info entry was created. Once ACS is finished
it will flush all stations even though hapd was not yet fully
initialized. This results in a segfault when trying to access
hapd->radius:
0 0x0042c1c0 in radius_client_flush_auth ()
1 0x00416a94 in ap_free_sta ()
2 0x00416cc0 in hostapd_free_stas ()
3 0x0040bce8 in hostapd_flush_old_stations ()
4 0x0040c790 in hostapd_setup_interface_complete ()
5 0x0046347c in acs_scan_complete ()
6 0x0040f834 in hostapd_wpa_event ()
7 0x0043af08 in send_scan_event.part.46 ()
8 0x00443a64 in send_scan_event ()
9 0x00443c24 in do_process_drv_event ()
10 0x004449e8 in process_global_event ()
11 0x7767d7d0 in ?? ()
Fix this by not presuming anything about the initialization state of
hapd and checking ->radius before accessing.
Signed-off-hostapd: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
In noisy environment peer may take more time to send Invitation
Response so increase Invitation Response timeout to 500 ms in success
case and also increase Invitation Request action wait time to 500 ms.
This makes the Invitation Request case use the same timeout with GO
Negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A new TDLS request shall transmit TPK M1 frame with a unique INonce.
Thus a new explicit request would fail an ongoing TDLS negotiation with
the error "TDLS: FTIE SNonce in TPK M3 does not match with FTIE SNonce
used in TPK M1" if the peer happens to receive two M1 frames before an
M3 frame. Check for the ongoing negotiation with the peer and do not
start a new one if we are already in a setup negotiation with the peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to go through the peer list when we already have a
pointer to the specific peer entry.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is called from number of locations and it is more efficient to use
a new helper function instead of wpa_tdls_disable_link() that would do
peer address search from the list of peers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Making this function be used only for external setup case simplifies the
implementation and makes core wpa_supplicant calls in ctrl_iface.c and
events.c consistent.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 8a9f58f2cc ("EAP-AKA server: Store
permanent username in session data") broke AUTS processing by skipping
new authentication triplet fetch after having reported AUTS. Fix this by
started new full authentication sequence immediately after reporting
AUTS so that the updated parameters are available for the Challenge
message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
STATUS-DRIVER command can now be used to fetch driver interface status
information. This is mainly for exporting low-level driver interface
information for debug purposes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
TX frequency gets lost when going through the monitor send MLME option
and this resulted in P2P operations like invitation from a GO failing
when the driver needs monitor socket, but would support offchannel TX.
Fix this by using frame_cmd path instead in case the monitor socket
would have been hit for action frame TX.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, IBSS mode (NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC) was left in drv->nlmode
when leaving IBSS. This causes issues for send_mlme() handler for P2P
Probe Response transmission in Listen state. Fix this by clearing nlmode
back to NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION on leaving IBSS so that following P2P
operations can be executed correctly. Previously, this was fixed only
when the next authentication/association attempt in station mode
occured.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to use the bss variable which is used only within a
wpa_printf() call that can be conditionally removed from the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends hostapd global control interface command "ADD" to use a
configuration file instead of requiring configuration to be built using
SET command.
The command format is now following:
ADD <ifname> <control path|config=<path to config>>
For example:
ADD wlan0 /var/run/hostapd
ADD wlan0 config=/tmp/hostapd.conf
When using the configuration file option, ctrl_interface parameter in
the file needs to be set to allow ENABLE command to be issued on the new
interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There was a comment about the the cleanup steps being from
hostapd_cleanup_iface(). However, the operations that cleared some
security parameters do not seem to exist elsewhere and do not make sense
here. Remove them to avoid changing configuration with DISABLE followed
by ENABLE.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes some issues where dynamic interface enable/disable cycles
could end up trying to free resources twice and crash the process while
doing so.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This can be useful in figuring out how drv->last_mgmt_freq gets set
to debug issues with P2P frames being sent on incorrect channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
printf_decode() fills in a binary buffer and returns the length of
the written data. This did not use null termination since initial
use cases used the output as a binary value. However, Hotspot 2.0
cred block values are also using this for parsing strings. Those
cases could end up without proper null termination depending on what
os_malloc() ends up getting as the memory buffer. Fix these and make
printf_decode() more convenient by forcing the output buffer to be
null terminated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When no other user preference is specified, opt to use an operating
channel that allows 5 GHz band to be used rather than 2.4 GHz.
Previously, this was already done in practice for HT40 channels since no
such channel is enabled for P2P on 2.4 GHz. This commit extends this to
apply 5 GHz preference for 20 MHz channels as well.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
H3C WA2620i-AGN AP may send an EAP packet with an undefined EAP code
10 after successful EAP authentication which restarts the EAPOL
state machine. Drop such frames with this unrecognized code without
advancing the EAPOL supplicant or EAP peer state machines to avoid
interoperability issues with the AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no point in updating the RNonce for every obtained TPK M1 frame
(e.g., retransmission due to timeout) with the same INonce (SNonce in
FTIE). Update RNonce only if a TPK M1 is received with a different
INonce (new TDLS session) to avoid issues with two setup exchanges
getting mixed and exchange failing due to mismatching nonces ("TDLS:
FTIE ANonce in TPK M3 does not match with FTIE ANonce used in TPK M2").
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Clear the peer information and disable the created link on a
failed TDLS setup negotiation. This is needed to avoid leaving
TDLS setup pending and to return to the AP path in case anything
goes wrong during the setup attempt.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some APs may incorrectly change Device Password ID from PBC in M1 to
Default PIN in M2 even when they are ready to continue with PBC. This
behavior used to work with earlier implementation in wpa_supplicant, but
commit b4a17a6ea7 started validating this
as part of a change that is needed to support NFC configuration method.
While this kind of AP behavior is against the WSC specification and
there could be potential use cases for moving from PBC to PIN, e.g., in
case of PBC session overlap, it is justifiable to work around this issue
to avoid interoperability issues with deployed APs. There are no known
implementations of PBC-to-PIN change from M1 to M2, so this should not
reduce available functionality in practice.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for the GO of a persistent group to change the PSK or
remove a client when per-client PSKs are used and this can happen
without the SSID changing (i.e., the group is still valid, but just not
for a specific client). If the client side of such persistent group ends
up trying to use an invalidated persistent group information, the
connection will fail in 4-way handshake. A new WPS provisioning step is
needed to recover from this.
Detect this type of case based on two 4-way handshake failures when
acting as a P2P client in a persistent group. A new
"P2P-PERSISTENT-PSK-FAIL id=<persistent group id>" event is used to
indicate when this happens. This makes it easier for upper layers to
remove the persistent group information with "REMOVE_NETWORK <persistent
group id>" if desired (e.g., based on user confirmation).
In addition to indicating the error cases for persistent groups, all
this type of PSK failures end up in the client removing the group with
the new reason=PSK_FAILURE information in the P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new control interface command P2P_REMOVE_CLIENT <P2P Device
Address|iface=Address> can now be used to remove the specified client
from all groups (ongoing and persistent) in which the local device is a
GO. This will remove any per-client PSK entries and deauthenticate the
device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Record all generated per-client PSKs in the persistent group network
block and configure these for the GO Authenticator whenever re-starting
the persistent group. This completes per-client PSK support for
persistent groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When using per-device PSKs, select the PSK based on the P2P Device
Address of the connecting client if that client is a P2P Device. This
allows the P2P Interface Address to be changed between P2P group
connections which may happen especially when using persistent groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to implement per-device PSK selection based on the
peer's P2P Device Address instead of P2P Interface Address.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the P2P Device Address of the Enrollee available with the PSK
records to allow P2P Device Address instead of P2P Interface Address to
be used for finding the correct PSK.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"wpa_cli p2p_set per_sta_psk <0/1>" can now be used to disable/enable
use of per-device PSKs in P2P groups. This is disabled by default.
When enabled, a default passphrase is still generated by the GO for
legacy stations, but all P2P and non-P2P devices using WPS will get
a unique PSK.
This gives more protection for the P2P group by preventing clients from
being able to derive the unicast keys used by other clients. This is
also a step towards allowing specific clients to be removed from a group
reliably without having to tear down the full group to do so.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even after listen duration is over, P2P module remained in
P2P_LISTEN_ONLY state, which is blocking station mode scans. Fix this by
stopping P2P listen explicitly to update p2p_state to IDLE when listen
duration expires.
Signed-hostap: Syed Asifful Dayyan <syedd@broadcom.com>
This adds ACS support to hostapd. Currently only survey-based
algorithm is available.
To use ACS you need to enable CONFIG_ACS=y in .config and use
channel=0 (or channel=acs_survey) in hostapd.conf.
For more details see wiki page [1] or comments in src/ap/acs.c.
[1]: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/acs
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Swisscom SIM cards do not include MNC length within EF_AD, and end up
using incorrect MNC length based on the 3-digit default. Hardcode MNC
length of 2 for Switzerland, in the same manner as it was done for
Finland.
Signed-hostap: Andrejs Cainikovs <andrejs.cainikovs@sonymobile.com>
If the device that sends the GO Negotiation Confirm becomes the GO, it
may change its operating channel preference between GO Negotiation
Request and Confirm messages based on the channel list received from us.
Previously, the peer operating channel preference was not updated in
such a case and this could result in the initial scans after GO
Negotiation using incorrect operating channel and as such, extra delay
in the connection process. Fix this by updating the operating channel
information from GO Negotiation Confirm in cases where the peer becomes
the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no higher priority preference for the operating channel,
use the first pref_chan entry as the operating channel preference over
the pre-configured channel which is not really a good indication of
preference. This changes the behavior for GO Negotiation Request frame
operating channel preference value in cases where p2p_pref_chan list is
set.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new control interface event message is used to indicate when
both 4-way handshakes have been completed with a new IBSS peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds survey dump support for all frequencies
and for specific desired frequencies. This will later
be used by ACS code for spectrum heuristics.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This splits up the channel checking upon initialization into a few
helpers. This should make this a bit easier to follow. This also paves
the way for some initial ACS entry code.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Interfaces that take one or two seconds to reconfigure the link after we
set IFF_ALLMULTI or after we bring the interface up were dropping the
initial TX EAPOL packet which caused excessive delays in authentication.
This change applies to FreeBSD/DragonFly only.
Signed-hostap: Rui Paulo <rpaulo@FreeBSD.org>
Add additional input verification for the frequency parameter in
p2p_group_add (and other P2P operations for that matter). Without this
verification invalid freq could be set and not handled properly.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
According to WSC specification (Ver 2.0.2, section 8.3), RF Bands
attribute should be set to the specific RF band used for the current
message. Add an option to set wanted band in wps_build_rf_bands() and
add a callback to get the current band from wpa_supplicant and hostapd.
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
It is possible that when trying to remove a dynamically added interface,
changing its type to station mode is not possible (since the kernel does
not support so in its interface combinations).
Since P2P interfaces are always dynamically added, avoid changing their
type to station in the deinit_ap() and deinit_p2p_client() nl80211
callbacks, assuming that the interface is about to be removed.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The pad field in the RRB messages is unused, but it should be
initialized to avoid sending out arbitrary data from stack. This was
also generating number of valgrind complaints about uninitialized memory
accesses in local FT tests.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 8e12685c43 replaced call to
nl80211_mgmt_unsubscribe() on the deinit path with a
wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode() call. This is not enough to unregister the
bss->nl_mgmt read socket in all cases. Fix this by unconditionally
unsubscribing from the nl80211 events after having change mode to
station.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
drv->assoc_freq was not updated during the connect command (neither
during the command's invocation nor after getting the event) unlike with
auth/assoc case where assoc_freq is updated. This resulted in
nl80211_get_link_noise() (and any other function for that matter) using
the improper drv->assoc_freq value with drivers that use the connect
API. Fix this by updating drv->assoc_freq on connect command and when
fetching the frequency from the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Stop AP command can be used by the driver as an event to indicate that
AP mode has stopped operation. WLAN driver may have encountered errors
that has forced the driver to report this event or concurrent operations
on virtual interfaces may have forced AP operation to be stopped. When
in P2P GO mode, wpa_supplicant uses this event to remove P2P group to
keep in sync with the driver state.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A transmission failure of the TDLS Setup Request frame (TPK Handshake
M1) results in no further retries and the peer entry being left in state
where all TDLS Setup Request frames from the peer with higher address
would be rejected, thus always resulting in a failure to establish a
TDLS link. Handle the failures in transmission by disabling the link
immediately to ensure the traffic to the peer goes through the AP. This
commit also handles similar transmision failures for TPK Handshake M2
and M3 frames (TDLS Setup Response and Confirm).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The nl80211 command for setting the TX index does not distinguish TDLS
vs. AP key and as such, the driver would not know what this set TX key
index operation is doing in the TDLS case. This could result in the TX
key index for AP being changed instead if static WEP is used in the AP
connection. Fix the issue by not setting TX key index when configuring a
TDLS key.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not used anymore after the previous commits that changed the
driver interface to use number of supported concurrent channels instead
of this flag.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Previously, drivers only reported if they support multiple concurrent
channels, but did not report the maximum number of supported channels.
Add this reporting to the driver capabilities and add the implementation
to driver_nl80211.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
In order to correctly handle IBSS/RSN, wpa_supplicant has to register
for any incoming Authentication frmae to properly react when those are
received.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
If the frequency is not specified the frame is now sent over
the channel used by the current BSS.
This will also log the payload of each sent CMD_FRAME.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
[antonio@open-mesh.com: commit message reworded]
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
The static WEP keys have to be configured for the new VLAN
interface that is created for a 4addr WDS peer, not doing so
breaks WEP functionality in nl80211/4addr based WDS links.
Signed-hostap: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows wpa_supplicant to associate to an AP that has VHT BSS
membership selector set to indicate VHT support is required for the BSS.
Without the patch it was impossible to connect to, e.g., hostapd-based
AP that has require_vht=1. wpa_supplicant was complaining with:
hardware does not support required rate 63.0 Mbps
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
In a AP/STA concurrent setup, if the STA interface is continually
scanning, trying to connect to a network, the AP interface
is basically broken since beaconing would be erratic.
This option can be used in a WDS setup where one AP acts as a
Client/AP-Repeater. The Repeater AP interface has to start beaconing
only after the Client interface has established a WDS link with the
"Root AP".
Signed-hostap: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
Compiling hostapd with VHT enabled on a big endian machine resulted in
an undefined symbol error. Fix this by defining the missing macro.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Previously, there could be two disconnection events in core
wpa_supplicant when going through a case of wpa_supplicant-requested
disconnection with a driver that implements SME internally. This could
result in undesired behavior when a disconnection is followed by a new
connection attempt before the extra event has been received (e.g.,
during fast reassoc or WPS provisioning). Avoid such issues by ignoring
locally generated disconnect events after requesting cfg80211 to
disconnect.
This makes the previously used ignore_next_local_disconnect more
consistent by setting the variable within
wpa_driver_nl80211_disconnect() so that both callers get the same
behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Commit 3962b65858 removed the Xcode
project files, but missed the defines in build_config.h. Remove these
since there are no users for them in the current snapshot.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new server_id parameter in hostapd.conf can now be used to specify
which identity is delivered to the EAP peer with EAP methods that
support authenticated server identity.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check that SSL_clear_options and SSL_CTX_clear_options are defined
before using them to avoid compilation failures with older OpenSSL
versions that did not include these macros.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since the P2P_DEVICE support indication was added to kernel before
everything was working properly, there may be kernel versions in use
with the new mechanism breaking P2P functionality (especially with
mac80211_hwsim). For now, disable P2P_DEVICE support by default and
allow it to be enabled with driver_param=p2p_device=1 in the
configuration file. This default behavior may be changed in the future
once the kernel issues has been resolved in stable releases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Another function that needs the wdev id when P2P management is done
using the P2P_DEVICE interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
With P2P Device support there will be two interfaces with their
own MAC address. The P2P Interface Address must be unique so verify
it is.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The phy name was determined using /sys/class/net/<ifname> but the P2P
Device is not listed there since it does not have an associated net
device. This patch changes name determination to obtain the name from
the wiphy information provide by nl80211.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P Device the netlink message should have wdev identifier
instead of the interface index. This fixes a failure which occurred
executing the P2P_GROUP_ADD command.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
When using OpenSSL with TLS-based EAP methods, wpa_supplicant can now be
configured to use OCSP stapling (TLS certificate status request) with
ocsp=1 network block parameter. ocsp=2 can be used to require valid OCSP
response before connection is allowed to continue.
hostapd as EAP server can be configured to return cached OCSP response
using the new ocsp_stapling_response parameter and an external mechanism
for updating the response data (e.g., "openssl ocsp ..." command).
This allows wpa_supplicant to verify that the server certificate has not
been revoked as part of the EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS/FAST handshake before
actual data connection has been established (i.e., when a CRL could not
be fetched even if a distribution point were specified).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When P2P Device is used as P2P management interface the creation of the
P2P group interface fails because MAC address retrieval fails for the
P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P an interface may be created for the P2P client/group. The
create request is done on the P2P management interface, which may
be a P2P Device interface. In that case it needs to use the wdev_id.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
In order to get a P2P-DEVICE-FOUND event the supplicant needs to
see a peer device during SEARCH and LISTEN phase. The SEARCH
phase does a scan so obtaining the scan results for the P2P Device
interface needs to be supported, i.e., use the wdev_id.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P Device the MAC address is determined upon .init2(). The
wpa_s for this interface retrieves this address in
wpa_supplicant_update_mac_addr() using the .get_mac_addr() callback.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The function setting the interface mode also handles management
frame subscription. Rework it so subscription is done for the
P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The driver uses linux_set_iface_flags() in several places. Introduce and
use i802_set_iface_flags() which also works for P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The .deinit() closes netlink for P2P Device. Before doing that remove
the P2P Device interface that was created by wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
Add specific handler for creating the P2P Device to store the wdev_id as
this type of interface does not have an interface index.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
To support Android the kernel may have a "p2p0" netdev for a P2P Device
even though this isn't very useful, but Android requires a netdev. To
support this in the supplicant, if the interface mode is P2P_DEVICE,
re-set it to the same instead of STATION mode.
Note that this is only possible with a kernel that creates a
netdev for the P2P Device wdev.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add an option to pass a handler to nl80211_create_iface() and
nl80211_create_interface_once() that will be called after receiving the
message from the kernel. This handler will add the option to process the
message in different ways for different interfaces.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Add wdev_id to i802_bss. wdev_id_set indicates whether this id is
available. Use wdev_id if assigned, instead of ifindex. Use wdev_id for
events that come from the kernel to identify the relevant interface.
This commit does not assign wdev_id value for the BSS yet, i.e., this is
only preparation for the value to be used in a future commit.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Check the supported interfaces attribute to identify support for
a dedicated P2P Device interface type. If set, update the driver
capabilities flag to notify the supplicant.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Rename is_p2p_interface() to is_p2p_net_interface() since it used to
identify network P2P interfaces to disable 802.11b rates on them.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Sometimes an interface name that cannot be resolved is given to the
set_key function, so print the ifname in addition to the ifidx.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, hostapd_get_vlan_id_ifname() is used to determine if a given
vlan is valid *and* to actually determine the interface. This leads to
wpa_set_keys() sometimes setting the key on the wildcard interface name,
which does not make sense.
This patch therefore adds hostapd_vlan_id_valid() and makes
hostapd_get_vlan_id_ifname() not return a wildcard interface.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, struct hostapd_vlan is a per-BSS data structure which
also contains informations about whether to remove the bridge
or clear wlan / tagged-vlan interface from the bridge.
In a multi-interface multi-BSS setup, this can lead to the following
race condition:
1. wlan0 creates VLAN A, sets DVLAN_CLEAN_BR and DVLAN_CLEAN_VLAN_PORT
2. wlan1 creates VLAN A, does not set DVLAN_CLEAN_BR and
DVLAN_CLEAN_VLAN_PORT as already there
3. wlan0 removes VLAN A, removes tagged-interface from the bridge
but not the bridge.
Now wlan1 VLAN A is unusable due to the missing uplink.
4. wlan1 removes VLAN A, does not cleanup
Solution:
This requires an inter-BSS inter-interface data structure to track the
bridge / bridge port usage within hostapd. This data structure could
also be used to track any other device-has-been-created-by-hostapd
information or when regarding interface freeing.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently by default, all BSS share the bridge brvlan%d.
While this is sane when no tagged-interface is given, this
is insane when different tagged interfaces are given, as
it would result in bridging those tagged interfaces.
This patch therefore uses br%s%d with %s=tagged_interface
and %d=VLAN ID as bridge name when a tagged-interface is given.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, when different BSS using different tagged vlan
interfaces, they are forced to share the bridge brvlan#,
which is not desirable.
This patch fixes this by making the bridge name configurable.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add AVG_RSSI report to the signal_poll command if it is reported by
the kernel.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add prints for kernel event, including the event ID and event string.
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The ext_supp_rates passed to merge_byte_arrays would be invalid if not
advertized by the TDLS peer. Thus, validate the argument to avoid
crashes in such cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If AP mode SME/MLME within wpa_supplicant is used for processing Probe
Request frames in GO mode, drop Probe Request frames that include only
802.11b rates per P2P spec section 2.4.1.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Upon association, disable the timer that removes the dummy STA. This
timer caused the STA that associates within 5 seconds of doing an ANQP
query to disassociate, thinking it's a dummy STA. Similar call was
already there for the SME/MLME-in-hostapd case in handle_auth(), but the
SME-in-driver case was not previously addressed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is not much use for enabling WPA without WPA2 nowadays since most
networks have been upgraded to WPA2. Furthermore, the code size savings
from disabling just WPA2 are pretty small, so there is not much
justification for maintaining this build option. Remove it to get rid of
undesired complexity.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit ae8535b6e1 added a new function
wpa_sm_pmf_enabled() which is called from WNM code without ifdefs.
Define a dummy wrapper for this function to fix build if WPA2 is
disabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 4033935dd9 updated
pmksa_cache_flush() function arguments, but forgot to update the wrapper
function for cases where WPA2 or EAP has been disabled in the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In a noisy enviromment, some peers can be slow to respond to the
invitation request frames which may lead to unnecessary state timeout.
Increase this timeout to 350 ms to improve the probabilty of
successfully receiving the invitation response frames.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed for TDLS with VHT to allow partial AID to be set
correctly for the direct link frames. cfg80211 validation rules
prevented NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID from being used for this in set_station
case, so the new attribute is used instead.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit b4a17a6ea7 added support for the
WPS Registrar to change the Device Password based on WSC specification
design. However, this added validation for Registrar behavior which
resulted in preventing a common P2P use case from working. Relax the
validation rules for builds with P2P enabled to allow the Enrollee (P2P
client) accepting M1/M2 changes in Device Password Id between Default
and Registrar-specified PIN.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like cfg80211 can deliver a deauth/disassoc event during some
roaming cases while we are already in progress with a new
authentication/association. This happens at least with FT protocol.
Avoid issues with such disconnection event resulting in core
wpa_supplicant stopping the new connection attempt by tracking
auth/assoc BSSID more carefully within driver_nl80211.c and filtering
out events that do not apply for the current AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The Michael MIC TX and RX keys needs to be swapped in the FT case just
like in all other TKIP key configuration cases. This fixes issues where
TKIP as group cipher resulted in Michael MIC failures being detected for
each received group-addressed frame after FT protocol use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up debug log by not including comments about failed
operations in case the operation is known to fail due to not being
supported by the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Enable MAC address based ACL for the drivers which advertise
this capabilty with NL80211_ATTR_MAC_ACL_MAX. Either of blacklist
or whitelist is supported, though, not simultaneously.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
Define a proper event prefix and include additional information to allow
ESS Dissassociation Imminent event to be used in a wpa_cli action
script.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed to avoid allowing the STA to reconnect using a cached
PMKSA. ESS disassoc imminent notification is normally used to indicate
that the STA session will be terminated and as such, requiring full
authentication through the authentication server after this is needed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When STA interface is connected and P2P interface gets invited in a
different channel from previous P2P group, the invitiation would fail
because of no common channel found. Fix this by using different logic
when device support multi channel concurrency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit c3fea27274 added a call to clear
all other PMKSA cache entries for the same network if the PMKSA cache
entry of the current AP changed. This was needed to fix OKC cases since
the other APs would likely use the new PMK in the future. However, this
ended up clearing entries in cases where that is not desired and this
resulted in needing additional full EAP authentication with networks
that did not support OKC if wpa_supplicant was configured to try to use
it.
Make PMKSA cache entry flushing more limited so that the other entries
are removed only if they used the old PMK that was replaced for the
current AP and only if that PMK had previously been used successfully
(i.e., opportunistic flag was already cleared back to 0 in
wpa_supplicant_key_neg_complete()). This is still enough to fix the
issue described in that older commit while not causing problems for
standard PMKSA caching operations even if OKC is enabled in
wpa_supplicant configuration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
TDLS responder STA used to retransmit the TDLS Setup Response after 5
seconds if the TDLS Setup Confirm is not received. The initiator would
have enabled the TDLS link and started transmitting the data to the peer
on the TDLS link after transmitting the TDLS Setup Confirm frame. If the
TDLS Setup Confirm frame is not received by the receiver, the
transmissions from the initiator on the direct link would get failed for
the TDLS link not getting enabled on the receiver. This commit reduces
the data delivery failure duration by shortening the retry time of the
TDLS Setup Response frames. The retry limit of the TDLS Response frame
also is increased to ensure that the peer does not miss the frames in
the reduced time period.
Signed-hostap: Sunil Dutt <duttus@codeaurora.org>
The hostapd_cli ess_disassoc command now takes three arguments (STA MAC
address, timeout in ms, URL) and the STA is disconnected after the
specified timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These events are sent as a special case to both the group interface and
"parent interface" (i.e., the interface that was used for managing P2P
negotiation). The latter is not really correct event, so get rid of it
with the new global control interface design where there is no need to
support legacy upper layer implementations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace direct wpa_msg() calls with p2p_dbg(), p2p_info(), and p2p_err()
calls that use a new debug_print() callback to handle actual debug
printing outside the P2P module.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This removes wpa_ctrl.h dependency from src/p2p/* and makes the P2P
events more consistent, i.e., everything that is aimed for upper layer
processing from the wpa_supplicant control interfaces is generated in
p2p_supplicant.c.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function can be used instead of wpa_msg() and wpa_msg_ctrl() to
indicate that an event is not specific to a network interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The wpa_supplicant global control interface parameter can now be used to
explicitly specify an abstract UNIX domain socket (Linux specific
extension) with "@abstract:" prefix and an Android control socket with
"@android:" prefix.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow invitation exchange to update operating channel selection after
peer channel list has been received similarly to how GO negotiation was
handled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new control interface command can be used to send a
BSS Transition Management Query frame to the current AP.
Signed-hostap: Vinayak Kamath <vkamat@codeaurora.org>
The HIST_ENTRY and its variables are allocated within libreadline, so
they won't have the WPA_TRACE special header and cannot be freed with
os_free(). Use free() to avoid issues during wpa_cli termination if any
of the new commands added to the history are to be removed (e.g.,
set_network could include a password).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 97279d8d1a started filtering MLME
frame events based on Address 1 (destination) field. This works fine for
frames sent to us, but it did filter out some corner cases where we
actually want to process an event based on a frame sent by us. The main
such case is deauthentication or disassociation triggered by something
external to wpa_supplicant in the system. Fix this by accepting events
for frames where either Address 1 or 2 (transmitter) matches the
interface address.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Store context for each tls_init() caller, so events are generated for
the correct wpa_s instance. The tls_global variable is retained for
older OpenSSL implementations that may not have app-data for SSL_CTX.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This can be used to stop AP mode beaconing temporarily, e.g., in
response to a radar detected event.
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
DFS implementation requires to run an eventloop while monitoring
the Channel Availability Check (CAC). After that, the "real" event
loop is started, and should not fail doing so.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
The reason code for the teardown request is overwritten for open
mode. This commit removes the code that does so by reverting parts
of commit 0cb12963b6.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The use of AID=1 for the nl80211 dummy STA case is specific to the
driver (cfg80211), so better move this into the driver wrapper instead
of generic TDLS implementation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's AID is required for the driver to
construct partial AID in VHT PPDU's. Pass this information to the driver
during add/set station operations (well, as soon as the information is
available, i.e., with set station operation currently).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
currbuf_valid needs to be cleared when an old command from history is
processed to avoid leaving a bogus entry that makes history_prev() skip
the last entry in history.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a C compiler extension and not needed, so replace with standard
compliant way of calculating the pointer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit df2f9ec6b2.
The current AOSP snapshot for JB includes nla_put_u32(), so this is not
needed anymore and is also causing linking issues due to duplicated
definition.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since "pairwise" is defined as an integer, the current assignment leads
to it having the value 0 or 8, which is a bit strange in debug output:
WPA: Send EAPOL(version=2 secure=1 mic=1 ack=1 install=1 pairwise=8
kde_len=46 keyidx=2 encr=1)
Use !!(...) to normalize it to 0 or 1.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
For some testing it can be useful to force the Key MIC in group
EAPOL-Key frames to be corrupt. Add an option to allow setting a
probability for corrupting the Key MIC and use it in the WPA code,
increasing the first byte of the MIC by one to corrupt it if desired.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
In case that NL80211_PROTOCOL_FEATURE_SPLIT_WIPHY_DUMP is supported,
wiphy_info_handler() is called several times, where
NL80211_ATTR_MAX_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL_DURATION is present only in one
of these calls. Thus capa->max_remain_on_chan is overridden in
all other calls.
Fix it so the default value is set only after all the wiphy info was
received.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
nl80211 has obsoleted WEXT as the preferred kernel interface for
controlling wireless drivers. Update wpa_supplicant driver interface
list order so that nl80211 gets used first if both nl80211 and wext
interfaces are included in the build. In addition, update README to
reflect the fact that WEXT is obsolete.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"WPS_ER_START ifname=<interace>" can now be used to force a specific
interface to be used for UPnP operations. This is especially useful for
automated test cases where the lo interface can now be used easily to
perform ER operations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There are quite a few places in the current implementation where a nul
terminated string is generated from binary data. Add a helper function
to simplify the code a bit.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
My APs generate their configuration on their own using a different
number of (vlan-enabled) bss. Currently, all my vlan_file files consist
of a single line: the wildcard line. Configuration file generation would
be easier, if the hostapd configuration file would not depend on those
simple vlan_file files.
This patch removes the need for those one-line files by using the
<device>.<vlan> naming scheme if no vlan_file is given (or that file is
empty). This should not break any existing setup, as using dynamic_vlan
with no vlan configured does not make sense anyway.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
When a specific out-of-band Device Password is enabled, it can be useful
to be able to advertise that in the selected registrar information.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
All P2P use cases are required to use the global operating table and
there is no need to need to try to maintain some backwards compatibility
with country code -specific values. Clean up the implementation by
removing the unnecessary country parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reset ft_completed if STA receives deauthentication
between FT reassoc success and the subsequent initial
mobility authentication and association.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit fb8984fd6f added a mechanism to
skip the Listen state when the peer is expected to be waiting for us to
initiate a new GO Negotiation. However, this flag was set when building
the GO Negotiation Response frame with status 1 regardless of whether we
managed to send that frame or peer receive it. This could result in GO
Negotiation failures in cases where the peer did not receive the
response and Listen channels of the devices were different. Fix this by
setting the flag only after TX status indicating success has been
received.
This fixes frequent failures shown for the test_grpform_pbc hwsim test
case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
We should not call getSessionID method if it's not provided. This fixes
a regression from commit 950c563076 where
EAP methods that did not implement getSessionId resulted in NULL pointer
dereference when deriving the key.
Signed-off-by: Shijie Zhang <shijiez@qca.qualcomm.com>
When Action frame TX is postponed until a pending p2p_scan completes,
there may be additional operations that need to be continued after the
postponed Action frame TX operation completes. Fix this by starting
pending operation (if any) from TX status event for after_scan_tx
frames.
This fixes common errors seen with the test_discovery hwsim test case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add "EAPLogoff" and "EAPLogon" interface DBus commands which
parallel the "logoff" and "logon" wpa_ctrl commands which terminate
and restart EAP authentication. Slightly enhance the "logon" case
by expiring any running "startWhile" timer.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
In order to test clients in scenarios where APs may (randomly)
drop certain management frames, introduce some testing options
into the hostapd configuration that can make it ignore certain
frames. For now, these are probe requests, authentication and
(re)association frames.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This option can be used only for global parameters that are not going
to be changed from settings.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Iliyan Malchev <malchev@google.com>
Dmitry reported that the kernel could no longer parse the
scheduled scan attributes correctly after my patch to use
nla_nest_start/nla_nest_end. The reason is that the wrong
attribute is closed I accidentally made it close the full
scan config instead of just the SSID match set.
Reported-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Harmonize EAP status events over control interface to provide same
functionality as existing D-Bus callback.
Signed-hostap: Chris Hessing <chris.hessing@cloudpath.net>
A kernel commit ("mac80211: fix FT roaming") started validating that the
STA entry is marked associated when adding a key. While this is needed
to fix some FT use cases with hardware crypto, it has a side effect of
breaking TDLS key configuration. Work around this by trying to
re-configure the key for the direct link after the STA entry has been
set with all information. In addition, try to tear down the link if
anything goes wrong in key configuration (if both attempts fail) or
enabling the link in the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"WPS_NFC_CONFIG_TOKEN <WPS/NDEF> <network id>" can now be used to build
an NFC configuration token from a locally configured network.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the WPS ER commands that previously accepted only UUID as
an identifier for an AP to use either UUID or BSSID for this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wps_build_public_key() takes the dh_ctx into use and another attempt to
use the same DH keys fails with wps->dh_ctx being set to NULL. Avoid
this by using the DH parameters only if dh_ctx is valid. This fixes
cases where a use of local pre-configured DH keys followed by an
operating using peer DH keys would faild due to unexpected attempt to
use local keys again.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some extended capabilities (I'm currently interested in "Operating Mode
Notification" for VHT) are implemented by the kernel driver and exported
in nl80211. Use these in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The new wps_independent=1 configuration parameter can be used to remove
interfaces from the shared hostapd process WPS control (i.e., to apply
WPS operations only to a subset of interfaces instead of all).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows WPS to update AP configuration in the case no hostapd
configuration file is used (i.e., dynamic configuration through the
control interface).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of allocating a new message and then moving that into
the message being built, use nla_nest_start() and put the data
into the message directly.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
As per P2P specification v1.2: "The P2P Group Info attribute shall be
omitted if there are zero connected P2P Clients."
Do not add the attribute if there are not connected peers.
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanya.mgit@gmail.com>
When the OS is out of random bytes in SM_STATE(WPA_PTK, AUTHENTICATION2)
in ap/wpa_auth.c, hostapd sends the sm to state DISCONNECT without
clearing ReAuthenticationRequest, resulting in an infinite loop.
Clearing sm->ReAuthenticationRequest using gdb fixes the running hostapd
instance for me. Also sm->Disconnect = TRUE should be used instead of
wpa_sta_disconnect() to make sure that the incomplete ANonce does not
get used.
Fix this issue by resetting sm->ReAuthenticationRequest even if the STA
gets disconnected and use sm->Disconnect instead of
wpa_sta_disconnect().
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
A non-HT capable AP on any channel could have triggered us to enable
protection regardless of own operating channel if the driver delivered
Beacon frames from other channels. The channel detection in ap_list is
not exactly ideal, but most cases can be handled by checking ap->channel
against the currently configured channel (or secondary channel in case
of HT40).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This iter_next/iter_prev pointers were not really used for anything, so
get rid of the unnecessary complexity in the AP list maintenance.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 6b56cc2d97 added a possible call to
p2p_reset_pending_pd() prior to checking config_methods match between
our request and peer response. That reset call could clear
dev->req_config_methods and as such, result in unexpected
P2P-PROV-DISC-FAILURE report here even in cases where the peer accepts
the provision discovery. Fix this by using a local copy of the
req_config_methods variable.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new -G<group> command line argument can now be used to set the group
for the control interfaces to enable cases where hostapd is used without
a configuration file and the controlling program is not running with
root user privileges.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Enhance TDLS Setup Request processing to support both external and
internal TDLS setup for the case where concurrent TDLS initialization
results in the TDLS Setup Request from the peer getting accepted.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_tdls_peer_free() ended up getting called after some of the
parameters from the TDLS Setup Request frame were copied into the struct
wpa_tdls_peer information. This could result in continuing with cleared
information in case the new exchange was the one that is used in
concurrent initialization case or if this is to re-negotiated an
existing TDLS link. The driver would not be provided with all the peer
capabilities correctly in such case.
Fix this by moving the existing_peer check to happen before the
information from the TDLS Setup Request frame is copied.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we accept the peer TPK M1 after having sent our TPK M1, we need to
reject TPK M2 from the peer to avoid going through two TDLS setup
exchanges.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In some cases where the ack for Invitation response is lost,
the device is stuck in invited state but the peer device starts
GO. In line with the implementation of Negotiation Confirm,
assume invitation response was actually received by the peer
even though ack was not reported.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit b52f084cfa introduced a mechanism
for adding arbitrary vendor-specific elements into the Beacon and Probe
Response frames. However, this information was not added to the separate
buffers used for specifying Beacon and Probe Response IEs for drivers
that build the frames internally. Add vendor_elements to these values,
too, to support such drivers in addition to drivers that use the full
Beacon tail/head buffers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the wiphy information is split, there's no guarantee that the
channels are processed before the bitrates; in fact, with the current
kernel it happens the other way around. Therefore, the mode information
isn't set up correctly and there's no 11g mode.
Fix this by doing the 11b/11g determination as part of the
postprocessing.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Previously, P2P_PD_DURING_FIND state was scheduled for 200 ms and the
P2P state was not change until that timeout regardless of whether the PD
Response for recieved or not. There is no need to wait for that timeout
if the response is received, so allow the next operation to be performed
immediately after the response has been processed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to understand how scan operations and events occur
when multiple interfaces is being controlled by a single wpa_supplicant
process.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a driver capability flag for drivers which support IBSS mode and set
it for nl80211 drivers which have set the NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC.
Add a new option "modes" to "get_capability" which will return "AP" and
"IBSS" if the corresponding capability flags are set.
The idea is that this can be used for UIs to find out if the driver
supports IBSS mode.
Signed-hostap: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org>
Clear WLAN_STA_ASSOC_REQ_OK, otherwise no Class 3 frame will be sent to
the disconnected STA in response to data frames.
Signed-hostap: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
If a peer replies to persistent group invitation with status code 8
(unknown group), remove the peer from the p2p_client_list if we are the
GO or remove the persistent group if we are the P2P client since it
looks like that the peer has dropped persistent group credentials and
the provisioning step needs to be executed again.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 50285f5ca8 changed number of rules
in channel selection and among other things, it broke the design where
the currently used operating channel on a virtual interface that is
shared by the same radio is preferred to avoid costs related to
multi-channel concurrency. Fix this regression by making the P2P module
aware of the shared channel and using that preference as the highest
priority when re-selecting the channel during negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 50285f5ca8 ended up forcing channel
re-selection in number of cases where the peer would actually have
accepted our initial preference. Fix the parts related to best channel
information by using best_freq_overall as the highest priority and by
skipping the band changes if the peer supports the channel that we
picked since these were based on the assumption that
p2p_reselect_channel() is called only if the peer could not accept our
initial choice which is not the case anymore.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the previously started setup is terminated in case both peers
initiate TDLS link at more or less the same time, disable the old link
to allow the dummy station entry to be deleted from cfg80211 so that a
new entry can be added for the setup direction that will be allowed to
proceed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add NL80211_CMD_UPDATE_FT_IES to support update of FT IEs to the
WLAN driver. Add NL80211_CMD_FT_EVENT to send FT event from the
WLAN driver. This will carry the target AP's MAC address along
with the relevant Information Elements. This event is used to
report received FT IEs (MDIE, FTIE, RSN IE, TIE, RICIE).
Signed-off-by: Deepthi Gowri <deepthi@codeaurora.org>
It is possible for a P2P client to connect to an operating group without
exchanging any Probe Request/Response frames that would allow the GO to
discover the peer. To make sure there is a P2P peer entry at the GO, try
to add the peer information based on P2P IE in (Re)Association Request
frame.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add support for VHT capability overrides to allow testing connections
with a subset of the VHT capabilities that are actually supported by
the device. The only thing that isn't currently supported (by mac80211
and this code) is the RX/TX highest rate field.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This implements support for the new NL80211_ATTR_SPLIT_WIPHY_DUMP in
nl80211 to handle wiphy information that cannot fit in one message.
Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Signed-hostap: Dennis H Jensen <dennis.h.jensen@siemens.com>
The peer commit element needs to be validated to pass one of the steps
listed in IEEE 802.11, 11.3.5.4:
scalar-op(r, ELEMENT) = 1 modulo p
Similar step was present for ECC groups, but was missing for FFC groups.
This is needed to avoid dictionary attacks.
Thanks to Michael Roßberg and Sascha Grau for reporting this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is clearer to keep all the validation steps described in IEEE 802.11
11.3.5.4 in a single location instead of splitting this between the
parsing and processing functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Peer device includes its list of allowed operating channels in the
Invitation Response frame. When we are becoming the GO, use that list
from the peer to filter out acceptable channels to avoid selecting a
channel that the peer is unable to use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When re-invoking a persistent group in P2P client role, the new
pref=<MHz> parameter can now be used with the p2p_invite command to
indicate a preferred operating frequency. Unlike the older freq=<MHz>
parameter, this leaves GO an option to select another channel (from our
supported channels) if the GO cannot accept the channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If multi channel concurrency is supported, we have to populate the
p2p_channels with list of channels that we support. Use the same design
that was previously added for GO Negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The VHT IE struct just has an opaque 8-byte array for the MCS
set, make it more expressive by explicitly naming the pieces.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Commit fb8984fd6f cleared wps_method to
WPS_NOT_READY in p2p_stop_find_for_freq() as an attempt to clear
authorization when a group formation is cancelled. However, this code
path is hit also in cases where the user did not actually cancel
anything (e.g., from p2p_process_go_neg_req()). As such, it is not fine
to clear wps_method here even if it could be proper for some cases. For
now, revert that part to avoid regressions and consider clearing
wps_method on cancel separately.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In case we have replied to a peer's GO Negotiation Request frame with a
GO Negotiation Response frame using status code
info-currently-unavailable (1), the peer is likely going to wait for us
to initiate GO Negotiation on its Listen channel. We were previously
using alternativing send-GO-Neg-Req and Listen phase when providing that
response after the user had authorized the connection. However, the
Listen phase here is unnecessary in this case and will make the
connection take longer time to go through. Skip the Listen phase and
make the wait-for-GO-Neg-Resp timeout random between 100 and 200 ms to
avoid getting in sync with the peer. In practice, this will make us
retry GO Negotiation Request frames more frequently and remain on the
peer's Listen channel for most of the time when initiating GO
Negotiation after status=1 response.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There may be environments in which large number of devices are operating
on the social channels. In such cases, it is possible for the Action
frame TX operation wait for quite long time before being able to get the
frame out. To avoid triggering GO Negotiation failures, increase the
timeouts for GO Neg Req (with TX ACK) and GO Neg Resp (with or without
TX ACK as long as status=0) to 500 ms.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This flag will add ==== delimiter between to separate bss results.
Unlike the other BSS command MASK values, this delimiter is not
included by default to avoid issues with existing users of the BSS
command.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
It is possible for the driver to indicate multiple Probe Request frames
that would be processed in a single loop. If those frames happen to be
from a peer which with we are trying to start GO Negotiation, multiple
timeouts to start GO Negotiation (p2p_go_neg_start) could end up being
scheduled. This would result in confusing burst of multiple GO
Negotiation Request frames being sent once the RX loop finally
concludes. Avoid this by scheduling only a single eloop timeout to
trigger GO Negotiation regardless of how many Probe Request frames from
the peer is received. In addition, make sure this timeout gets canceled
in p2p_deinit().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we have already sent out GO Negotiation Response and are waiting for
the peer to reply with GO Negotiation Confirm, there is no point in
re-starting GO Negotiation based on Probe Request frame from the peer.
Doing that would just result in confusing GO Negotiation exchange with
multiple sessions running at the same time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The device that is selected as the GO shall incode P2P Group ID
attribute in GO Negotiation Response/Confirm message. Previously we did
not reject a message without that attribute since it was possible to
continue operations even without knowing the SSID. However, this can
potentially result in confusing results since missing P2P Group ID
attribute can be a sign of conflicting GO role determination (both
devices assuming the peer is the GO). To get clearer end result for the
GO Negotiation, reject this as a fatal error. In addition, stop GO
Negotiation if GO Negotiation Confirm indicates non-zero status since
that is also a fatal error.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 624b4d5a64 changed GO Negotiation
to use the same Dialog Token value for all retransmissions of the GO
Negotiation Request within the same session. However, it did leave the
tie breaker bit changing for each frame. While this should not have
caused issues for most cases, it looks like there are possible sequences
where the peer may end up replying to two GO Negotiation Request frames
with different tie breaker values. If in such a case the different GO
Negotiation Response frames are used at each device, GO role
determination may result in conflicting results when same GO intent is
used.
Fix this by assigning the tie breaker value at the same time with the
dialog token (i.e., when processing the p2p_connect command instead of
for each transmitted GO Negotiation Request frame) to avoid issues with
GO selection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's VHT capability is required for the
driver to establish a TDLS link in VHT mode with a compatible peer.
Pass this information to the driver when the peer station is
getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
WSC specification 2.0 section 7.4 describes OOB password to be expressed
in ASCII format (upper case hexdump) instead of raw binary.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 2d9ffe1e85 broke GAS server
callback for receiving Public Action frames. The incorrect context
pointer was used in the public_action_cb2 case. Fix this to use the
correct context pointer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Hostapd provides QoS info of the STA (Service Period & AC mask) to the
kernel during wpa_driver_nl80211_sta_add call. Bit 5 and Bit 6 of QoS
info represents the Max SP length. Fix an issue in the code to fetch the
Max SP by shifting right the QoS info by value WMM_QOSINFO_STA_SP_SHIFT.
(operator ">" is replaced with ">>" operator).
Signed-off-by: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
"WPS_NFC_TOKEN <WPS/NDEF>" used to generate a new NFC password token
regardless of whether there was a pre-configured token in the
configuration. Change this to use the pre-configured value, if
available, instead. This allows the same command to be used to write the
password token to an NFC tag more conveniently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The contents of the peer's capability and extended capability
information is required for the driver to perform TDLS P-UAPSD and Off
Channel operations. Pass this information to the driver when the peer
station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's HT capability and the QOS information is
required for the driver to perform TDLS operations. Pass this
information to the driver when the peer station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Registrar is allowed to propose another Device Password ID in M2. Make
Enrollee validate Device Password ID in M2 to check if this happened.
This commit adds support for changing from NFC password token to default
PIN for the case where the AP is the Enrollee and has both the NFC
password token and AP PIN enabled at the same time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit ffdaa05a6b added support for using
NFC password token from an AP. However, it had a bug that prevented the
wpa_supplicant wps_reg command from being used with "nfc-pw" as the PIN
value. Fix string comparison to handle this correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A TDLS Teardown frame with Reason Code 3 (Deauthenticated because
sending STA is leaving (or has left) IBSS or ESS) shall be transmitted
to all TDLS peer STAs (via the AP or via the direct path) prior to
transmitting a Disassociation frame or a Deauthentication frame to the
AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The driver may have cached (e.g., in cfg80211 BSS table) the scan
results for relatively long time. To avoid reporting stale information,
update P2P peers only based on results that have based on frames
received after the last p2p_find operation was started.
This helps especially in detecting when a previously operating GO stops
the group since the BSS entry for that could live for 30 seconds in the
cfg80211 cache. Running p2p_flush followed by p2p_find will now allow
wpa_supplicant to not add a P2P peer entry for that GO if the group had
been terminated just before that p2p_flush command. Previously, that GO
could have been indicated as a newly found device for up to 30 seconds
after it had stopped the group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
For various P2P use cases, it is useful to have more accurate timestamp
for the peer information update. This commit improves scan result
handling by using a single timestamp that is taken immediately after
fetching the results from the driver and then using that value to
calculate the time when the driver last updated the BSS entry. In
addition, more debug information is added for P2P peer updates to be
able to clearly see how old information is being used here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we discover a P2P peer based on a Beacon frame from the GO role, we
do not get information about the supported configuration methods. This
can result in issues if the P2P managing entity above wpa_supplicant is
not prepared to handling config_methods=0x0. To avoid this, postpone
reporting of the P2P-DEVICE-FOUND event when this happens on one of the
social channels. It would be good to be able to this on all channels,
but that could result in issues of never indicating the event for a peer
that is operating a GO on a channel that requires passive scanning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It could be possible for the scan results to include two entries for a
peer, one from the Listen state and the second one from the GO role. The
latter could be based on a Beason frame. If that happens and the entry
from GO is processed last, the P2P peer config_methods value could
potentially get cleared since Beacon frames do not include this
information in either WPS or P2P element. Avoid this by allowing the
config_methods value for P2P peers to be updated only if the new value
is non-zero.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since there could be multiple carrier records, it is cleaner to build
only the WPS carrier record instead of full NFC connection handover
request within wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Control interface command "NFC_GET_HANDOVER_SEL NDEF WPS-CR" can now be
used to fetch WPS carrier record from hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The capability itself isn't really affected by an OBSS
scan, only the HT operation must then be restricted to
20 MHz. Change this, and therefore use the secondary
channel configuration to determine the setting of the
OP_MODE_20MHZ_HT_STA_ASSOCED flag.
This shouldn't really change anything functionally,
it just makes the code a little less confusing and
is also needed to implement more dynamic bandwidth
changes if ever desired.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This adds a new getSessionId() callback for EAP peer methods to allow
EAP Session-Id to be derived. This commits implements this for EAP-FAST,
EAP-GPSK, EAP-IKEv2, EAP-PEAP, EAP-TLS, and EAP-TTLS.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In addition to the offload mechanism, the Android configuration and
makefiles are extended to allow this to be configured for the build by
dropping in platform specific configuration files and makefile without
having to modify any existing files.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
ANDROID_SETGROUPS_OVERRIDE macro can now be used to override setgroups()
values based on build configuration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When pending p2p_find fails we need to send p2p_stop_find event to
indicate the previous p2p_find command has been processed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 1a9f6509b3 added support for
fragmenting the P2P IE in Probe Response frames from a GO. However, it
did not take into account the possibility of Wi-Fi Display IE being
included in the same buffer and caused a regression for the cases where
Wi-Fi Display is enabled. Fix this by building the possibly fragmented
P2P IE first and then concatenating the separate IEs together.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
On the DMG (60 GHz) band, capability bits defined differently from
non-DMG ones. Adjust capability matching to cover both cases.
Also, for non-DMG bands, check ESS bit is set.
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
When AP mode operation reject the client, nl80211 layer advertises the
connect failed event with the reason for failures (for example, max
client reached, etc.) using NL80211_CMD_CONN_FAILED.
This patch adds some debug messages whenever such an event is received
from the nl80211 layer and also the same event is posted to the upper
layer via wpa_msg().
Signed-off-by: Raja Mani <rmani@qca.qualcomm.com>
The reason code used for calculating the MIC should correspond to the
reason code with which the teardown frame is sent, as the receiver shall
use the one obtained in the frame for validating the MIC.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If an implicit TDLS set up request is obtained on an existing link or an
to be established link, the previous link was not removed. This commit
disables the existing link on a new set up request. Also,
wpa_tdls_reneg() function was invoking wpa_tdls_start() on an already
existing peer for the case of internal setup, which is incorrect. Thus
the invocation of wpa_tdls_start() is removed in wpa_tdls_reneg() and
also this function is renamed to wps_tdls_remove() as it does not
renegotiation rather shall remove the link (if any) for the case of
external setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to have this check copied to each caller since this
needs to be done for every case when a new peer is being added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Peer entries were getting added on every discover request from the peer,
thus resulting in multiple entries with the same MAC address. Ensures
that a check is done for the presence of the peer entry and reuse the
existing entry instead of adding a new one.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
GAS server used the same public_action_cb mechanism as P2P to process
Action frames. This ended up overriding P2P processing of Action frames
while running an AP/GO interface with a build that enables Interworking
(e.g., for Hotspot 2.0) and a driver that uses hostapd for AP mode
SME/MLME. Fix this by adding a separate callback registration for the
GAS server. This should really be cleaned up by supporting arbitrary
number of callback handlers, but for now, this addresses the regression
with a minimal change.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Very basic support for OpenBSD. No support for scanning yet, so this needs
ap_scan=0 and expects that the user has configured the interface manually
using ifconfig(8).
Signed-hostap: Mark Kettenis <kettenis@openbsd.org>
Commit 6aaac006af modified the
pmksa_cache_init() prototype, but forgot to update the empty wrapper
function which is used when PMKSA caching is not included in the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When scan failed, the wpa_driver_nl80211_scan method tried
to recursively call itself, but it passed in the wrong argument
for the void*, and so then it crashed accessing bad memory.
With this fix, hostapd still will not retry the scan later, but
at least it will exit cleanly and won't polute the file system
with core files.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The P2P-FIND-STOPPED event was sent only in the P2P_SEARCH state, but
this needs to be send also in the new continue-search-when-ready states
P2P_CONTINUE_SEARCH_WHEN_READY and P2P_SEARCH_WHEN_READY for consistent
behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signal the start of EAP authentication as well as when additional
credentials are required to complete.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
This was previously included only with NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, but the
information is as useful (if not even more useful) for
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT. It should be noted that cfg80211 does not yet use
this attribute with NL80211_CMD_CONNECT, but that can be added easily.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Each GO Negotiation Request is (re)tried with an unique dialog token and
a GO Negotiation Response / Confirmation from the peer with a mismatched
dialog token is ignored which could result in a failure in this group
formation attempt. Thus, the P2P device would continue retrying the GO
Negotiation Request frames till the GO Negotiation Response frame with a
matching dialog token is received. To avoid the failures due to the
dialog token mismatch in retry cases if the peer is too slow to reply
within the timeout, the same dialog token value is used for every retry
in the same group formation handshake.
It should be noted that this can result in different contents of the GO
Negotiation Request frame being sent with the same dialog token value
since the tie breaker bit in GO Intent is still toggled for each
attempt. The specification is not very clear on what would be the
correct behavior here. Tie breaker bit is not updated on
"retransmissions", but that is more likely referring to the layer 2
retransmission and not the retry at higher layer using a new MMPDU.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows even more memory to be freed when the SAE instance enters
Accepted state. This leaves only the minimal needed memory allocated
during the association which is especially helpful for the AP
implementation where multiple stations may be associated concurrently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Most of the variables are not needed anymore once the SAE instance
has entered Accepted state. Free these to save memory.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The rand/mask values and commit scalar are derived using the exact same
operations, so only use a separate function for deriving the commit
element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to postpone this validation step to a separate
processing operation for the commit message, so move the minimal
validation tasks into the parsing functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Move the bignum comparison part into the bignum library to allow a
single implementation of rand generation for both ECC and FCC based
groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The groups 22, 23, and 24 are not based on a safe prime and generate a
prime order subgroup. As such, struct dh_group is also extended to
include the order for previously defined groups (q=(p-1)/2 since these
were based on a safe prime).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows FFC groups to be used with SAE. Though, these groups are not
included in the default sae_groups value based on what is available
since the FFC groups have the additional requirement of using a safe
prime with the current implementation (or specification of the group
order).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The optional "reason=<reason code>" parameter to the ctrl_iface
deauthenticate and disassociate commands can now be used to change the
reason code used in the disconnection frame. This can be used, e.g., by
P2P GO to disconnect a single P2P client from the group by sending it an
indication of the group getting terminated (Deauthentication frame with
reason code 3). It needs to be noted that the peer device is still in
possession on the PSK, so it can still reconnect to the group after this
if it does not follow the group termination indication.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit increases the maximum buffer size for P2P Client Info
advertized by the Group Owner in the Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use of two variables to track bounds checking seems to be a bit too much
for some static analyzers, so add an extra condition for buffer padding
to avoid incorrect warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These verify that a proper pointer type is used and in addition, seems
to get rid of some false static analyzer warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The code initializing GMK Counter uses the group pointer value as extra
entropy and to distinguish different group instances. Some static
analyzers complain about the sizeof(pointer) with memcpy, so use a more
explicit type casting to make it more obvious what the code is doing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd.conf sae_groups parameter can now be used to limit the set of
groups that the AP allows for SAE. Similarly, sae_groups parameter is
wpa_supplicant.conf can be used to set the preferred order of groups. By
default, all implemented groups are enabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In addition to the trivial change in adding the new group ientifier,
this required changes to KDF and random number generation to support
cases where the length of the prime in bits is not a multiple of eight.
The binary presentation of the value needs to be shifted so that the
unused most significant bits are the zero padding rather than the extra
bits in the end of the array.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In addition to the mandatory group 19 (256-bit random ECP group) add
support for groups 20 (384-bit), 25 (192-bit), and 26 (224-bit).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The counter>200 check needs to be done before the continue-on-not-found
case to be effective in stopping this loop.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The buffer is set based on maximum group prime length, but pwd-value
needs to be correct length for the negotiated group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the SAE implementation a bit simpler by not having to build
the bignum for group order during execution.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can now be configured to use anti-clogging mechanism based on
the new sae_anti_clogging_threshold parameter (which is
dot11RSNASAEAntiCloggingThreshold in the standard). The token is
generated using a temporary key and the peer station's MAC address.
wpa_supplicant will re-try SAE authentication with the token included if
commit message is rejected with a token request.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 11.3.8.6.1: If there is a protocol instance for
the peer and it is in Authenticated state, the new Commit Message
shall be dropped if the peer-scalar is identical to the one used in
the existing protocol instance.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The enum values for struct sae_data::state now match the protocol
instance states as defined in IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 11.3.8.2.2
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even if the PAC file does not start with the proper header line, allow
the file to be used if it is empty. [Bug 423]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PMKSA cache expiration timer was not actually ever initialized since
the only place for registering the timeout was in the timeout handler.
Fix this by initializing the timer whenever a new PMKSA cache entry is
added to the beginning of the list (i.e., when it was the first entry or
expires before the entry that was previously going to expire first).
[Bug 393]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 4378fc14eb started using QoS Data
frames for QoS STAs. It used the correct flags value for WPA/RSN
EAPOL-Key frames, but wrong flags for IEEE 802.1X EAPOL frames. The
WPA_STA_WMM value used in driver_nl80211.c happens to be identical to
WLAN_STA_ASSOC in sta->flags and this makes driver_nl80211.c try to use
QoS header for all STAs. Fix this by properly converting the flags from
WLAN_STA_* to WPA_STA_*. [Bug 426]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 68a41bbb44 broke fallback from
reauth id to fullauth id by not allowing a second AKA/Identity round to
be used after having received unrecognized reauth_id in the first round.
Fix this by allowing fullauth id to be requested in such a case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 175171ac6c ensured that the PD
requests are retried in join-a-running group case and the Enrollee is
started on either receiving the PD response or after the retries. Each
PD request is retried with an unique dialog token and a PD response from
the GO with a mismatched dialog token is ignored. Thus, the P2P client
would continue retrying the PD requests till the response with a
matching dialog token is obtained. This would result in the GO getting
multiple PD requests and a corresponding user notification (POP UP) in
implementations where each PD request results in a POP UP, resulting in
a bad user experience. To avoid such behavior, the same dialog token
value is used for every retry in the same PD exchange.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_driver_nl80211_ap() returned error if set_freq failed, but left the
previously set nlmode to GO/AP. While this should not be issue for most
purposes, it leaves the interface in somewhat unexpected state and could
potentially affect operations prior to next connection attempt. Address
this by restoring the previous nlmode if AP mode cannot be started for
some reason.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to read the code for the two possible cases
(forced/preferred channel and automatic channel selection).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since the operating channel is randomly set to 1/6/11 on init, which is
commonly included in the channel intersection, we were effectively
ignoring the set of P2P preferred channels when trying to improve
channel selection after having received peer information. Fix this by
trying to get the best channel we can, unless the user hard coded the
operating channel in the configuration file or p2p_connect command. Fall
back to the initial randomly selected channel if a better one cannot be
chosen.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Even if the peer does not accept the forced channel, we should not allow
the forced_freq parameter to be be overridden, i.e., such a case needs
to result in GO Negotiation failure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Both p2p_connect and p2p_authorize use the same functionality to select
the channel preferences for GO Negotiation. The part of setting this
device flag was copied to each function, but it can also be handled by
the shared function after some reordering of code.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The exact same mechanism was used for determining the operating channel
at the device that becomes the GO regardless of whether this was
triggered by reception of GO Negotiation Request of Response frame. Use
a shared function to avoid duplicated implementation and potential
differences in the future.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When no other user preference is specified, opt to use an operating
channel that allows HT40 operation. This way, if driver capabilities
and regulatory constraints allow, we might enjoy increased bandwidth.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
cfg80211 caches the scan results according the channel number. Due to
the 15 sec aging this might cause the user mode to see more than one
scan result with the same BSSID, e.g. - one scan result for the
P2P Device and one for the P2P GO (once it's enabled).
Fix this by updating the device entry only if the new peer entry is
newer than the one previously stored.
Signed-off-by: Yoni Divinsky <yoni.divinsky@ti.com>
Signed-off-by: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-off-by: Igal Chernobelsky <igalc@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Add some more functionality for BSS Transition Management:
- advertise support for BSS Transition Management in extended
capabilities element
- add hostapd.conf parameter bss_transition=1 for enabling support
for BSS Transition Management
- add "hostapd_cli disassoc_imminent <STA> <num TBTTs>" for sending
disassociation imminent notifications for testing purposes
- wpa_supplicant: trigger a new scan to find another BSS if the
current AP indicates disassociation imminent (TODO: the old AP needs
to be marked to use lower priority to avoid re-selecting it)
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can run with different VIF when using nl80211. Events about MIC
failures have to be processed in context of the VIF which received it
and not in context of the primary VIF. Otherwise the station belonging
to this VIF may not be found in the primary VIF station hash and
therefore no countermeasures are started or the countermeasures are
started for the wrong VIF.
Signed-hostap: Sven Eckelmann <sven@open-mesh.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
This optional attribute may make it easier to bind together the
Access-Request and Accounting-Request messages. The accounting session
identifier is now generated when the STA associates instead of waiting
for the actual session to start after successfull authentication.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Basic support for the 60 GHz band. Neither P2P nor WPS are yet taken
care off. Allows to start AP with very simple config:
network={
ssid="test"
mode=2
frequency=60480
key_mgmt=NONE
}
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The config says that the default for ap_table_max_size is 255 and the
default for ap_table_expiration_time is 60. But the code doesn't reflect
the default values mentioned in the sample config file.
These variables completely disable the code for Overlapping Legacy BSS
Condition by default when they are not correctly initialized. WFA
certification requires this feature and therefore an AP would have
failed the certification process unless they were initialized manually
using the configuration file.
Signed-hostap: Sven Eckelmann <sven@open-mesh.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
WSC IE in Beacon and Probe Response frames should behave consistently
as far as the RF Bands attribute is concerned. Use the same dualband
condition for adding this into Probe Response frames since the value
is not really needed if the AP is not a dualband AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If separate hostapd processes are used for different RF bands, the
dualband parameter for WPS was not set correctly. Allow dualband
indication (mainly, addition of RF bands attribute for PBC session
overlap detection) also based on wps_rf_bands value (if set to "ag").
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows Probe Request frame processing to compare the configured
SSID to the SSID List element in addition to the SSID element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build
options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to
define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build.
In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and
WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These fields do not use AES keywrap. Instead, they are protected with
management frame protection (and not included if PMF is disabled).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Expiry can always trigger a deauthentication, but otherwise,
deauthentication should only happen when the *current* cache entry is
removed and not being replaced. It should not happen when the current
PMK just happens to match the PMK of the entry being removed, since
multiple entries can have the same PMK when OKC is used and these
entries are often removed at different times.
This fixes an issue where eviction of the oldest inactive entry due to
adding a newer entry to a full cache caused a deauthentication when the
entry being removed had the same PMK as the current entry.
Signed-hostap: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
pmksa_cache_free_entry() takes care of updated the list head pointer
(pmksa->pmksa), so no need to do this change in the caller.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use the shared_secret pointer from RADIUS client implementation instead
of getting this from hostapd configuration data.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds support for multiple PSKs per station when using a RADIUS
authentication server to fetch the PSKs during MAC address
authentication step. This can be useful if multiple users share a
device but each user has his or her own private passphrase.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
